diff --git a/am/cmacros.am b/am/cmacros.am
index 4b4856051..8bd839c46 100644
--- a/am/cmacros.am
+++ b/am/cmacros.am
@@ -1,79 +1,81 @@
# cmacros.am - C macro definitions
# Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
#
# This file is part of GnuPG.
#
# GnuPG is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
# the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
# (at your option) any later version.
#
# GnuPG is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
# GNU General Public License for more details.
#
# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
# along with this program; if not, see .
localedir = $(datadir)/locale
+# NB: AM_CFLAGS may also be used by tools running on the build
+# platform to create source files.
AM_CPPFLAGS += -DLOCALEDIR=\"$(localedir)\"
if ! HAVE_DOSISH_SYSTEM
AM_CPPFLAGS += -DGNUPG_BINDIR="\"$(bindir)\"" \
-DGNUPG_LIBEXECDIR="\"$(libexecdir)\"" \
-DGNUPG_LIBDIR="\"$(libdir)/@PACKAGE@\"" \
-DGNUPG_DATADIR="\"$(datadir)/@PACKAGE@\"" \
-DGNUPG_SYSCONFDIR="\"$(sysconfdir)/@PACKAGE@\"" \
-DGNUPG_LOCALSTATEDIR="\"$(localstatedir)\""
endif
# If a specific protect tool program has been defined, pass its name
# to cc. Note that these macros should not be used directly but via
# the gnupg_module_name function.
if GNUPG_AGENT_PGM
AM_CPPFLAGS += -DGNUPG_DEFAULT_AGENT="\"@GNUPG_AGENT_PGM@\""
endif
if GNUPG_PINENTRY_PGM
AM_CPPFLAGS += -DGNUPG_DEFAULT_PINENTRY="\"@GNUPG_PINENTRY_PGM@\""
endif
if GNUPG_SCDAEMON_PGM
AM_CPPFLAGS += -DGNUPG_DEFAULT_SCDAEMON="\"@GNUPG_SCDAEMON_PGM@\""
endif
if GNUPG_DIRMNGR_PGM
AM_CPPFLAGS += -DGNUPG_DEFAULT_DIRMNGR="\"@GNUPG_DIRMNGR_PGM@\""
endif
if GNUPG_PROTECT_TOOL_PGM
AM_CPPFLAGS += -DGNUPG_DEFAULT_PROTECT_TOOL="\"@GNUPG_PROTECT_TOOL_PGM@\""
endif
if GNUPG_DIRMNGR_LDAP_PGM
AM_CPPFLAGS += -DGNUPG_DEFAULT_DIRMNGR_LDAP="\"@GNUPG_DIRMNGR_LDAP_PGM@\""
endif
# Under Windows we use LockFileEx. WindowsCE provides this only on
# the WindowsMobile 6 platform and thus we need to use the coredll6
# import library. We also want to use a stacksize of 256k instead of
# the 2MB which is the default with cegcc. 256k is the largest stack
# we use with pth.
if HAVE_W32CE_SYSTEM
extra_sys_libs = -lcoredll6
extra_bin_ldflags = -Wl,--stack=0x40000
else
extra_sys_libs =
extra_bin_ldflags =
endif
if HAVE_W32_SYSTEM
.rc.o:
$(WINDRES) $(DEFAULT_INCLUDES) $(INCLUDES) "$<" "$@"
endif
resource_objs =
# Convenience macros
libcommon = ../common/libcommon.a
libcommonpth = ../common/libcommonpth.a
libcommontls = ../common/libcommontls.a
libcommontlsnpth = ../common/libcommontlsnpth.a
diff --git a/doc/Makefile.am b/doc/Makefile.am
index 6d66679f3..ee8bca2ad 100644
--- a/doc/Makefile.am
+++ b/doc/Makefile.am
@@ -1,141 +1,158 @@
# Copyright (C) 2002, 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
#
# This file is part of GnuPG.
#
# GnuPG is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
# the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
# (at your option) any later version.
#
# GnuPG is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
# GNU General Public License for more details.
#
# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
# along with this program; if not, see .
## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
+AM_CPPFLAGS =
+
+include $(top_srcdir)/am/cmacros.am
+
examples = examples/README examples/scd-event examples/trustlist.txt \
examples/gpgconf.conf examples/pwpattern.list
helpfiles = help.txt help.be.txt help.ca.txt help.cs.txt \
help.da.txt help.de.txt help.el.txt help.eo.txt \
help.es.txt help.et.txt help.fi.txt help.fr.txt \
help.gl.txt help.hu.txt help.id.txt help.it.txt \
help.ja.txt help.nb.txt help.pl.txt help.pt.txt \
help.pt_BR.txt help.ro.txt help.ru.txt help.sk.txt \
help.sv.txt help.tr.txt help.zh_CN.txt help.zh_TW.txt
EXTRA_DIST = samplekeys.asc mksamplekeys \
gnupg-logo.eps gnupg-logo.pdf gnupg-logo.png gnupg-logo-tr.png\
gnupg-card-architecture.eps gnupg-card-architecture.png \
gnupg-card-architecture.pdf \
- FAQ gnupg7.texi \
+ FAQ gnupg7.texi mkdefsinc.c defsincdate \
opt-homedir.texi see-also-note.texi specify-user-id.texi \
gpgv.texi yat2m.c ChangeLog-2011 whats-new-in-2.1.txt
BUILT_SOURCES = gnupg-card-architecture.eps gnupg-card-architecture.png \
- gnupg-card-architecture.pdf
+ gnupg-card-architecture.pdf defsincdate
info_TEXINFOS = gnupg.texi
dist_pkgdata_DATA = qualified.txt com-certs.pem $(helpfiles)
nobase_dist_doc_DATA = FAQ DETAILS HACKING DCO TRANSLATE OpenPGP KEYSERVER \
$(examples)
#dist_html_DATA =
gnupg_TEXINFOS = \
gpg.texi gpgsm.texi gpg-agent.texi scdaemon.texi instguide.texi \
tools.texi debugging.texi glossary.texi contrib.texi gpl.texi \
sysnotes.texi gnupg-card-architecture.fig dirmngr.texi \
howtos.texi howto-create-a-server-cert.texi
DVIPS = TEXINPUTS="$(srcdir)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" dvips
AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS = -I $(srcdir) --css-ref=/share/site.css
YAT2M_OPTIONS = -I $(srcdir) \
--release "GnuPG @PACKAGE_VERSION@" --source "GNU Privacy Guard 2.1"
myman_sources = gnupg7.texi gpg.texi gpgsm.texi gpg-agent.texi \
dirmngr.texi scdaemon.texi tools.texi
myman_pages = gpg2.1 gpgsm.1 gpg-agent.1 dirmngr.8 scdaemon.1 gpgv2.1 \
watchgnupg.1 gpgconf.1 addgnupghome.8 gpg-preset-passphrase.1 \
gpg-connect-agent.1 gpgparsemail.1 symcryptrun.1 \
gpgsm-gencert.sh.1 applygnupgdefaults.8 gpg-zip.1 \
dirmngr-client.1
man_MANS = $(myman_pages) gnupg.7
watchgnupg_SOURCE = gnupg.texi
-CLEANFILES = yat2m
+CLEANFILES = yat2m mkdefsinc defs.inc
DISTCLEANFILES = gnupg.tmp gnupg.ops yat2m-stamp.tmp yat2m-stamp \
$(myman_pages) gnupg.7
yat2m: yat2m.c
$(CC_FOR_BUILD) -o $@ $(srcdir)/yat2m.c
+mkdefsinc: mkdefsinc.c Makefile ../config.h
+ $(CC_FOR_BUILD) -I. -I.. -I$(srcdir) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) \
+ -o $@ $(srcdir)/mkdefsinc.c
+
.fig.png:
fig2dev -L png `test -f '$<' || echo '$(srcdir)/'`$< $@
.fig.jpg:
fig2dev -L jpeg `test -f '$<' || echo '$(srcdir)/'`$< $@
.fig.eps:
fig2dev -L eps `test -f '$<' || echo '$(srcdir)/'`$< $@
.fig.pdf:
fig2dev -L pdf `test -f '$<' || echo '$(srcdir)/'`$< $@
-yat2m-stamp: $(myman_sources)
+yat2m-stamp: $(myman_sources) defs.inc
@rm -f yat2m-stamp.tmp
@touch yat2m-stamp.tmp
for file in $(myman_sources) ; do \
./yat2m $(YAT2M_OPTIONS) --store \
`test -f '$$file' || echo '$(srcdir)/'`$$file ; done
@mv -f yat2m-stamp.tmp $@
yat2m-stamp: yat2m
-$(myman_pages) gnupg.7 : yat2m-stamp
+$(myman_pages) gnupg.7 : yat2m-stamp defs.inc
@if test -f $@; then :; else \
trap 'rm -rf yat2m-stamp yat2m-lock' 1 2 13 15; \
if mkdir yat2m-lock 2>/dev/null; then \
rm -f yat2m-stamp; \
$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) yat2m-stamp; \
rmdir yat2m-lock; \
else \
while test -d yat2m-lock; do sleep 1; done; \
test -f yat2m-stamp; exit $$?; \
fi; \
fi
-# Make sure that gnupg.texi is touched if any other source file has
-# been modified. This is required so that the version.texi magic
-# updates the release date.
-gnupg.texi : $(gnupg_TEXINFOS)
- touch $(srcdir)/gnupg.texi
+dist-hook: defsincdate
+
+defsincdate: $(gnupg_TEXINFOS)
+ : >defsincdate ; \
+ if test -d $(top_srcdir)/.git; then \
+ (cd $(srcdir) && git log -1 --format='%ct' \
+ -- $(gnupg_TEXINFOS) 2>/dev/null) >>defsincdate; \
+ fi
+
+defs.inc : defsincdate Makefile mkdefsinc
+ incd="`test -f defsincdate || echo '$(srcdir)/'`defsincdate"; \
+ ./mkdefsinc -C $(srcdir) --date "`cat $$incd 2>/dev/null`" \
+ $(gnupg_TEXINFOS) >$@
+
online: gnupg.html gnupg.pdf
set -e; \
echo "Uploading current manuals to www.gnupg.org ..."; \
cp $(srcdir)/gnupg-logo-tr.png gnupg.html/; \
user=werner ; webhost="ftp.gnupg.org" ; dashdevel="" ; \
if echo "@PACKAGE_VERSION@" | grep -- "-beta" >/dev/null; then \
dashdevel="-devel" ; \
else \
rsync -v gnupg.pdf $${user}@$${webhost}:webspace/manuals/ ; \
fi ; \
cd gnupg.html ; \
rsync -vr --exclude='.git' . \
$${user}@$${webhost}:webspace/manuals/gnupg$${dashdevel}/
diff --git a/doc/debugging.texi b/doc/debugging.texi
index 35cb699f0..7965dbc8f 100644
--- a/doc/debugging.texi
+++ b/doc/debugging.texi
@@ -1,280 +1,280 @@
@c Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
@c This is part of the GnuPG manual.
@c For copying conditions, see the file gnupg.texi.
@node Debugging
@chapter How to solve problems
Everyone knows that software often does not do what it should do and thus
there is a need to track down problems. We call this debugging in a
reminiscent to the moth jamming a relay in a Mark II box back in 1947.
Most of the problems a merely configuration and user problems but
nevertheless there are the most annoying ones and responsible for many
gray hairs. We try to give some guidelines here on how to identify and
solve the problem at hand.
@menu
* Debugging Tools:: Description of some useful tools.
* Debugging Hints:: Various hints on debugging.
* Common Problems:: Commonly seen problems.
* Architecture Details:: How the whole thing works internally.
@end menu
@node Debugging Tools
@section Debugging Tools
The GnuPG distribution comes with a couple of tools, useful to help find
and solving problems.
@menu
* kbxutil:: Scrutinizing a keybox file.
@end menu
@node kbxutil
@subsection Scrutinizing a keybox file
A keybox is a file format used to store public keys along with meta
information and indices. The commonly used one is the file
@file{pubring.kbx} in the @file{.gnupg} directory. It contains all
X.509 certificates as well as OpenPGP keys@footnote{Well, OpenPGP keys
are not implemented, @command{gpg} still used the keyring file
@file{pubring.gpg}} .
@noindent
When called the standard way, e.g.:
@samp{kbxutil ~/.gnupg/pubring.kbx}
@noindent
it lists all records (called @acronym{blobs}) with there meta-information
in a human readable format.
@noindent
To see statistics on the keybox in question, run it using
@samp{kbxutil --stats ~/.gnupg/pubring.kbx}
@noindent
and you get an output like:
@example
Total number of blobs: 99
header: 1
empty: 0
openpgp: 0
x509: 98
non flagged: 81
secret flagged: 0
ephemeral flagged: 17
@end example
In this example you see that the keybox does not have any OpenPGP keys
but contains 98 X.509 certificates and a total of 17 keys or certificates
are flagged as ephemeral, meaning that they are only temporary stored
(cached) in the keybox and won't get listed using the usual commands
provided by @command{gpgsm} or @command{gpg}. 81 certificates are stored
in a standard way and directly available from @command{gpgsm}.
@noindent
To find duplicated certificates and keyblocks in a keybox file (this
should not occur but sometimes things go wrong), run it using
@samp{kbxutil --find-dups ~/.gnupg/pubring.kbx}
@node Debugging Hints
@section Various hints on debugging.
@itemize @bullet
@item How to find the IP address of a keyserver
If a round robin URL of is used for a keyserver
(e.g. subkeys.gnupg.org); it is not easy to see what server is actually
used. Using the keyserver debug option as in
@smallexample
gpg --keyserver-options debug=1 -v --refresh-key 1E42B367
@end smallexample
is thus often helpful. Note that the actual output depends on the
backend and may change from release to release.
@item Logging on WindowsCE
For development, the best logging method on WindowsCE is the use of
remote debugging using a log file name of @file{tcp://:}.
The command @command{watchgnupg} may be used on the remote host to listen
on the given port. (@pxref{option watchgnupg --tcp}). For in the field
tests it is better to make use of the logging facility provided by the
@command{gpgcedev} driver (part of libassuan); this is enabled by using
a log file name of @file{GPG2:}. (@pxref{option --log-file}).
@end itemize
@node Common Problems
@section Commonly Seen Problems
@itemize @bullet
@item Error code @samp{Not supported} from Dirmngr
Most likely the option @option{enable-ocsp} is active for gpgsm
but Dirmngr's OCSP feature has not been enabled using
@option{allow-ocsp} in @file{dirmngr.conf}.
@item The Curses based Pinentry does not work
The far most common reason for this is that the environment variable
@code{GPG_TTY} has not been set correctly. Make sure that it has been
set to a real tty devce and not just to @samp{/dev/tty};
i.e. @samp{GPG_TTY=tty} is plainly wrong; what you want is
@samp{GPG_TTY=`tty`} --- note the back ticks. Also make sure that
this environment variable gets exported, that is you should follow up
the setting with an @samp{export GPG_TTY} (assuming a Bourne style
shell). Even for GUI based Pinentries; you should have set
@code{GPG_TTY}. See the section on installing the @command{gpg-agent}
on how to do it.
@item SSH hangs while a popping up pinentry was expected
SSH has no way to tell the gpg-agent what terminal or X display it is
running on. So when remotely logging into a box where a gpg-agent with
SSH support is running, the pinentry will get popped up on whatever
display the gpg-agent has been started. To solve this problem you may
issue the command
@smallexample
echo UPDATESTARTUPTTY | gpg-connect-agent
@end smallexample
and the next pinentry will pop up on your display or screen. However,
you need to kill the running pinentry first because only one pinentry
may be running at once. If you plan to use ssh on a new display you
should issue the above command before invoking ssh or any other service
making use of ssh.
@item Exporting a secret key without a certificate
I may happen that you have created a certificate request using
@command{gpgsm} but not yet received and imported the certificate from
the CA. However, you want to export the secret key to another machine
right now to import the certificate over there then. You can do this
with a little trick but it requires that you know the approximate time
you created the signing request. By running the command
@smallexample
ls -ltr ~/.gnupg/private-keys-v1.d
@end smallexample
you get a listing of all private keys under control of @command{gpg-agent}.
Pick the key which best matches the creation time and run the command
@cartouche
@smallexample
- /usr/local/libexec/gpg-protect-tool --p12-export \
+ @value{LIBEXECDIR}/gpg-protect-tool --p12-export \
~/.gnupg/private-keys-v1.d/@var{foo} >@var{foo}.p12
@end smallexample
@end cartouche
(Please adjust the path to @command{gpg-protect-tool} to the appropriate
location). @var{foo} is the name of the key file you picked (it should
have the suffix @file{.key}). A Pinentry box will pop up and ask you
for the current passphrase of the key and a new passphrase to protect it
in the pkcs#12 file.
To import the created file on the machine you use this command:
@cartouche
@smallexample
- /usr/local/libexec/gpg-protect-tool --p12-import --store @var{foo}.p12
+ @value{LIBEXECDIR}/gpg-protect-tool --p12-import --store @var{foo}.p12
@end smallexample
@end cartouche
You will be asked for the pkcs#12 passphrase and a new passphrase to
protect the imported private key at its new location.
Note that there is no easy way to match existing certificates with
stored private keys because some private keys are used for Secure Shell
or other purposes and don't have a corresponding certificate.
@item A root certificate does not verify
A common problem is that the root certificate misses the required
basicConstraints attribute and thus @command{gpgsm} rejects this
certificate. An error message indicating ``no value'' is a sign for
such a certificate. You may use the @code{relax} flag in
@file{trustlist.txt} to accept the certificate anyway. Note that the
fingerprint and this flag may only be added manually to
@file{trustlist.txt}.
@item Error message: ``digest algorithm N has not been enabled''
The signature is broken. You may try the option
@option{--extra-digest-algo SHA256} to workaround the problem. The
number N is the internal algorithm identifier; for example 8 refers to
SHA-256.
@item The Windows version does not work under Wine
When running the W32 version of @command{gpg} under Wine you may get
an error messages like:
@smallexample
gpg: fatal: WriteConsole failed: Access denied
@end smallexample
@noindent
The solution is to use the command @command{wineconsole}.
Some operations like gen-key really want to talk to the console directly
for increased security (for example to prevent the passphrase from
appearing on the screen). So, you should use @command{wineconsole}
instead of @command{wine}, which will launch a windows console that
implements those additional features.
@item Why does GPG's --search-key list weird keys?
For performance reasons the keyservers do not check the keys the same
way @command{gpg} does. It may happen that the listing of keys
available on the keyservers shows keys with wrong user IDs or with user
Ids from other keys. If you try to import this key, the bad keys or bad
user ids won't get imported, though. This is a bit unfortunate but we
can't do anything about it without actually downloading the keys.
@end itemize
@c ********************************************
@c *** Architecture Details *****************
@c ********************************************
@node Architecture Details
@section How the whole thing works internally.
@menu
* GnuPG-1 and GnuPG-2:: Relationship between the two branches.
@end menu
@node GnuPG-1 and GnuPG-2
@subsection Relationship between the two branches.
Here is a little picture showing how the components work together:
@image{gnupg-card-architecture, 10cm}
@noindent
Lets try to explain it:
TO BE DONE.
diff --git a/doc/dirmngr.texi b/doc/dirmngr.texi
index cf35c47ed..d62e2d59c 100644
--- a/doc/dirmngr.texi
+++ b/doc/dirmngr.texi
@@ -1,1075 +1,1077 @@
@c Copyright (C) 2002 Klar"alvdalens Datakonsult AB
@c Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 g10 Code GmbH
@c This is part of the GnuPG manual.
@c For copying conditions, see the file gnupg.texi.
+@include defs.inc
+
@node Invoking DIRMNGR
@chapter Invoking DIRMNGR
@cindex DIRMNGR command options
@cindex command options
@cindex options, DIRMNGR command
@manpage dirmngr.8
@ifset manverb
.B dirmngr
\- CRL and OCSP daemon
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B dirmngr
.RI [ options ]
.I command
.RI [ args ]
@end ifset
@mansect description
Since version 2.1 of GnuPG, @command{dirmngr} takes care of accessing
the OpenPGP keyservers. As with previous versions it is also used as
a server for managing and downloading certificate revocation lists
(CRLs) for X.509 certificates, downloading X.509 certificates, and
providing access to OCSP providers. Dirmngr is invoked internally by
@command{gpg}, @command{gpgsm}, or via the @command{gpg-connect-agent}
tool.
For historical reasons it is also possible to start @command{dirmngr}
in a system daemon mode which uses a different directory layout.
However, this mode is deprecated and may eventually be removed.
@manpause
@noindent
@xref{Option Index},for an index to @command{DIRMNGR}'s commands and
options.
@mancont
@menu
* Dirmngr Commands:: List of all commands.
* Dirmngr Options:: List of all options.
* Dirmngr Configuration:: Configuration files.
* Dirmngr Signals:: Use of signals.
* Dirmngr Examples:: Some usage examples.
* Dirmngr Protocol:: The protocol dirmngr uses.
@end menu
@node Dirmngr Commands
@section Commands
@mansect commands
Commands are not distinguished from options except for the fact that
only one command is allowed.
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --version
@opindex version
Print the program version and licensing information. Note that you cannot
abbreviate this command.
@item --help, -h
@opindex help
Print a usage message summarizing the most useful command-line options.
Not that you cannot abbreviate this command.
@item --dump-options
@opindex dump-options
Print a list of all available options and commands. Note that you cannot
abbreviate this command.
@item --server
@opindex server
Run in server mode and wait for commands on the @code{stdin}. The
default mode is to create a socket and listen for commands there.
This is only used for testing.
@item --daemon
@opindex daemon
Run in background daemon mode and listen for commands on a socket.
Note that this also changes the default home directory and enables the
internal certificate validation code. This mode is deprecated.
@item --list-crls
@opindex list-crls
List the contents of the CRL cache on @code{stdout}. This is probably
only useful for debugging purposes.
@item --load-crl @var{file}
@opindex load-crl
This command requires a filename as additional argument, and it will
make Dirmngr try to import the CRL in @var{file} into it's cache.
Note, that this is only possible if Dirmngr is able to retrieve the
CA's certificate directly by its own means. In general it is better
to use @code{gpgsm}'s @code{--call-dirmngr loadcrl filename} command
so that @code{gpgsm} can help dirmngr.
@item --fetch-crl @var{url}
@opindex fetch-crl
This command requires an URL as additional argument, and it will make
dirmngr try to retrieve an import the CRL from that @var{url} into
it's cache. This is mainly useful for debugging purposes. The
@command{dirmngr-client} provides the same feature for a running dirmngr.
@item --shutdown
@opindex shutdown
This commands shuts down an running instance of Dirmngr. This command
has currently no effect.
@item --flush
@opindex flush
This command removes all CRLs from Dirmngr's cache. Client requests
will thus trigger reading of fresh CRLs.
@end table
@mansect options
@node Dirmngr Options
@section Option Summary
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --options @var{file}
@opindex options
Reads configuration from @var{file} instead of from the default
per-user configuration file. The default configuration file is named
@file{dirmngr.conf} and expected in the home directory.
@item --homedir @var{dir}
@opindex options
Set the name of the home directory to @var{dir}. This option is only
effective when used on the command line. The default depends on the
running mode:
@table @asis
@item With @code{--daemon} given on the commandline
-the directory named @file{/etc/gnupg} is used for configuration files
-and @file{/var/cache/gnupg} for cached CRLs.
+the directory named @file{@value{SYSCONFDIR}} is used for configuration files
+and @file{@value{LOCALCACHEDIR}} for cached CRLs.
@item Without @code{--daemon} given on the commandline
the directory named @file{.gnupg} directly below the home directory
of the user unless the environment variable @code{GNUPGHOME} has been set
in which case its value will be used. All kind of data is stored below
this directory.
@end table
@item -v
@item --verbose
@opindex v
@opindex verbose
Outputs additional information while running.
You can increase the verbosity by giving several
verbose commands to @sc{dirmngr}, such as @option{-vv}.
@item --log-file @var{file}
@opindex log-file
Append all logging output to @var{file}. This is very helpful in
seeing what the agent actually does.
@item --debug-level @var{level}
@opindex debug-level
Select the debug level for investigating problems. @var{level} may be a
numeric value or by a keyword:
@table @code
@item none
No debugging at all. A value of less than 1 may be used instead of
the keyword.
@item basic
Some basic debug messages. A value between 1 and 2 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item advanced
More verbose debug messages. A value between 3 and 5 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item expert
Even more detailed messages. A value between 6 and 8 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item guru
All of the debug messages you can get. A value greater than 8 may be
used instead of the keyword. The creation of hash tracing files is
only enabled if the keyword is used.
@end table
How these messages are mapped to the actual debugging flags is not
specified and may change with newer releases of this program. They are
however carefully selected to best aid in debugging.
@item --debug @var{flags}
@opindex debug
This option is only useful for debugging and the behaviour may change at
any time without notice. FLAGS are bit encoded and may be given in
usual C-Syntax.
@item --debug-all
@opindex debug-all
Same as @code{--debug=0xffffffff}
@item --gnutls-debug @var{level}
@opindex gnutls-debug
Enable debugging of GNUTLS at @var{level}.
@item --debug-wait @var{n}
@opindex debug-wait
When running in server mode, wait @var{n} seconds before entering the
actual processing loop and print the pid. This gives time to attach a
debugger.
@item -s
@itemx --sh
@itemx -c
@itemx --csh
@opindex s
@opindex sh
@opindex c
@opindex csh
Format the info output in daemon mode for use with the standard Bourne
shell respective the C-shell . The default ist to guess it based on the
environment variable @code{SHELL} which is in almost all cases
sufficient.
@item --force
@opindex force
Enabling this option forces loading of expired CRLs; this is only
useful for debugging.
@item --disable-ldap
@opindex disable-ldap
Entirely disables the use of LDAP.
@item --disable-http
@opindex disable-http
Entirely disables the use of HTTP.
@item --ignore-http-dp
@opindex ignore-http-dp
When looking for the location of a CRL, the to be tested certificate
usually contains so called @dfn{CRL Distribution Point} (DP) entries
which are URLs describing the way to access the CRL. The first found DP
entry is used. With this option all entries using the @acronym{HTTP}
scheme are ignored when looking for a suitable DP.
@item --ignore-ldap-dp
@opindex ignore-ldap-dp
This is similar to @option{--ignore-http-dp} but ignores entries using
the @acronym{LDAP} scheme. Both options may be combined resulting in
ignoring DPs entirely.
@item --ignore-ocsp-service-url
@opindex ignore-ocsp-service-url
Ignore all OCSP URLs contained in the certificate. The effect is to
force the use of the default responder.
@item --honor-http-proxy
@opindex honor-http-proxy
If the environment variable @env{http_proxy} has been set, use its
value to access HTTP servers.
@item --http-proxy @var{host}[:@var{port}]
@opindex http-proxy
Use @var{host} and @var{port} to access HTTP servers. The use of this
option overrides the environment variable @env{http_proxy} regardless
whether @option{--honor-http-proxy} has been set.
@item --ldap-proxy @var{host}[:@var{port}]
@opindex ldap-proxy
Use @var{host} and @var{port} to connect to LDAP servers. If @var{port}
is ommitted, port 389 (standard LDAP port) is used. This overrides any
specified host and port part in a LDAP URL and will also be used if host
and port have been ommitted from the URL.
@item --only-ldap-proxy
@opindex only-ldap-proxy
Never use anything else but the LDAP "proxy" as configured with
@option{--ldap-proxy}. Usually @command{dirmngr} tries to use other
configured LDAP server if the connection using the "proxy" failed.
@item --ldapserverlist-file @var{file}
@opindex ldapserverlist-file
Read the list of LDAP servers to consult for CRLs and certificates from
file instead of the default per-user ldap server list file. The default
value for @var{file} is @file{dirmngr_ldapservers.conf} or
@file{ldapservers.conf} when running in @option{--daemon} mode.
This server list file contains one LDAP server per line in the format
@sc{hostname:port:username:password:base_dn}
Lines starting with a @samp{#} are comments.
Note that as usual all strings entered are expected to be UTF-8 encoded.
Obviously this will lead to problems if the password has orginally been
encoded as Latin-1. There is no other solution here than to put such a
password in the binary encoding into the file (i.e. non-ascii characters
won't show up readable).@footnote{The @command{gpgconf} tool might be
helpful for frontends as it allows to edit this configuration file using
percent escaped strings.}
@item --ldaptimeout @var{secs}
@opindex ldaptimeout
Specify the number of seconds to wait for an LDAP query before timing
out. The default is currently 100 seconds. 0 will never timeout.
@item --add-servers
@opindex add-servers
This options makes dirmngr add any servers it discovers when validating
certificates against CRLs to the internal list of servers to consult for
certificates and CRLs.
This options is useful when trying to validate a certificate that has
a CRL distribution point that points to a server that is not already
listed in the ldapserverlist. Dirmngr will always go to this server and
try to download the CRL, but chances are high that the certificate used
to sign the CRL is located on the same server. So if dirmngr doesn't add
that new server to list, it will often not be able to verify the
signature of the CRL unless the @code{--add-servers} option is used.
Note: The current version of dirmngr has this option disabled by default.
@item --allow-ocsp
@opindex allow-ocsp
This option enables OCSP support if requested by the client.
OCSP requests are rejected by default because they may violate the
privacy of the user; for example it is possible to track the time when
a user is reading a mail.
@item --ocsp-responder @var{url}
@opindex ocsp-responder
Use @var{url} as the default OCSP Responder if the certificate does
not contain information about an assigned responder. Note, that
@code{--ocsp-signer} must also be set to a valid certificate.
@item --ocsp-signer @var{fpr}|@var{file}
@opindex ocsp-signer
Use the certificate with the fingerprint @var{fpr} to check the
responses of the default OCSP Responder. Alternativly a filename can be
given in which case the respinse is expected to be signed by one of the
certificates described in that file. Any argument which contains a
slash, dot or tilde is considered a filename. Usual filename expansion
takes place: A tilde at the start followed by a slash is replaced by the
content of @env{HOME}, no slash at start describes a relative filename
which will be searched at the home directory. To make sure that the
@var{file} is searched in the home directory, either prepend the name
with "./" or use a name which contains a dot.
If a response has been signed by a certificate described by these
fingerprints no further check upon the validity of this certificate is
done.
The format of the @var{FILE} is a list of SHA-1 fingerprint, one per
line with optional colons between the bytes. Empty lines and lines
prefix with a hash mark are ignored.
@item --ocsp-max-clock-skew @var{n}
@opindex ocsp-max-clock-skew
The number of seconds a skew between the OCSP responder and them local
clock is accepted. Default is 600 (20 minutes).
@item --ocsp-max-period @var{n}
@opindex ocsp-max-period
Seconds a response is at maximum considered valid after the time given
in the thisUpdate field. Default is 7776000 (90 days).
@item --ocsp-current-period @var{n}
@opindex ocsp-current-period
The number of seconds an OCSP response is considered valid after the
time given in the NEXT_UPDATE datum. Default is 10800 (3 hours).
@item --max-replies @var{n}
@opindex max-replies
Do not return more that @var{n} items in one query. The default is
10.
@item --ignore-cert-extension @var{oid}
@opindex ignore-cert-extension
Add @var{oid} to the list of ignored certificate extensions. The
@var{oid} is expected to be in dotted decimal form, like
@code{2.5.29.3}. This option may be used more than once. Critical
flagged certificate extensions matching one of the OIDs in the list
are treated as if they are actually handled and thus the certificate
won't be rejected due to an unknown critical extension. Use this
option with care because extensions are usually flagged as critical
for a reason.
@item --hkp-cacert @var{file}
Use the root certificates in @var{file} for verification of the TLS
certificates used with @code{hkps} (keyserver access over TLS). If
the file is in PEM format a suffix of @code{.pem} is expected for
@var{file}. This option may be given multiple times to add more
root certificates.
@end table
@c
@c Dirmngr Configuration
@c
@mansect files
@node Dirmngr Configuration
@section Configuration
Dirmngr makes use of several directories when running in daemon mode:
@table @file
@item ~/.gnupg
@itemx /etc/gnupg
The first is the standard home directory for all configuration files.
In the deprecated system daemon mode the second directory is used instead.
@item /etc/gnupg/trusted-certs
This directory should be filled with certificates of Root CAs you
are trusting in checking the CRLs and signing OCSP Reponses.
Usually these are the same certificates you use with the applications
making use of dirmngr. It is expected that each of these certificate
files contain exactly one @acronym{DER} encoded certificate in a file
with the suffix @file{.crt} or @file{.der}. @command{dirmngr} reads
those certificates on startup and when given a SIGHUP. Certificates
which are not readable or do not make up a proper X.509 certificate
are ignored; see the log file for details.
Applications using dirmngr (e.g. gpgsm) can request these
certificates to complete a trust chain in the same way as with the
extra-certs directory (see below).
Note that for OCSP responses the certificate specified using the option
@option{--ocsp-signer} is always considered valid to sign OCSP requests.
@item /etc/gnupg/extra-certs
This directory may contain extra certificates which are preloaded
into the interal cache on startup. Applications using dirmngr (e.g. gpgsm)
can request cached certificates to complete a trust chain.
This is convenient in cases you have a couple intermediate CA certificates
or certificates ususally used to sign OCSP reponses.
These certificates are first tried before going
out to the net to look for them. These certificates must also be
@acronym{DER} encoded and suffixed with @file{.crt} or @file{.der}.
-@item /var/run/gnupg
+@item @value{LOCALRUNDIR}
This directory is only used in the deprecated system daemon mode. It
keeps the socket file for accessing @command{dirmngr} services. The
name of the socket file will be @file{S.dirmngr}. Make sure that this
directory has the proper permissions to let @command{dirmngr} create
the socket file and that eligible users may read and write to that
socket.
@item ~/.gnupg/crls.d
-@itemx /var/cache/gnupg/crls.d
+@itemx @value{LOCALCACHEDIR}/crls.d
The first directory is used to store cached CRLs. The @file{crls.d}
part will be created by dirmngr if it does not exists but you need to
make sure that the upper directory exists. The second directory is
used instead in the deprecated systems daemon mode.
@end table
@manpause
To be able to see what's going on you should create the configure file
@file{~/gnupg/dirmngr.conf} with at least one line:
@example
log-file ~/dirmngr.log
@end example
To be able to perform OCSP requests you probably want to add the line:
@example
allow-ocsp
@end example
To make sure that new options are read and that after the installation
of a new GnuPG versions the installed dirmngr is running, you may want
to kill an existing dirmngr first:
@example
gpgconf --kill dirmngr
@end example
You may check the log file to see whether all desired root
certificates have been loaded correctly.
@c
@c Dirmngr Signals
@c
@mansect signals
@node Dirmngr Signals
@section Use of signals.
A running @command{dirmngr} may be controlled by signals, i.e. using
the @command{kill} command to send a signal to the process.
Here is a list of supported signals:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item SIGHUP
@cpindex SIGHUP
This signals flushes all internally cached CRLs as well as any cached
certificates. Then the certificate cache is reinitialized as on
startup. Options are re-read from the configuration file. Instead of
sending this signal it is better to use
@example
gpgconf --reload dirmngr
@end example
@item SIGTERM
@cpindex SIGTERM
Shuts down the process but waits until all current requests are
fulfilled. If the process has received 3 of these signals and requests
are still pending, a shutdown is forced. You may also use
@example
gpgconf --kill dirmngr
@end example
instead of this signal
@item SIGINT
@cpindex SIGINT
Shuts down the process immediately.
@item SIGUSR1
@cpindex SIGUSR1
This prints some caching statistics to the log file.
@end table
@c
@c Examples
@c
@mansect examples
@node Dirmngr Examples
@section Examples
Here is an example on how to show dirmngr's internal table of OpenPGP
keyserver addresses. The output is intended for debugging purposes
and not part of a defined API.
@example
gpg-connect-agent --dirmngr 'keyserver --hosttable' /bye
@end example
To inhibit the use of a particular host you have noticed in one of the
keyserver pools, you may use
@example
gpg-connect-agent --dirmngr 'keyserver --dead pgpkeys.bnd.de' /bye
@end example
The description of the @code{keyserver} command can be printed using
@example
gpg-connect-agent --dirmngr 'help keyserver' /bye
@end example
@c
@c Assuan Protocol
@c
@manpause
@node Dirmngr Protocol
@section Dirmngr's Assuan Protocol
Assuan is the IPC protocol used to access dirmngr. This is a
description of the commands implemented by dirmngr.
@menu
* Dirmngr LOOKUP:: Look up a certificate via LDAP
* Dirmngr ISVALID:: Validate a certificate using a CRL or OCSP.
* Dirmngr CHECKCRL:: Validate a certificate using a CRL.
* Dirmngr CHECKOCSP:: Validate a certificate using OCSP.
* Dirmngr CACHECERT:: Put a certificate into the internal cache.
* Dirmngr VALIDATE:: Validate a certificate for debugging.
@end menu
@node Dirmngr LOOKUP
@subsection Return the certificate(s) found
Lookup certificate. To allow multiple patterns (which are ORed)
quoting is required: Spaces are to be translated into "+" or into
"%20"; obviously this requires that the usual escape quoting rules
are applied. The server responds with:
@example
S: D
S: END
S: D
S: END
S: OK
@end example
In this example 2 certificates are returned. The server may return
any number of certificates; OK will also be returned when no
certificates were found. The dirmngr might return a status line
@example
S: S TRUNCATED
@end example
To indicate that the output was truncated to N items due to a
limitation of the server or by an arbitrary set limit.
The option @option{--url} may be used if instead of a search pattern a
complete URL to the certificate is known:
@example
C: LOOKUP --url CN%3DWerner%20Koch,o%3DIntevation%20GmbH,c%3DDE?userCertificate
@end example
If the option @option{--cache-only} is given, no external lookup is done
so that only certificates from the cache are returned.
With the option @option{--single}, the first and only the first match
will be returned. Unless option @option{--cache-only} is also used, no
local lookup will be done in this case.
@node Dirmngr ISVALID
@subsection Validate a certificate using a CRL or OCSP
@example
ISVALID [--only-ocsp] [--force-default-responder] @var{certid}|@var{certfpr}
@end example
Check whether the certificate described by the @var{certid} has been
revoked. Due to caching, the Dirmngr is able to answer immediately in
most cases.
The @var{certid} is a hex encoded string consisting of two parts,
delimited by a single dot. The first part is the SHA-1 hash of the
issuer name and the second part the serial number.
Alternatively the certificate's SHA-1 fingerprint @var{certfpr} may be
given in which case an OCSP request is done before consulting the CRL.
If the option @option{--only-ocsp} is given, no fallback to a CRL check
will be used. If the option @option{--force-default-responder} is
given, only the default OCSP responder will be used and any other
methods of obtaining an OCSP responder URL won't be used.
@noindent
Common return values are:
@table @code
@item GPG_ERR_NO_ERROR (0)
This is the positive answer: The certificate is not revoked and we have
an up-to-date revocation list for that certificate. If OCSP was used
the responder confirmed that the certificate has not been revoked.
@item GPG_ERR_CERT_REVOKED
This is the negative answer: The certificate has been revoked. Either
it is in a CRL and that list is up to date or an OCSP responder informed
us that it has been revoked.
@item GPG_ERR_NO_CRL_KNOWN
No CRL is known for this certificate or the CRL is not valid or out of
date.
@item GPG_ERR_NO_DATA
The OCSP responder returned an ``unknown'' status. This means that it
is not aware of the certificate's status.
@item GPG_ERR_NOT_SUPPORTED
This is commonly seen if OCSP support has not been enabled in the
configuration.
@end table
If DirMngr has not enough information about the given certificate (which
is the case for not yet cached certificates), it will will inquire the
missing data:
@example
S: INQUIRE SENDCERT
C: D
C: END
@end example
A client should be aware that DirMngr may ask for more than one
certificate.
If Dirmngr has a certificate but the signature of the certificate
could not been validated because the root certificate is not known to
dirmngr as trusted, it may ask back to see whether the client trusts
this the root certificate:
@example
S: INQUIRE ISTRUSTED
C: D 1
C: END
@end example
Only this answer will let Dirmngr consider the CRL as valid.
@node Dirmngr CHECKCRL
@subsection Validate a certificate using a CRL
Check whether the certificate with FINGERPRINT (SHA-1 hash of the
entire X.509 certificate blob) is valid or not by consulting the CRL
responsible for this certificate. If the fingerprint has not been
given or the certificate is not know, the function inquires the
certificate using:
@example
S: INQUIRE TARGETCERT
C: D
C: END
@end example
Thus the caller is expected to return the certificate for the request
(which should match FINGERPRINT) as a binary blob. Processing then
takes place without further interaction; in particular dirmngr tries
to locate other required certificate by its own mechanism which
includes a local certificate store as well as a list of trusted root
certificates.
@noindent
The return code is 0 for success; i.e. the certificate has not been
revoked or one of the usual error codes from libgpg-error.
@node Dirmngr CHECKOCSP
@subsection Validate a certificate using OCSP
@example
CHECKOCSP [--force-default-responder] [@var{fingerprint}]
@end example
Check whether the certificate with @var{fingerprint} (the SHA-1 hash of
the entire X.509 certificate blob) is valid by consulting the appropiate
OCSP responder. If the fingerprint has not been given or the
certificate is not known by Dirmngr, the function inquires the
certificate using:
@example
S: INQUIRE TARGETCERT
C: D
C: END
@end example
Thus the caller is expected to return the certificate for the request
(which should match @var{fingerprint}) as a binary blob. Processing
then takes place without further interaction; in particular dirmngr
tries to locate other required certificates by its own mechanism which
includes a local certificate store as well as a list of trusted root
certificates.
If the option @option{--force-default-responder} is given, only the
default OCSP responder is used. This option is the per-command variant
of the global option @option{--ignore-ocsp-service-url}.
@noindent
The return code is 0 for success; i.e. the certificate has not been
revoked or one of the usual error codes from libgpg-error.
@node Dirmngr CACHECERT
@subsection Put a certificate into the internal cache
Put a certificate into the internal cache. This command might be
useful if a client knows in advance certificates required for a test and
wnats to make sure they get added to the internal cache. It is also
helpful for debugging. To get the actual certificate, this command
immediately inquires it using
@example
S: INQUIRE TARGETCERT
C: D
C: END
@end example
Thus the caller is expected to return the certificate for the request
as a binary blob.
@noindent
The return code is 0 for success; i.e. the certificate has not been
succesfully cached or one of the usual error codes from libgpg-error.
@node Dirmngr VALIDATE
@subsection Validate a certificate for debugging
Validate a certificate using the certificate validation function used
internally by dirmngr. This command is only useful for debugging. To
get the actual certificate, this command immediately inquires it using
@example
S: INQUIRE TARGETCERT
C: D
C: END
@end example
Thus the caller is expected to return the certificate for the request
as a binary blob.
@mansect see also
@ifset isman
@command{gpgsm}(1),
@command{dirmngr-client}(1)
@end ifset
@include see-also-note.texi
@c
@c !!! UNDER CONSTRUCTION !!!
@c
@c
@c @section Verifying a Certificate
@c
@c There are several ways to request services from Dirmngr. Almost all of
@c them are done using the Assuan protocol. What we describe here is the
@c Assuan command CHECKCRL as used for example by the dirmnr-client tool if
@c invoked as
@c
@c @example
@c dirmngr-client foo.crt
@c @end example
@c
@c This command will send an Assuan request to an already running Dirmngr
@c instance. foo.crt is expected to be a standard X.509 certificate and
@c dirmngr will receive the Assuan command
@c
@c @example
@c CHECKCRL @var [{fingerprint}]
@c @end example
@c
@c @var{fingerprint} is optional and expected to be the SHA-1 has of the
@c DER encoding of the certificate under question. It is to be HEX
@c encoded. The rationale for sending the fingerprint is that it allows
@c dirmngr to reply immediatly if it has already cached such a request. If
@c this is not the case and no certificate has been found in dirmngr's
@c internal certificate storage, dirmngr will request the certificate using
@c the Assuan inquiry
@c
@c @example
@c INQUIRE TARGETCERT
@c @end example
@c
@c The caller (in our example dirmngr-client) is then expected to return
@c the certificate for the request (which should match @var{fingerprint})
@c as a binary blob.
@c
@c Dirmngr now passes control to @code{crl_cache_cert_isvalid}. This
@c function checks whether a CRL item exists for target certificate. These
@c CRL items are kept in a database of already loaded and verified CRLs.
@c This mechanism is called the CRL cache. Obviously timestamps are kept
@c there with each item to cope with the expiration date of the CRL. The
@c possible return values are: @code{0} to indicate that a valid CRL is
@c available for the certificate and the certificate itself is not listed
@c in this CRL, @code{GPG_ERR_CERT_REVOKED} to indicate that the certificate is
@c listed in the CRL or @code{GPG_ERR_NO_CRL_KNOWN} in cases where no CRL or no
@c information is available. The first two codes are immediatly returned to
@c the caller and the processing of this request has been done.
@c
@c Only the @code{GPG_ERR_NO_CRL_KNOWN} needs more attention: Dirmngr now
@c calls @code{clr_cache_reload_crl} and if this succeeds calls
@c @code{crl_cache_cert_isvald) once more. All further errors are
@c immediately returned to the caller.
@c
@c @code{crl_cache_reload_crl} is the actual heart of the CRL management.
@c It locates the corresponding CRL for the target certificate, reads and
@c verifies this CRL and stores it in the CRL cache. It works like this:
@c
@c * Loop over all crlDPs in the target certificate.
@c * If the crlDP is invalid immediately terminate the loop.
@c * Loop over all names in the current crlDP.
@c * If the URL scheme is unknown or not enabled
@c (--ignore-http-dp, --ignore-ldap-dp) continues with
@c the next name.
@c * @code{crl_fetch} is called to actually retrieve the CRL.
@c In case of problems this name is ignore and we continue with
@c the next name. Note that @code{crl_fetch} does only return
@c a descriptor for the CRL for further reading so does the CRL
@c does not yet end up in memory.
@c * @code{crl_cache_insert} is called with that descriptor to
@c actually read the CRL into the cache. See below for a
@c description of this function. If there is any error (e.g. read
@c problem, CRL not correctly signed or verification of signature
@c not possible), this descriptor is rejected and we continue
@c with the next name. If the CRL has been successfully loaded,
@c the loop is terminated.
@c * If no crlDP has been found in the previous loop use a default CRL.
@c Note, that if any crlDP has been found but loading of the CRL failed,
@c this condition is not true.
@c * Try to load a CRL from all configured servers (ldapservers.conf)
@c in turn. The first server returning a CRL is used.
@c * @code(crl_cache_insert) is then used to actually insert the CRL
@c into the cache. If this failed we give up immediatley without
@c checking the rest of the servers from the first step.
@c * Ready.
@c
@c
@c The @code{crl_cache_insert} function takes care of reading the bulk of
@c the CRL, parsing it and checking the signature. It works like this: A
@c new database file is created using a temporary file name. The CRL
@c parsing machinery is started and all items of the CRL are put into
@c this database file. At the end the issuer certificate of the CRL
@c needs to be retrieved. Three cases are to be distinguished:
@c
@c a) An authorityKeyIdentifier with an issuer and serialno exits: The
@c certificate is retrieved using @code{find_cert_bysn}. If
@c the certificate is in the certificate cache, it is directly
@c returned. Then the requester (i.e. the client who requested the
@c CRL check) is asked via the Assuan inquiry ``SENDCERT'' whether
@c he can provide this certificate. If this succeed the returned
@c certificate gets cached and returned. Note, that dirmngr does not
@c verify in any way whether the expected certificate is returned.
@c It is in the interest of the client to return a useful certificate
@c as otherwise the service request will fail due to a bad signature.
@c The last way to get the certificate is by looking it up at
@c external resources. This is done using the @code{ca_cert_fetch}
@c and @code{fetch_next_ksba_cert} and comparing the returned
@c certificate to match the requested issuer and seriano (This is
@c needed because the LDAP layer may return several certificates as
@c LDAP as no standard way to retrieve by serial number).
@c
@c b) An authorityKeyIdentifier with a key ID exists: The certificate is
@c retrieved using @code{find_cert_bysubject}. If the certificate is
@c in the certificate cache, it is directly returned. Then the
@c requester is asked via the Assuan inquiry ``SENDCERT_SKI'' whether
@c he can provide this certificate. If this succeed the returned
@c certificate gets cached and returned. Note, that dirmngr does not
@c verify in any way whether the expected certificate is returned.
@c It is in the interest of the client to return a useful certificate
@c as otherwise the service request will fail due to a bad signature.
@c The last way to get the certificate is by looking it up at
@c external resources. This is done using the @code{ca_cert_fetch}
@c and @code{fetch_next_ksba_cert} and comparing the returned
@c certificate to match the requested subject and key ID.
@c
@c c) No authorityKeyIdentifier exits: The certificate is retrieved
@c using @code{find_cert_bysubject} without the key ID argument. If
@c the certificate is in the certificate cache the first one with a
@c matching subject is is directly returned. Then the requester is
@c asked via the Assuan inquiry ``SENDCERT'' and an exact
@c specification of the subject whether he can
@c provide this certificate. If this succeed the returned
@c certificate gets cached and returned. Note, that dirmngr does not
@c verify in any way whether the expected certificate is returned.
@c It is in the interest of the client to return a useful certificate
@c as otherwise the service request will fail due to a bad signature.
@c The last way to get the certificate is by looking it up at
@c external resources. This is done using the @code{ca_cert_fetch}
@c and @code{fetch_next_ksba_cert} and comparing the returned
@c certificate to match the requested subject; the first certificate
@c with a matching subject is then returned.
@c
@c If no certificate was found, the function returns with the error
@c GPG_ERR_MISSING_CERT. Now the signature is verified. If this fails,
@c the erro is returned. On success the @code{validate_cert_chain} is
@c used to verify that the certificate is actually valid.
@c
@c Here we may encounter a recursive situation:
@c @code{validate_cert_chain} needs to look at other certificates and
@c also at CRLs to check whether tehse other certificates and well, the
@c CRL issuer certificate itself are not revoked. FIXME: We need to make
@c sure that @code{validate_cert_chain} does not try to lookup the CRL we
@c are currently processing. This would be a catch-22 and may indicate a
@c broken PKI. However, due to overlapping expiring times and imprecise
@c clocks thsi may actually happen.
@c
@c For historical reasons the Assuan command ISVALID is a bit different
@c to CHECKCRL but this is mainly due to different calling conventions.
@c In the end the same fucntionality is used, albeit hidden by a couple
@c of indirection and argument and result code mangling. It furthere
@c ingetrages OCSP checking depending on options are the way it is
@c called. GPGSM still uses this command but might eventuall switch over
@c to CHECKCRL and CHECKOCSP so that ISVALID can be retired.
@c
@c
@c @section Validating a certificate
@c
@c We describe here how the internal function @code{validate_cert_chain}
@c works. Note that mainly testing purposes this functionality may be
@c called directly using @cmd{dirmngr-client --validate @file{foo.crt}}.
@c
@c For backward compatibility this function returns success if Dirmngr is
@c not used as a system daemon. Thus not validating the certicates at
@c all. FIXME: This is definitely not correct and should be fixed ASAP.
@c
@c The function takes the target certificate and a mode argument as
@c parameters and returns an error code and optionally the closes
@c expiration time of all certificates in the chain.
@c
@c We first check that the certificate may be used for the requested
@c purpose (i.e. OCSP or CRL signing). If this is not the case
@c GPG_ERR_WRONG_KEY_USAGE is returned.
@c
@c The next step is to find the trust anchor (root certificate) and to
@c assemble the chain in memory: Starting with the target certificate,
@c the expiration time is checked against the current date, unknown
@c critical extensions are detected and certificate policies are matched
@c (We only allow 2.289.9.9 but I have no clue about that OID and from
@c where I got it - it does not even seem to be assigned - debug cruft?).
@c
@c Now if this certificate is a self-signed one, we have reached the
@c trust anchor. In this case we check that the signature is good, the
@c certificate is allowed to act as a CA, that it is a trusted one (by
@c checking whether it is has been put into the trusted-certs
@c configuration directory) and finally prepend into to our list
@c representing the certificate chain. This steps ends then.
@c
@c If it is not a self-signed certificate, we check that the chain won't
@c get too long (current limit is 100), if this is the case we terminate
@c with the error GPG_ERR_BAD_CERT_CHAIN.
@c
@c Now the issuer's certificate is looked up: If an
@c authorityKeyIdentifier is available, this one is used to locate the
@c certificate either using issuer and serialnumber or subject DN
@c (i.e. the issuer's DN) and the keyID. The functions
@c @code{find_cert_bysn) and @code{find_cert_bysubject} are used
@c respectively. The have already been described above under the
@c description of @code{crl_cache_insert}. If no certificate was found
@c or with no authorityKeyIdentifier, only the cache is consulted using
@c @code{get_cert_bysubject}. The latter is is done under the assumption
@c that a matching certificate has explicitly been put into the
@c certificate cache. If the issuer's certificate could not be found,
@c the validation terminates with the error code @code{GPG_ERR_MISSING_CERT}.
@c
@c If the issuer's certificate has been found, the signature of the
@c actual certificate is checked and in case this fails the error
@c #code{GPG_ERR_BAD_CERT_CHAIN} is returned. If the signature checks out, the
@c maximum cahin length of the issueing certificate is checked as well as
@c the capiblity of the certificate (i.e. whether he may be used for
@c certificate signing). Then the certificate is prepended to our list
@c representing the certificate chain. Finally the loop is continued now
@c with the issuer's certificate as the current certificate.
@c
@c After the end of the loop and if no error as been encountered
@c (i.e. the certificate chain has been assempled correctly), a check is
@c done whether any certificate expired or a critical policy has not been
@c met. In any of these cases the validation terminates with an
@c appropriate error.
@c
@c Finally the function @code{check_revocations} is called to verify no
@c certificate in the assempled chain has been revoked: This is an
@c recursive process because a CRL has to be checked for each certificate
@c in the chain except for the root certificate, of which we already know
@c that it is trusted and we avoid checking a CRL here due to common
@c setup problems and the assumption that a revoked root certifcate has
@c been removed from the list of trusted certificates.
@c
@c
@c
@c
@c @section Looking up certificates through LDAP.
@c
@c This describes the LDAP layer to retrieve certificates.
@c the functions @code{ca_cert_fetch} and @code{fetch_next_ksba_cert} are
@c used for this. The first one starts a search and the second one is
@c used to retrieve certificate after certificate.
@c
diff --git a/doc/gnupg.texi b/doc/gnupg.texi
index 2517a50ec..1fddeb007 100644
--- a/doc/gnupg.texi
+++ b/doc/gnupg.texi
@@ -1,217 +1,217 @@
\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
@c %**start of header
@setfilename gnupg.info
-@include version.texi
+@include defs.inc
@settitle Using the GNU Privacy Guard
@c A couple of macros with no effect on texinfo
@c but used by the yat2m processor.
@macro manpage {a}
@end macro
@macro mansect {a}
@end macro
@macro manpause
@end macro
@macro mancont
@end macro
@c Create a separate index for command line options.
@defcodeindex op
@c Merge the standard indexes into a single one.
@syncodeindex fn cp
@syncodeindex vr cp
@syncodeindex ky cp
@syncodeindex pg cp
@syncodeindex tp cp
@c %**end of header
@copying
This is the @cite{The GNU Privacy Guard Manual} (version
@value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED-MONTH}).
@iftex
Published by The GnuPG Project@*
@url{https://gnupg.org}@*
(or @url{http://ic6au7wa3f6naxjq.onion})
@end iftex
@copyright{} 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc.@*
@copyright{} 2013, 2014, 2015 Werner Koch.
@quotation
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or (at your
option) any later version. The text of the license can be found in the
section entitled ``Copying''.
@end quotation
@end copying
@dircategory GNU Utilities
@direntry
* gpg2: (gnupg). OpenPGP encryption and signing tool.
* gpgsm: (gnupg). S/MIME encryption and signing tool.
* gpg-agent: (gnupg). The secret key daemon.
* dirmngr: (gnupg). X.509 CRL and OCSP server.
* dirmngr-client: (gnupg). X.509 CRL and OCSP client.
@end direntry
@c
@c Printing stuff taken from gcc.
@c
@macro gnupgtabopt{body}
@code{\body\}
@end macro
@macro gnupgoptlist{body}
@smallexample
\body\
@end smallexample
@end macro
@c Makeinfo handles the above macro OK, TeX needs manual line breaks;
@c they get lost at some point in handling the macro. But if @macro is
@c used here rather than @alias, it produces double line breaks.
@iftex
@alias gol = *
@end iftex
@ifnottex
@macro gol
@end macro
@end ifnottex
@c
@c Titlepage
@c
@setchapternewpage odd
@titlepage
@title Using the GNU Privacy Guard
@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
@subtitle @value{UPDATED-MONTH}
@sp 3
@image{gnupg-logo,,,The GnuPG Logo}
@sp 3
@author The GnuPG Project (@url{https://gnupg.org})
@page
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
@insertcopying
@end titlepage
@ifnothtml
@summarycontents
@contents
@page
@end ifnothtml
@ifhtml
@center @image{gnupg-logo-tr,6cm,,The GnuPG Logo}
@end ifhtml
@ifnottex
@node Top
@top
@insertcopying
This manual documents how to use the GNU Privacy Guard system as well as
the administration and the architecture.
@end ifnottex
@menu
* Installation:: A short installation guide.
* Invoking GPG-AGENT:: How to launch the secret key daemon.
* Invoking DIRMNGR:: How to launch the CRL and OCSP daemon.
* Invoking GPG:: Using the OpenPGP protocol.
* Invoking GPGSM:: Using the S/MIME protocol.
* Invoking SCDAEMON:: How to handle Smartcards.
* Specify a User ID:: How to Specify a User Id.
* Helper Tools:: Description of small helper tools
* Howtos:: How to do certain things.
* System Notes:: Notes pertaining to certain OSes.
* Debugging:: How to solve problems
* Copying:: GNU General Public License says
how you can copy and share GnuPG
* Contributors:: People who have contributed to GnuPG.
* Glossary:: Short description of terms used.
* Option Index:: Index to command line options.
* Index:: Index of concepts and symbol names.
@end menu
@ifhtml
@page
@summarycontents
@contents
@end ifhtml
@include instguide.texi
@include gpg-agent.texi
@include dirmngr.texi
@include gpg.texi
@include gpgsm.texi
@include scdaemon.texi
@node Specify a User ID
@chapter How to Specify a User Id
@anchor{how-to-specify-a-user-id}
@include specify-user-id.texi
@include tools.texi
@include howtos.texi
@include sysnotes.texi
@include debugging.texi
@include gpl.texi
@include contrib.texi
@c ---------------------------------------------------------------------
@c Indexes
@c ---------------------------------------------------------------------
@include glossary.texi
@node Option Index
@unnumbered Option Index
@printindex op
@node Index
@unnumbered Index
@printindex cp
@c ---------------------------------------------------------------------
@c Epilogue
@c ---------------------------------------------------------------------
@c @node History
@c @unnumbered History
@c
@c Here are the notices from the old dirmngr manual:
@c
@c @itemize
@c @item Using DirMngr, 2002, Steffen Hansen, Klar"alvdalens Datakonsult AB.
@c @item Using DirMngr, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2008 Werner Koch, g10 Code GmbH.
@c @end itemize
@c
@bye
diff --git a/doc/gpg-agent.texi b/doc/gpg-agent.texi
index 307839275..e5701441f 100644
--- a/doc/gpg-agent.texi
+++ b/doc/gpg-agent.texi
@@ -1,1407 +1,1408 @@
@c Copyright (C) 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
@c This is part of the GnuPG manual.
@c For copying conditions, see the file gnupg.texi.
+@include defs.inc
@node Invoking GPG-AGENT
@chapter Invoking GPG-AGENT
@cindex GPG-AGENT command options
@cindex command options
@cindex options, GPG-AGENT command
@manpage gpg-agent.1
@ifset manverb
.B gpg-agent
\- Secret key management for GnuPG
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B gpg-agent
.RB [ \-\-homedir
.IR dir ]
.RB [ \-\-options
.IR file ]
.RI [ options ]
.br
.B gpg-agent
.RB [ \-\-homedir
.IR dir ]
.RB [ \-\-options
.IR file ]
.RI [ options ]
.B \-\-server
.br
.B gpg-agent
.RB [ \-\-homedir
.IR dir ]
.RB [ \-\-options
.IR file ]
.RI [ options ]
.B \-\-daemon
.RI [ command_line ]
@end ifset
@mansect description
@command{gpg-agent} is a daemon to manage secret (private) keys
independently from any protocol. It is used as a backend for
@command{gpg} and @command{gpgsm} as well as for a couple of other
utilities.
The agent is automatically started on demand by @command{gpg},
@command{gpgsm}, @command{gpgconf}, or @command{gpg-connect-agent}.
Thus there is no reason to start it manually. In case you want to use
the included Secure Shell Agent you may start the agent using:
@example
gpg-connect-agent /bye
@end example
@noindent
You should always add the following lines to your @code{.bashrc} or
whatever initialization file is used for all shell invocations:
@smallexample
GPG_TTY=$(tty)
export GPG_TTY
@end smallexample
@noindent
It is important that this environment variable always reflects the
output of the @code{tty} command. For W32 systems this option is not
required.
Please make sure that a proper pinentry program has been installed
under the default filename (which is system dependent) or use the
option @option{pinentry-program} to specify the full name of that program.
It is often useful to install a symbolic link from the actual used
-pinentry (e.g. @file{/usr/bin/pinentry-gtk}) to the expected
-one (e.g. @file{/usr/bin/pinentry}).
+pinentry (e.g. @file{@value{BINDIR}/pinentry-gtk}) to the expected
+one (e.g. @file{@value{BINDIR}/pinentry}).
@manpause
@noindent
@xref{Option Index},for an index to @command{GPG-AGENT}'s commands and options.
@mancont
@menu
* Agent Commands:: List of all commands.
* Agent Options:: List of all options.
* Agent Configuration:: Configuration files.
* Agent Signals:: Use of some signals.
* Agent Examples:: Some usage examples.
* Agent Protocol:: The protocol the agent uses.
@end menu
@mansect commands
@node Agent Commands
@section Commands
Commands are not distinguished from options except for the fact that
only one command is allowed.
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --version
@opindex version
Print the program version and licensing information. Note that you cannot
abbreviate this command.
@item --help
@itemx -h
@opindex help
Print a usage message summarizing the most useful command-line options.
Note that you cannot abbreviate this command.
@item --dump-options
@opindex dump-options
Print a list of all available options and commands. Note that you cannot
abbreviate this command.
@item --server
@opindex server
Run in server mode and wait for commands on the @code{stdin}. The
default mode is to create a socket and listen for commands there.
@item --daemon [@var{command line}]
@opindex daemon
Start the gpg-agent as a daemon; that is, detach it from the console
and run it in the background.
As an alternative you may create a new process as a child of
gpg-agent: @code{gpg-agent --daemon /bin/sh}. This way you get a new
shell with the environment setup properly; after you exit from this
shell, gpg-agent terminates within a few seconds.
@end table
@mansect options
@node Agent Options
@section Option Summary
@table @gnupgtabopt
@anchor{option --options}
@item --options @var{file}
@opindex options
Reads configuration from @var{file} instead of from the default
per-user configuration file. The default configuration file is named
@file{gpg-agent.conf} and expected in the @file{.gnupg} directory directly
below the home directory of the user.
@anchor{option --homedir}
@include opt-homedir.texi
@item -v
@item --verbose
@opindex verbose
Outputs additional information while running.
You can increase the verbosity by giving several
verbose commands to @command{gpgsm}, such as @samp{-vv}.
@item -q
@item --quiet
@opindex quiet
Try to be as quiet as possible.
@item --batch
@opindex batch
Don't invoke a pinentry or do any other thing requiring human interaction.
@item --faked-system-time @var{epoch}
@opindex faked-system-time
This option is only useful for testing; it sets the system time back or
forth to @var{epoch} which is the number of seconds elapsed since the year
1970.
@item --debug-level @var{level}
@opindex debug-level
Select the debug level for investigating problems. @var{level} may be
a numeric value or a keyword:
@table @code
@item none
No debugging at all. A value of less than 1 may be used instead of
the keyword.
@item basic
Some basic debug messages. A value between 1 and 2 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item advanced
More verbose debug messages. A value between 3 and 5 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item expert
Even more detailed messages. A value between 6 and 8 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item guru
All of the debug messages you can get. A value greater than 8 may be
used instead of the keyword. The creation of hash tracing files is
only enabled if the keyword is used.
@end table
How these messages are mapped to the actual debugging flags is not
specified and may change with newer releases of this program. They are
however carefully selected to best aid in debugging.
@item --debug @var{flags}
@opindex debug
This option is only useful for debugging and the behaviour may change at
any time without notice. FLAGS are bit encoded and may be given in
usual C-Syntax. The currently defined bits are:
@table @code
@item 0 (1)
X.509 or OpenPGP protocol related data
@item 1 (2)
values of big number integers
@item 2 (4)
low level crypto operations
@item 5 (32)
memory allocation
@item 6 (64)
caching
@item 7 (128)
show memory statistics.
@item 9 (512)
write hashed data to files named @code{dbgmd-000*}
@item 10 (1024)
trace Assuan protocol
@item 12 (4096)
bypass all certificate validation
@end table
@item --debug-all
@opindex debug-all
Same as @code{--debug=0xffffffff}
@item --debug-wait @var{n}
@opindex debug-wait
When running in server mode, wait @var{n} seconds before entering the
actual processing loop and print the pid. This gives time to attach a
debugger.
@item --debug-quick-random
@opindex debug-quick-random
This option inhibits the use of the very secure random quality level
(Libgcrypt’s @code{GCRY_VERY_STRONG_RANDOM}) and degrades all request
down to standard random quality. It is only used for testing and
shall not be used for any production quality keys. This option is
only effective when given on the command line.
@item --debug-pinentry
@opindex debug-pinentry
This option enables extra debug information pertaining to the
Pinentry. As of now it is only useful when used along with
@code{--debug 1024}.
@item --no-detach
@opindex no-detach
Don't detach the process from the console. This is mainly useful for
debugging.
@item -s
@itemx --sh
@itemx -c
@itemx --csh
@opindex sh
@opindex csh
Format the info output in daemon mode for use with the standard Bourne
shell or the C-shell respectively. The default is to guess it based on
the environment variable @code{SHELL} which is correct in almost all
cases.
@item --no-grab
@opindex no-grab
Tell the pinentry not to grab the keyboard and mouse. This option
should in general not be used to avoid X-sniffing attacks.
@anchor{option --log-file}
@item --log-file @var{file}
@opindex log-file
Append all logging output to @var{file}. This is very helpful in seeing
what the agent actually does. If neither a log file nor a log file
descriptor has been set on a Windows platform, the Registry entry
@code{HKCU\Software\GNU\GnuPG:DefaultLogFile}, if set, is used to specify
the logging output.
@anchor{option --no-allow-mark-trusted}
@item --no-allow-mark-trusted
@opindex no-allow-mark-trusted
Do not allow clients to mark keys as trusted, i.e. put them into the
@file{trustlist.txt} file. This makes it harder for users to inadvertently
accept Root-CA keys.
@anchor{option --allow-preset-passphrase}
@item --allow-preset-passphrase
@opindex allow-preset-passphrase
This option allows the use of @command{gpg-preset-passphrase} to seed the
internal cache of @command{gpg-agent} with passphrases.
@anchor{option --allow-loopback-pinentry}
@item --allow-loopback-pinentry
@opindex allow-loopback-pinentry
Allow clients to use the loopback pinentry features; see the option
@option{pinentry-mode} for details.
@item --no-allow-external-cache
@opindex no-allow-external-cache
Tell Pinentry not to enable features which use an external cache for
passphrases.
Some desktop environments prefer to unlock all
credentials with one master password and may have installed a Pinentry
which employs an additional external cache to implement such a policy.
By using this option the Pinentry is advised not to make use of such a
cache and instead always ask the user for the requested passphrase.
@item --ignore-cache-for-signing
@opindex ignore-cache-for-signing
This option will let @command{gpg-agent} bypass the passphrase cache for all
signing operation. Note that there is also a per-session option to
control this behaviour but this command line option takes precedence.
@item --default-cache-ttl @var{n}
@opindex default-cache-ttl
Set the time a cache entry is valid to @var{n} seconds. The default is
600 seconds.
@item --default-cache-ttl-ssh @var{n}
@opindex default-cache-ttl
Set the time a cache entry used for SSH keys is valid to @var{n}
seconds. The default is 1800 seconds.
@item --max-cache-ttl @var{n}
@opindex max-cache-ttl
Set the maximum time a cache entry is valid to @var{n} seconds. After
this time a cache entry will be expired even if it has been accessed
recently or has been set using @command{gpg-preset-passphrase}. The
default is 2 hours (7200 seconds).
@item --max-cache-ttl-ssh @var{n}
@opindex max-cache-ttl-ssh
Set the maximum time a cache entry used for SSH keys is valid to
@var{n} seconds. After this time a cache entry will be expired even
if it has been accessed recently or has been set using
@command{gpg-preset-passphrase}. The default is 2 hours (7200
seconds).
@item --enforce-passphrase-constraints
@opindex enforce-passphrase-constraints
Enforce the passphrase constraints by not allowing the user to bypass
them using the ``Take it anyway'' button.
@item --min-passphrase-len @var{n}
@opindex min-passphrase-len
Set the minimal length of a passphrase. When entering a new passphrase
shorter than this value a warning will be displayed. Defaults to 8.
@item --min-passphrase-nonalpha @var{n}
@opindex min-passphrase-nonalpha
Set the minimal number of digits or special characters required in a
passphrase. When entering a new passphrase with less than this number
of digits or special characters a warning will be displayed. Defaults
to 1.
@item --check-passphrase-pattern @var{file}
@opindex check-passphrase-pattern
Check the passphrase against the pattern given in @var{file}. When
entering a new passphrase matching one of these pattern a warning will
be displayed. @var{file} should be an absolute filename. The default is
not to use any pattern file.
Security note: It is known that checking a passphrase against a list of
pattern or even against a complete dictionary is not very effective to
enforce good passphrases. Users will soon figure up ways to bypass such
a policy. A better policy is to educate users on good security
behavior and optionally to run a passphrase cracker regularly on all
users passphrases to catch the very simple ones.
@item --max-passphrase-days @var{n}
@opindex max-passphrase-days
Ask the user to change the passphrase if @var{n} days have passed since
the last change. With @option{--enforce-passphrase-constraints} set the
user may not bypass this check.
@item --enable-passphrase-history
@opindex enable-passphrase-history
This option does nothing yet.
@item --pinentry-program @var{filename}
@opindex pinentry-program
Use program @var{filename} as the PIN entry. The default is
installation dependent. With the default configuration the name of
the default pinentry is @file{pinentry}; if that file does not exist
but a @file{pinentry-basic} exist the latter is used.
@item --pinentry-touch-file @var{filename}
@opindex pinentry-touch-file
By default the filename of the socket gpg-agent is listening for
requests is passed to Pinentry, so that it can touch that file before
exiting (it does this only in curses mode). This option changes the
file passed to Pinentry to @var{filename}. The special name
@code{/dev/null} may be used to completely disable this feature. Note
that Pinentry will not create that file, it will only change the
modification and access time.
@item --scdaemon-program @var{filename}
@opindex scdaemon-program
Use program @var{filename} as the Smartcard daemon. The default is
installation dependent and can be shown with the @command{gpgconf}
command.
@item --disable-scdaemon
@opindex disable-scdaemon
Do not make use of the scdaemon tool. This option has the effect of
disabling the ability to do smartcard operations. Note, that enabling
this option at runtime does not kill an already forked scdaemon.
@item --disable-check-own-socket
@opindex disable-check-own-socket
@command{gpg-agent} employs a periodic self-test to detect a stolen
socket. This usually means a second instance of @command{gpg-agent}
has taken over the socket and @command{gpg-agent} will then terminate
itself. This option may be used to disable this self-test for
debugging purposes.
@item --use-standard-socket
@itemx --no-use-standard-socket
@itemx --use-standard-socket-p
@opindex use-standard-socket
@opindex no-use-standard-socket
@opindex use-standard-socket-p
Since GnuPG 2.1 the standard socket is always used. These options
have no more effect. The command @code{gpg-agent
--use-standard-socket-p} will thus always return success.
@item --display @var{string}
@itemx --ttyname @var{string}
@itemx --ttytype @var{string}
@itemx --lc-ctype @var{string}
@itemx --lc-messages @var{string}
@itemx --xauthority @var{string}
@opindex display
@opindex ttyname
@opindex ttytype
@opindex lc-ctype
@opindex lc-messages
@opindex xauthority
These options are used with the server mode to pass localization
information.
@item --keep-tty
@itemx --keep-display
@opindex keep-tty
@opindex keep-display
Ignore requests to change the current @code{tty} or X window system's
@code{DISPLAY} variable respectively. This is useful to lock the
pinentry to pop up at the @code{tty} or display you started the agent.
@anchor{option --extra-socket}
@item --extra-socket @var{name}
@opindex extra-socket
Also listen on native gpg-agent connections on the given socket. The
intended use for this extra socket is to setup a Unix domain socket
forwarding from a remote machine to this socket on the local machine.
A @command{gpg} running on the remote machine may then connect to the
local gpg-agent and use its private keys. This allows to decrypt or
sign data on a remote machine without exposing the private keys to the
remote machine.
@anchor{option --enable-ssh-support}
@item --enable-ssh-support
@opindex enable-ssh-support
Enable the OpenSSH Agent protocol.
In this mode of operation, the agent does not only implement the
gpg-agent protocol, but also the agent protocol used by OpenSSH
(through a separate socket). Consequently, it should be possible to use
the gpg-agent as a drop-in replacement for the well known ssh-agent.
SSH Keys, which are to be used through the agent, need to be added to
the gpg-agent initially through the ssh-add utility. When a key is
added, ssh-add will ask for the password of the provided key file and
send the unprotected key material to the agent; this causes the
gpg-agent to ask for a passphrase, which is to be used for encrypting
the newly received key and storing it in a gpg-agent specific
directory.
Once a key has been added to the gpg-agent this way, the gpg-agent
will be ready to use the key.
Note: in case the gpg-agent receives a signature request, the user might
need to be prompted for a passphrase, which is necessary for decrypting
the stored key. Since the ssh-agent protocol does not contain a
mechanism for telling the agent on which display/terminal it is running,
gpg-agent's ssh-support will use the TTY or X display where gpg-agent
has been started. To switch this display to the current one, the
following command may be used:
@smallexample
gpg-connect-agent updatestartuptty /bye
@end smallexample
Although all GnuPG components try to start the gpg-agent as needed, this
is not possible for the ssh support because ssh does not know about it.
Thus if no GnuPG tool which accesses the agent has been run, there is no
guarantee that ssh is able to use gpg-agent for authentication. To fix
this you may start gpg-agent if needed using this simple command:
@smallexample
gpg-connect-agent /bye
@end smallexample
Adding the @option{--verbose} shows the progress of starting the agent.
@end table
All the long options may also be given in the configuration file after
stripping off the two leading dashes.
@mansect files
@node Agent Configuration
@section Configuration
There are a few configuration files needed for the operation of the
agent. By default they may all be found in the current home directory
(@pxref{option --homedir}).
@table @file
@item gpg-agent.conf
@cindex gpg-agent.conf
This is the standard configuration file read by @command{gpg-agent} on
startup. It may contain any valid long option; the leading
two dashes may not be entered and the option may not be abbreviated.
This file is also read after a @code{SIGHUP} however only a few
options will actually have an effect. This default name may be
changed on the command line (@pxref{option --options}).
You should backup this file.
@item trustlist.txt
This is the list of trusted keys. You should backup this file.
Comment lines, indicated by a leading hash mark, as well as empty
lines are ignored. To mark a key as trusted you need to enter its
fingerprint followed by a space and a capital letter @code{S}. Colons
may optionally be used to separate the bytes of a fingerprint; this
allows to cut and paste the fingerprint from a key listing output. If
the line is prefixed with a @code{!} the key is explicitly marked as
not trusted.
Here is an example where two keys are marked as ultimately trusted
and one as not trusted:
@cartouche
@smallexample
# CN=Wurzel ZS 3,O=Intevation GmbH,C=DE
A6935DD34EF3087973C706FC311AA2CCF733765B S
# CN=PCA-1-Verwaltung-02/O=PKI-1-Verwaltung/C=DE
DC:BD:69:25:48:BD:BB:7E:31:6E:BB:80:D3:00:80:35:D4:F8:A6:CD S
# CN=Root-CA/O=Schlapphuete/L=Pullach/C=DE
!14:56:98:D3:FE:9C:CA:5A:31:6E:BC:81:D3:11:4E:00:90:A3:44:C2 S
@end smallexample
@end cartouche
Before entering a key into this file, you need to ensure its
authenticity. How to do this depends on your organisation; your
administrator might have already entered those keys which are deemed
trustworthy enough into this file. Places where to look for the
fingerprint of a root certificate are letters received from the CA or
the website of the CA (after making 100% sure that this is indeed the
website of that CA). You may want to consider disallowing interactive
updates of this file by using the @xref{option --no-allow-mark-trusted}.
It might even be advisable to change the permissions to read-only so
that this file can't be changed inadvertently.
As a special feature a line @code{include-default} will include a global
-list of trusted certificates (e.g. @file{/etc/gnupg/trustlist.txt}).
+list of trusted certificates (e.g. @file{@value{SYSCONFDIR}/trustlist.txt}).
This global list is also used if the local list is not available.
It is possible to add further flags after the @code{S} for use by the
caller:
@table @code
@item relax
@cindex relax
Relax checking of some root certificate requirements. As of now this
flag allows the use of root certificates with a missing basicConstraints
attribute (despite that it is a MUST for CA certificates) and disables
CRL checking for the root certificate.
@item cm
If validation of a certificate finally issued by a CA with this flag set
fails, try again using the chain validation model.
@end table
@item sshcontrol
@cindex sshcontrol
This file is used when support for the secure shell agent protocol has
been enabled (@pxref{option --enable-ssh-support}). Only keys present in
this file are used in the SSH protocol. You should backup this file.
The @command{ssh-add} tool may be used to add new entries to this file;
you may also add them manually. Comment lines, indicated by a leading
hash mark, as well as empty lines are ignored. An entry starts with
optional whitespace, followed by the keygrip of the key given as 40 hex
digits, optionally followed by the caching TTL in seconds and another
optional field for arbitrary flags. A non-zero TTL overrides the global
default as set by @option{--default-cache-ttl-ssh}.
The only flag support is @code{confirm}. If this flag is found for a
key, each use of the key will pop up a pinentry to confirm the use of
that key. The flag is automatically set if a new key was loaded into
@code{gpg-agent} using the option @option{-c} of the @code{ssh-add}
command.
The keygrip may be prefixed with a @code{!} to disable an entry entry.
The following example lists exactly one key. Note that keys available
through a OpenPGP smartcard in the active smartcard reader are
implicitly added to this list; i.e. there is no need to list them.
@cartouche
@smallexample
# Key added on: 2011-07-20 20:38:46
# Fingerprint: 5e:8d:c4:ad:e7:af:6e:27:8a:d6:13:e4:79:ad:0b:81
34B62F25E277CF13D3C6BCEBFD3F85D08F0A864B 0 confirm
@end smallexample
@end cartouche
@item private-keys-v1.d/
This is the directory where gpg-agent stores the private keys. Each
key is stored in a file with the name made up of the keygrip and the
suffix @file{key}. You should backup all files in this directory
and take great care to keep this backup closed away.
@end table
Note that on larger installations, it is useful to put predefined
-files into the directory @file{/etc/skel/.gnupg/} so that newly created
+files into the directory @file{@value{SYSCONFSKELDIR}} so that newly created
users start up with a working configuration. For existing users the
a small helper script is provided to create these files (@pxref{addgnupghome}).
@c
@c Agent Signals
@c
@mansect signals
@node Agent Signals
@section Use of some signals.
A running @command{gpg-agent} may be controlled by signals, i.e. using
the @command{kill} command to send a signal to the process.
Here is a list of supported signals:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item SIGHUP
@cpindex SIGHUP
This signal flushes all cached passphrases and if the program has been
started with a configuration file, the configuration file is read
again. Only certain options are honored: @code{quiet},
@code{verbose}, @code{debug}, @code{debug-all}, @code{debug-level},
@code{debug-pinentry},
@code{no-grab}, @code{pinentry-program}, @code{default-cache-ttl},
@code{max-cache-ttl}, @code{ignore-cache-for-signing},
@code{no-allow-external-cache},
@code{no-allow-mark-trusted}, @code{disable-scdaemon}, and
@code{disable-check-own-socket}. @code{scdaemon-program} is also
supported but due to the current implementation, which calls the
scdaemon only once, it is not of much use unless you manually kill the
scdaemon.
@item SIGTERM
@cpindex SIGTERM
Shuts down the process but waits until all current requests are
fulfilled. If the process has received 3 of these signals and requests
are still pending, a shutdown is forced.
@item SIGINT
@cpindex SIGINT
Shuts down the process immediately.
@item SIGUSR1
@cpindex SIGUSR1
Dump internal information to the log file.
@item SIGUSR2
@cpindex SIGUSR2
This signal is used for internal purposes.
@end table
@c
@c Examples
@c
@mansect examples
@node Agent Examples
@section Examples
It is important to set the GPG_TTY environment variable in
your login shell, for example in the @file{~/.bashrc} init script:
@cartouche
@example
export GPG_TTY=$(tty)
@end example
@end cartouche
If you enabled the Ssh Agent Support, you also need to tell ssh about
it by adding this to your init script:
@cartouche
@example
unset SSH_AGENT_PID
if [ "$@{gnupg_SSH_AUTH_SOCK_by:-0@}" -ne $$ ]; then
export SSH_AUTH_SOCK="$@{HOME@}/.gnupg/S.gpg-agent.ssh"
fi
@end example
@end cartouche
@c
@c Assuan Protocol
@c
@manpause
@node Agent Protocol
@section Agent's Assuan Protocol
Note: this section does only document the protocol, which is used by
GnuPG components; it does not deal with the ssh-agent protocol.
The @command{gpg-agent} daemon is started on demand by the GnuPG
components.
To identify a key we use a thing called keygrip which is the SHA-1 hash
of an canonical encoded S-Expression of the public key as used in
Libgcrypt. For the purpose of this interface the keygrip is given as a
hex string. The advantage of using this and not the hash of a
certificate is that it will be possible to use the same keypair for
different protocols, thereby saving space on the token used to keep the
secret keys.
The @command{gpg-agent} may send status messages during a command or when
returning from a command to inform a client about the progress or result of an
operation. For example, the @var{INQUIRE_MAXLEN} status message may be sent
during a server inquire to inform the client of the maximum usable length of
the inquired data (which should not be exceeded).
@menu
* Agent PKDECRYPT:: Decrypting a session key
* Agent PKSIGN:: Signing a Hash
* Agent GENKEY:: Generating a Key
* Agent IMPORT:: Importing a Secret Key
* Agent EXPORT:: Exporting a Secret Key
* Agent ISTRUSTED:: Importing a Root Certificate
* Agent GET_PASSPHRASE:: Ask for a passphrase
* Agent CLEAR_PASSPHRASE:: Expire a cached passphrase
* Agent PRESET_PASSPHRASE:: Set a passphrase for a keygrip
* Agent GET_CONFIRMATION:: Ask for confirmation
* Agent HAVEKEY:: Check whether a key is available
* Agent LEARN:: Register a smartcard
* Agent PASSWD:: Change a Passphrase
* Agent UPDATESTARTUPTTY:: Change the Standard Display
* Agent GETEVENTCOUNTER:: Get the Event Counters
* Agent GETINFO:: Return information about the process
* Agent OPTION:: Set options for the session
@end menu
@node Agent PKDECRYPT
@subsection Decrypting a session key
The client asks the server to decrypt a session key. The encrypted
session key should have all information needed to select the
appropriate secret key or to delegate it to a smartcard.
@example
SETKEY
@end example
Tell the server about the key to be used for decryption. If this is
not used, @command{gpg-agent} may try to figure out the key by trying to
decrypt the message with each key available.
@example
PKDECRYPT
@end example
The agent checks whether this command is allowed and then does an
INQUIRY to get the ciphertext the client should then send the cipher
text.
@example
S: INQUIRE CIPHERTEXT
C: D (xxxxxx
C: D xxxx)
C: END
@end example
Please note that the server may send status info lines while reading the
data lines from the client. The data send is a SPKI like S-Exp with
this structure:
@example
(enc-val
(
( )
...
( )))
@end example
Where algo is a string with the name of the algorithm; see the libgcrypt
documentation for a list of valid algorithms. The number and names of
the parameters depend on the algorithm. The agent does return an error
if there is an inconsistency.
If the decryption was successful the decrypted data is returned by
means of "D" lines.
Here is an example session:
@cartouche
@smallexample
C: PKDECRYPT
S: INQUIRE CIPHERTEXT
C: D (enc-val elg (a 349324324)
C: D (b 3F444677CA)))
C: END
S: # session key follows
S: S PADDING 0
S: D (value 1234567890ABCDEF0)
S: OK descryption successful
@end smallexample
@end cartouche
The “PADDING” status line is only send if gpg-agent can tell what kind
of padding is used. As of now only the value 0 is used to indicate
that the padding has been removed.
@node Agent PKSIGN
@subsection Signing a Hash
The client ask the agent to sign a given hash value. A default key
will be chosen if no key has been set. To set a key a client first
uses:
@example
SIGKEY
@end example
This can be used multiple times to create multiple signature, the list
of keys is reset with the next PKSIGN command or a RESET. The server
test whether the key is a valid key to sign something and responds with
okay.
@example
SETHASH --hash=|
@end example
The client can use this command to tell the server about the data
(which usually is a hash) to be signed. is the decimal encoded hash
algorithm number as used by Libgcrypt. Either or --hash=
must be given. Valid names for are:
@table @code
@item sha1
The SHA-1 hash algorithm
@item sha256
The SHA-256 hash algorithm
@item rmd160
The RIPE-MD160 hash algorithm
@item md5
The old and broken MD5 hash algorithm
@item tls-md5sha1
A combined hash algorithm as used by the TLS protocol.
@end table
@noindent
The actual signing is done using
@example
PKSIGN
@end example
Options are not yet defined, but my later be used to choose among
different algorithms. The agent does then some checks, asks for the
passphrase and as a result the server returns the signature as an SPKI
like S-expression in "D" lines:
@example
(sig-val
(
( )
...
( )))
@end example
The operation is affected by the option
@example
OPTION use-cache-for-signing=0|1
@end example
The default of @code{1} uses the cache. Setting this option to @code{0}
will lead @command{gpg-agent} to ignore the passphrase cache. Note, that there is
also a global command line option for @command{gpg-agent} to globally disable the
caching.
Here is an example session:
@cartouche
@smallexample
C: SIGKEY
S: OK key available
C: SIGKEY
S: OK key available
C: PKSIGN
S: # I did ask the user whether he really wants to sign
S: # I did ask the user for the passphrase
S: INQUIRE HASHVAL
C: D ABCDEF012345678901234
C: END
S: # signature follows
S: D (sig-val rsa (s 45435453654612121212))
S: OK
@end smallexample
@end cartouche
@node Agent GENKEY
@subsection Generating a Key
This is used to create a new keypair and store the secret key inside the
active PSE --- which is in most cases a Soft-PSE. An not yet defined
option allows to choose the storage location. To get the secret key out
of the PSE, a special export tool has to be used.
@example
GENKEY [--no-protection] [--preset] []
@end example
Invokes the key generation process and the server will then inquire
on the generation parameters, like:
@example
S: INQUIRE KEYPARM
C: D (genkey (rsa (nbits 1024)))
C: END
@end example
The format of the key parameters which depends on the algorithm is of
the form:
@example
(genkey
(algo
(parameter_name_1 ....)
....
(parameter_name_n ....)))
@end example
If everything succeeds, the server returns the *public key* in a SPKI
like S-Expression like this:
@example
(public-key
(rsa
(n )
(e )))
@end example
Here is an example session:
@cartouche
@smallexample
C: GENKEY
S: INQUIRE KEYPARM
C: D (genkey (rsa (nbits 1024)))
C: END
S: D (public-key
S: D (rsa (n 326487324683264) (e 10001)))
S OK key created
@end smallexample
@end cartouche
The @option{--no-protection} option may be used to prevent prompting for a
passphrase to protect the secret key while leaving the secret key unprotected.
The @option{--preset} option may be used to add the passphrase to the cache
using the default cache parameters.
The @option{--inq-passwd} option may be used to create the key with a
supplied passphrase. When used the agent does an inquiry with the
keyword @code{NEWPASSWD} to retrieve that passphrase. This option
takes precedence over @option{--no-protection}; however if the client
sends a empty (zero-length) passphrase, this is identical to
@option{--no-protection}.
@node Agent IMPORT
@subsection Importing a Secret Key
This operation is not yet supported by GpgAgent. Specialized tools
are to be used for this.
There is no actual need because we can expect that secret keys
created by a 3rd party are stored on a smartcard. If we have
generated the key ourself, we do not need to import it.
@node Agent EXPORT
@subsection Export a Secret Key
Not implemented.
Should be done by an extra tool.
@node Agent ISTRUSTED
@subsection Importing a Root Certificate
Actually we do not import a Root Cert but provide a way to validate
any piece of data by storing its Hash along with a description and
an identifier in the PSE. Here is the interface description:
@example
ISTRUSTED
@end example
Check whether the OpenPGP primary key or the X.509 certificate with the
given fingerprint is an ultimately trusted key or a trusted Root CA
certificate. The fingerprint should be given as a hexstring (without
any blanks or colons or whatever in between) and may be left padded with
00 in case of an MD5 fingerprint. GPGAgent will answer with:
@example
OK
@end example
The key is in the table of trusted keys.
@example
ERR 304 (Not Trusted)
@end example
The key is not in this table.
Gpg needs the entire list of trusted keys to maintain the web of
trust; the following command is therefore quite helpful:
@example
LISTTRUSTED
@end example
GpgAgent returns a list of trusted keys line by line:
@example
S: D 000000001234454556565656677878AF2F1ECCFF P
S: D 340387563485634856435645634856438576457A P
S: D FEDC6532453745367FD83474357495743757435D S
S: OK
@end example
The first item on a line is the hexified fingerprint where MD5
fingerprints are @code{00} padded to the left and the second item is a
flag to indicate the type of key (so that gpg is able to only take care
of PGP keys). P = OpenPGP, S = S/MIME. A client should ignore the rest
of the line, so that we can extend the format in the future.
Finally a client should be able to mark a key as trusted:
@example
MARKTRUSTED @var{fingerprint} "P"|"S"
@end example
The server will then pop up a window to ask the user whether she
really trusts this key. For this it will probably ask for a text to
be displayed like this:
@example
S: INQUIRE TRUSTDESC
C: D Do you trust the key with the fingerprint @@FPR@@
C: D bla fasel blurb.
C: END
S: OK
@end example
Known sequences with the pattern @@foo@@ are replaced according to this
table:
@table @code
@item @@FPR16@@
Format the fingerprint according to gpg rules for a v3 keys.
@item @@FPR20@@
Format the fingerprint according to gpg rules for a v4 keys.
@item @@FPR@@
Choose an appropriate format to format the fingerprint.
@item @@@@
Replaced by a single @code{@@}
@end table
@node Agent GET_PASSPHRASE
@subsection Ask for a passphrase
This function is usually used to ask for a passphrase to be used for
symmetric encryption, but may also be used by programs which need
special handling of passphrases. This command uses a syntax which helps
clients to use the agent with minimum effort.
@example
GET_PASSPHRASE [--data] [--check] [--no-ask] [--repeat[=N]] \
[--qualitybar] @var{cache_id} \
[@var{error_message} @var{prompt} @var{description}]
@end example
@var{cache_id} is expected to be a string used to identify a cached
passphrase. Use a @code{X} to bypass the cache. With no other
arguments the agent returns a cached passphrase or an error. By
convention either the hexified fingerprint of the key shall be used for
@var{cache_id} or an arbitrary string prefixed with the name of the
calling application and a colon: Like @code{gpg:somestring}.
@var{error_message} is either a single @code{X} for no error message or
a string to be shown as an error message like (e.g. "invalid
passphrase"). Blanks must be percent escaped or replaced by @code{+}'.
@var{prompt} is either a single @code{X} for a default prompt or the
text to be shown as the prompt. Blanks must be percent escaped or
replaced by @code{+}.
@var{description} is a text shown above the entry field. Blanks must be
percent escaped or replaced by @code{+}.
The agent either returns with an error or with a OK followed by the hex
encoded passphrase. Note that the length of the strings is implicitly
limited by the maximum length of a command. If the option
@option{--data} is used, the passphrase is not returned on the OK line
but by regular data lines; this is the preferred method.
If the option @option{--check} is used, the standard passphrase
constraints checks are applied. A check is not done if the passphrase
has been found in the cache.
If the option @option{--no-ask} is used and the passphrase is not in the
cache the user will not be asked to enter a passphrase but the error
code @code{GPG_ERR_NO_DATA} is returned.
If the option @option{--qualitybar} is used and a minimum passphrase
length has been configured, a visual indication of the entered
passphrase quality is shown.
@example
CLEAR_PASSPHRASE @var{cache_id}
@end example
may be used to invalidate the cache entry for a passphrase. The
function returns with OK even when there is no cached passphrase.
@node Agent CLEAR_PASSPHRASE
@subsection Remove a cached passphrase
Use this command to remove a cached passphrase.
@example
CLEAR_PASSPHRASE [--mode=normal]
@end example
The @option{--mode=normal} option can be used to clear a @var{cache_id} that
was set by gpg-agent.
@node Agent PRESET_PASSPHRASE
@subsection Set a passphrase for a keygrip
This command adds a passphrase to the cache for the specified @var{keygrip}.
@example
PRESET_PASSPHRASE [--inquire] []
@end example
The passphrase is a hexidecimal string when specified. When not specified, the
passphrase will be retrieved from the pinentry module unless the
@option{--inquire} option was specified in which case the passphrase will be
retrieved from the client.
The @var{timeout} parameter keeps the passphrase cached for the specified
number of seconds. A value of @code{-1} means infinate while @code{0} means
the default (currently only a timeout of -1 is allowed, which means to never
expire it).
@node Agent GET_CONFIRMATION
@subsection Ask for confirmation
This command may be used to ask for a simple confirmation by
presenting a text and 2 buttons: Okay and Cancel.
@example
GET_CONFIRMATION @var{description}
@end example
@var{description}is displayed along with a Okay and Cancel
button. Blanks must be percent escaped or replaced by @code{+}. A
@code{X} may be used to display confirmation dialog with a default
text.
The agent either returns with an error or with a OK. Note, that the
length of @var{description} is implicitly limited by the maximum
length of a command.
@node Agent HAVEKEY
@subsection Check whether a key is available
This can be used to see whether a secret key is available. It does
not return any information on whether the key is somehow protected.
@example
HAVEKEY @var{keygrips}
@end example
The agent answers either with OK or @code{No_Secret_Key} (208). The
caller may want to check for other error codes as well. More than one
keygrip may be given. In this case the command returns success if at
least one of the keygrips corresponds to an available secret key.
@node Agent LEARN
@subsection Register a smartcard
@example
LEARN [--send]
@end example
This command is used to register a smartcard. With the --send
option given the certificates are send back.
@node Agent PASSWD
@subsection Change a Passphrase
@example
PASSWD [--cache-nonce=] [--passwd-nonce=] [--preset] @var{keygrip}
@end example
This command is used to interactively change the passphrase of the key
identified by the hex string @var{keygrip}. The @option{--preset}
option may be used to add the new passphrase to the cache using the
default cache parameters.
@node Agent UPDATESTARTUPTTY
@subsection Change the standard display
@example
UPDATESTARTUPTTY
@end example
Set the startup TTY and X-DISPLAY variables to the values of this
session. This command is useful to direct future pinentry invocations
to another screen. It is only required because there is no way in the
ssh-agent protocol to convey this information.
@node Agent GETEVENTCOUNTER
@subsection Get the Event Counters
@example
GETEVENTCOUNTER
@end example
This function return one status line with the current values of the
event counters. The event counters are useful to avoid polling by
delaying a poll until something has changed. The values are decimal
numbers in the range @code{0} to @code{UINT_MAX} and wrapping around to
0. The actual values should not be relied upon; they shall only be used
to detect a change.
The currently defined counters are are:
@table @code
@item ANY
Incremented with any change of any of the other counters.
@item KEY
Incremented for added or removed private keys.
@item CARD
Incremented for changes of the card readers stati.
@end table
@node Agent GETINFO
@subsection Return information about the process
This is a multipurpose function to return a variety of information.
@example
GETINFO @var{what}
@end example
The value of @var{what} specifies the kind of information returned:
@table @code
@item version
Return the version of the program.
@item pid
Return the process id of the process.
@item socket_name
Return the name of the socket used to connect the agent.
@item ssh_socket_name
Return the name of the socket used for SSH connections. If SSH support
has not been enabled the error @code{GPG_ERR_NO_DATA} will be returned.
@end table
@node Agent OPTION
@subsection Set options for the session
Here is a list of session options which are not yet described with
other commands. The general syntax for an Assuan option is:
@smallexample
OPTION @var{key}=@var{value}
@end smallexample
@noindent
Supported @var{key}s are:
@table @code
@item agent-awareness
This may be used to tell gpg-agent of which gpg-agent version the
client is aware of. gpg-agent uses this information to enable
features which might break older clients.
@item putenv
Change the session's environment to be used for the
Pinentry. Valid values are:
@table @code
@item @var{name}
Delete envvar @var{name}
@item @var{name}=
Set envvar @var{name} to the empty string
@item @var{name}=@var{value}
Set envvar @var{name} to the string @var{value}.
@end table
@item use-cache-for-signing
See Assuan command @code{PKSIGN}.
@item allow-pinentry-notify
This does not need any value. It is used to enable the
PINENTRY_LAUNCHED inquiry.
@item pinentry-mode
This option is used to change the operation mode of the pinentry. The
following values are defined:
@table @code
@item ask
This is the default mode which pops up a pinentry as needed.
@item cancel
Instead of popping up a pinentry, return the error code
@code{GPG_ERR_CANCELED}.
@item error
Instead of popping up a pinentry, return the error code
@code{GPG_ERR_NO_PIN_ENTRY}.
@item loopback
Use a loopback pinentry. This fakes a pinentry by using inquiries
back to the caller to ask for a passphrase. This option may only be
set if the agent has been configured for that.
Use the @xref{option --allow-loopback-pinentry}.
@end table
@item cache-ttl-opt-preset
This option sets the cache TTL for new entries created by GENKEY and
PASSWD commands when using the @option{--preset} option. It it is not
used a default value is used.
@item s2k-count
Instead of using the standard S2K count (which is computed on the
fly), the given S2K count is used for new keys or when changing the
passphrase of a key. Values below 65536 are considered to be 0. This
option is valid for the entire session or until reset to 0. This
option is useful if the key is later used on boxes which are either
much slower or faster than the actual box.
@end table
@mansect see also
@ifset isman
@command{gpg2}(1),
@command{gpgsm}(1),
@command{gpg-connect-agent}(1),
@command{scdaemon}(1)
@end ifset
@include see-also-note.texi
diff --git a/doc/gpg.texi b/doc/gpg.texi
index 77072bd90..6fcfe5869 100644
--- a/doc/gpg.texi
+++ b/doc/gpg.texi
@@ -1,3420 +1,3415 @@
@c Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007,
@c 2008, 2009, 2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
@c This is part of the GnuPG manual.
@c For copying conditions, see the file gnupg.texi.
+@include defs.inc
+
@node Invoking GPG
@chapter Invoking GPG
@cindex GPG command options
@cindex command options
@cindex options, GPG command
-@c Begin algorithm defaults
-
-@set DEFSYMENCALGO AES128
-
-@c End algorithm defaults
-
-
@macro gpgname
gpg2
@end macro
@manpage gpg2.1
@ifset manverb
.B gpg2
\- OpenPGP encryption and signing tool
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B gpg2
.RB [ \-\-homedir
.IR dir ]
.RB [ \-\-options
.IR file ]
.RI [ options ]
.I command
.RI [ args ]
@end ifset
@mansect description
@command{@gpgname} is the OpenPGP part of the GNU Privacy Guard (GnuPG). It
is a tool to provide digital encryption and signing services using the
OpenPGP standard. @command{@gpgname} features complete key management and
all bells and whistles you can expect from a decent OpenPGP
implementation.
In contrast to the standalone command gpg from GnuPG 1.x, which is
might be better suited for server and embedded platforms, the 2.x
version is commonly installed under the name @command{gpg2} and
targeted to the desktop as it requires several other modules to be
installed.
@manpause
The old 1.x version will be kept maintained and it is possible to
install both versions on the same system. Documentation for the old
GnuPG 1.x command is available as a man page and at
@inforef{Top,GnuPG 1,gpg}.
@xref{Option Index}, for an index to @command{@gpgname}'s commands and options.
@mancont
@menu
* GPG Commands:: List of all commands.
* GPG Options:: List of all options.
* GPG Configuration:: Configuration files.
* GPG Examples:: Some usage examples.
Developer information:
* Unattended Usage of GPG:: Using @command{gpg} from other programs.
@end menu
@c * GPG Protocol:: The protocol the server mode uses.
@c *******************************************
@c *************** ****************
@c *************** COMMANDS ****************
@c *************** ****************
@c *******************************************
@mansect commands
@node GPG Commands
@section Commands
Commands are not distinguished from options except for the fact that
only one command is allowed.
@command{@gpgname} may be run with no commands, in which case it will
perform a reasonable action depending on the type of file it is given
as input (an encrypted message is decrypted, a signature is verified,
a file containing keys is listed).
Please remember that option as well as command parsing stops as soon as
a non-option is encountered, you can explicitly stop parsing by
using the special option @option{--}.
@menu
* General GPG Commands:: Commands not specific to the functionality.
* Operational GPG Commands:: Commands to select the type of operation.
* OpenPGP Key Management:: How to manage your keys.
@end menu
@c *******************************************
@c ********** GENERAL COMMANDS *************
@c *******************************************
@node General GPG Commands
@subsection Commands not specific to the function
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --version
@opindex version
Print the program version and licensing information. Note that you
cannot abbreviate this command.
@item --help
@itemx -h
@opindex help
Print a usage message summarizing the most useful command line options.
Note that you cannot abbreviate this command.
@item --warranty
@opindex warranty
Print warranty information.
@item --dump-options
@opindex dump-options
Print a list of all available options and commands. Note that you cannot
abbreviate this command.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c ******** OPERATIONAL COMMANDS ***********
@c *******************************************
@node Operational GPG Commands
@subsection Commands to select the type of operation
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --sign
@itemx -s
@opindex sign
Make a signature. This command may be combined with @option{--encrypt}
(for a signed and encrypted message), @option{--symmetric} (for a
signed and symmetrically encrypted message), or @option{--encrypt} and
@option{--symmetric} together (for a signed message that may be
decrypted via a secret key or a passphrase). The key to be used for
signing is chosen by default or can be set with the
@option{--local-user} and @option{--default-key} options.
@item --clearsign
@opindex clearsign
Make a clear text signature. The content in a clear text signature is
readable without any special software. OpenPGP software is only needed
to verify the signature. Clear text signatures may modify end-of-line
whitespace for platform independence and are not intended to be
reversible. The key to be used for signing is chosen by default or
can be set with the @option{--local-user} and @option{--default-key}
options.
@item --detach-sign
@itemx -b
@opindex detach-sign
Make a detached signature.
@item --encrypt
@itemx -e
@opindex encrypt
Encrypt data. This option may be combined with @option{--sign} (for a
signed and encrypted message), @option{--symmetric} (for a message that
may be decrypted via a secret key or a passphrase), or @option{--sign}
and @option{--symmetric} together (for a signed message that may be
decrypted via a secret key or a passphrase).
@item --symmetric
@itemx -c
@opindex symmetric
Encrypt with a symmetric cipher using a passphrase. The default
-symmetric cipher used is @value{DEFSYMENCALGO}, but may be chosen with the
+symmetric cipher used is @value{GPGSYMENCALGO}, but may be chosen with the
@option{--cipher-algo} option. This option may be combined with
@option{--sign} (for a signed and symmetrically encrypted message),
@option{--encrypt} (for a message that may be decrypted via a secret key
or a passphrase), or @option{--sign} and @option{--encrypt} together
(for a signed message that may be decrypted via a secret key or a
passphrase).
@item --store
@opindex store
Store only (make a simple RFC1991 literal data packet).
@item --decrypt
@itemx -d
@opindex decrypt
Decrypt the file given on the command line (or STDIN if no file
is specified) and write it to STDOUT (or the file specified with
@option{--output}). If the decrypted file is signed, the signature is also
verified. This command differs from the default operation, as it never
writes to the filename which is included in the file and it rejects
files which don't begin with an encrypted message.
@item --verify
@opindex verify
Assume that the first argument is a signed file and verify it without
generating any output. With no arguments, the signature packet is
read from STDIN. If only a one argument is given, it is expected to
be a complete signature.
With more than 1 argument, the first should be a detached signature
and the remaining files ake up the the signed data. To read the signed
data from STDIN, use @samp{-} as the second filename. For security
reasons a detached signature cannot read the signed material from
STDIN without denoting it in the above way.
Note: If the option @option{--batch} is not used, @command{@gpgname}
may assume that a single argument is a file with a detached signature
and it will try to find a matching data file by stripping certain
suffixes. Using this historical feature to verify a detached
signature is strongly discouraged; always specify the data file too.
Note: When verifying a cleartext signature, @command{gpg} verifies
only what makes up the cleartext signed data and not any extra data
outside of the cleartext signature or header lines following directly
the dash marker line. The option @code{--output} may be used to write
out the actual signed data; but there are other pitfalls with this
format as well. It is suggested to avoid cleartext signatures in
favor of detached signatures.
@item --multifile
@opindex multifile
This modifies certain other commands to accept multiple files for
processing on the command line or read from STDIN with each filename on
a separate line. This allows for many files to be processed at
once. @option{--multifile} may currently be used along with
@option{--verify}, @option{--encrypt}, and @option{--decrypt}. Note that
@option{--multifile --verify} may not be used with detached signatures.
@item --verify-files
@opindex verify-files
Identical to @option{--multifile --verify}.
@item --encrypt-files
@opindex encrypt-files
Identical to @option{--multifile --encrypt}.
@item --decrypt-files
@opindex decrypt-files
Identical to @option{--multifile --decrypt}.
@item --list-keys
@itemx -k
@itemx --list-public-keys
@opindex list-keys
List all keys from the public keyrings, or just the keys given on the
command line.
Avoid using the output of this command in scripts or other programs as
it is likely to change as GnuPG changes. See @option{--with-colons} for a
machine-parseable key listing command that is appropriate for use in
scripts and other programs.
@item --list-secret-keys
@itemx -K
@opindex list-secret-keys
List all keys from the secret keyrings, or just the ones given on the
command line. A @code{#} after the letters @code{sec} means that the
secret key is not usable (for example, if it was created via
@option{--export-secret-subkeys}).
@item --list-sigs
@opindex list-sigs
Same as @option{--list-keys}, but the signatures are listed too.
This command has the same effect as
using @option{--list-keys} with @option{--with-sig-list}.
For each signature listed, there are several flags in between the "sig"
tag and keyid. These flags give additional information about each
signature. From left to right, they are the numbers 1-3 for certificate
check level (see @option{--ask-cert-level}), "L" for a local or
non-exportable signature (see @option{--lsign-key}), "R" for a
nonRevocable signature (see the @option{--edit-key} command "nrsign"),
"P" for a signature that contains a policy URL (see
@option{--cert-policy-url}), "N" for a signature that contains a
notation (see @option{--cert-notation}), "X" for an eXpired signature
(see @option{--ask-cert-expire}), and the numbers 1-9 or "T" for 10 and
above to indicate trust signature levels (see the @option{--edit-key}
command "tsign").
@item --check-sigs
@opindex check-sigs
Same as @option{--list-sigs}, but the signatures are verified. Note
that for performance reasons the revocation status of a signing key is
not shown.
This command has the same effect as
using @option{--list-keys} with @option{--with-sig-check}.
The status of the verification is indicated by a flag directly following
the "sig" tag (and thus before the flags described above for
@option{--list-sigs}). A "!" indicates that the signature has been
successfully verified, a "-" denotes a bad signature and a "%" is used
if an error occurred while checking the signature (e.g. a non supported
algorithm).
@item --locate-keys
@opindex locate-keys
Locate the keys given as arguments. This command basically uses the
same algorithm as used when locating keys for encryption or signing and
may thus be used to see what keys @command{@gpgname} might use. In
particular external methods as defined by @option{--auto-key-locate} may
be used to locate a key. Only public keys are listed.
@item --fingerprint
@opindex fingerprint
List all keys (or the specified ones) along with their
fingerprints. This is the same output as @option{--list-keys} but with
the additional output of a line with the fingerprint. May also be
combined with @option{--list-sigs} or @option{--check-sigs}. If this
command is given twice, the fingerprints of all secondary keys are
listed too.
@item --list-packets
@opindex list-packets
List only the sequence of packets. This is mainly useful for
debugging. When used with option @option{--verbose} the actual MPI
values are dumped and not only their lengths.
@item --card-edit
@opindex card-edit
Present a menu to work with a smartcard. The subcommand "help" provides
an overview on available commands. For a detailed description, please
see the Card HOWTO at
https://gnupg.org/documentation/howtos.html#GnuPG-cardHOWTO .
@item --card-status
@opindex card-status
Show the content of the smart card.
@item --change-pin
@opindex change-pin
Present a menu to allow changing the PIN of a smartcard. This
functionality is also available as the subcommand "passwd" with the
@option{--card-edit} command.
@item --delete-keys @code{name}
@itemx --delete-keys @code{name}
Remove key from the public keyring. In batch mode either @option{--yes} is
required or the key must be specified by fingerprint. This is a
safeguard against accidental deletion of multiple keys.
@item --delete-secret-keys @code{name}
@opindex delete-secret-keys
Remove key from the secret keyring. In batch mode the key
must be specified by fingerprint.
@item --delete-secret-and-public-key @code{name}
@opindex delete-secret-and-public-key
Same as @option{--delete-key}, but if a secret key exists, it will be
removed first. In batch mode the key must be specified by fingerprint.
@item --export
@opindex export
Either export all keys from all keyrings (default keyrings and those
registered via option @option{--keyring}), or if at least one name is given,
those of the given name. The exported keys are written to STDOUT or to the
file given with option @option{--output}. Use together with
@option{--armor} to mail those keys.
@item --send-keys @code{key IDs}
@opindex send-keys
Similar to @option{--export} but sends the keys to a keyserver.
Fingerprints may be used instead of key IDs. Option @option{--keyserver}
must be used to give the name of this keyserver. Don't send your
complete keyring to a keyserver --- select only those keys which are new
or changed by you. If no key IDs are given, @command{gpg} does nothing.
@item --export-secret-keys
@itemx --export-secret-subkeys
@opindex export-secret-keys
@opindex export-secret-subkeys
Same as @option{--export}, but exports the secret keys instead. The
exported keys are written to STDOUT or to the file given with option
@option{--output}. This command is often used along with the option
@option{--armor} to allow easy printing of the key for paper backup;
however the external tool @command{paperkey} does a better job for
creating backups on paper. Note that exporting a secret key can be a
security risk if the exported keys are send over an insecure channel.
The second form of the command has the special property to render the
secret part of the primary key useless; this is a GNU extension to
OpenPGP and other implementations can not be expected to successfully
import such a key. Its intended use is to generated a full key with
an additional signing subkey on a dedicated machine and then using
this command to export the key without the primary key to the main
machine.
GnuPG may ask you to enter the passphrase for the key. This is
required because the internal protection method of the secret key is
different from the one specified by the OpenPGP protocol.
@item --import
@itemx --fast-import
@opindex import
Import/merge keys. This adds the given keys to the
keyring. The fast version is currently just a synonym.
There are a few other options which control how this command works.
Most notable here is the @option{--import-options merge-only} option
which does not insert new keys but does only the merging of new
signatures, user-IDs and subkeys.
@item --recv-keys @code{key IDs}
@opindex recv-keys
Import the keys with the given key IDs from a keyserver. Option
@option{--keyserver} must be used to give the name of this keyserver.
@item --refresh-keys
@opindex refresh-keys
Request updates from a keyserver for keys that already exist on the
local keyring. This is useful for updating a key with the latest
signatures, user IDs, etc. Calling this with no arguments will refresh
the entire keyring. Option @option{--keyserver} must be used to give the
name of the keyserver for all keys that do not have preferred keyservers
set (see @option{--keyserver-options honor-keyserver-url}).
@item --search-keys @code{names}
@opindex search-keys
Search the keyserver for the given names. Multiple names given here will
be joined together to create the search string for the keyserver.
Option @option{--keyserver} must be used to give the name of this
keyserver. Keyservers that support different search methods allow using
the syntax specified in "How to specify a user ID" below. Note that
different keyserver types support different search methods. Currently
only LDAP supports them all.
@item --fetch-keys @code{URIs}
@opindex fetch-keys
Retrieve keys located at the specified URIs. Note that different
installations of GnuPG may support different protocols (HTTP, FTP,
LDAP, etc.)
@item --update-trustdb
@opindex update-trustdb
Do trust database maintenance. This command iterates over all keys and
builds the Web of Trust. This is an interactive command because it may
have to ask for the "ownertrust" values for keys. The user has to give
an estimation of how far she trusts the owner of the displayed key to
correctly certify (sign) other keys. GnuPG only asks for the ownertrust
value if it has not yet been assigned to a key. Using the
@option{--edit-key} menu, the assigned value can be changed at any time.
@item --check-trustdb
@opindex check-trustdb
Do trust database maintenance without user interaction. From time to
time the trust database must be updated so that expired keys or
signatures and the resulting changes in the Web of Trust can be
tracked. Normally, GnuPG will calculate when this is required and do it
automatically unless @option{--no-auto-check-trustdb} is set. This
command can be used to force a trust database check at any time. The
processing is identical to that of @option{--update-trustdb} but it
skips keys with a not yet defined "ownertrust".
For use with cron jobs, this command can be used together with
@option{--batch} in which case the trust database check is done only if
a check is needed. To force a run even in batch mode add the option
@option{--yes}.
@anchor{option --export-ownertrust}
@item --export-ownertrust
@opindex export-ownertrust
Send the ownertrust values to STDOUT. This is useful for backup purposes
as these values are the only ones which can't be re-created from a
corrupted trustdb. Example:
@c man:.RS
@example
@gpgname{} --export-ownertrust > otrust.txt
@end example
@c man:.RE
@item --import-ownertrust
@opindex import-ownertrust
Update the trustdb with the ownertrust values stored in @code{files} (or
STDIN if not given); existing values will be overwritten. In case of a
severely damaged trustdb and if you have a recent backup of the
ownertrust values (e.g. in the file @file{otrust.txt}, you may re-create
the trustdb using these commands:
@c man:.RS
@example
cd ~/.gnupg
rm trustdb.gpg
@gpgname{} --import-ownertrust < otrust.txt
@end example
@c man:.RE
@item --rebuild-keydb-caches
@opindex rebuild-keydb-caches
When updating from version 1.0.6 to 1.0.7 this command should be used
to create signature caches in the keyring. It might be handy in other
situations too.
@item --print-md @code{algo}
@itemx --print-mds
@opindex print-md
Print message digest of algorithm ALGO for all given files or STDIN.
With the second form (or a deprecated "*" as algo) digests for all
available algorithms are printed.
@item --gen-random @code{0|1|2} @code{count}
@opindex gen-random
Emit @var{count} random bytes of the given quality level 0, 1 or 2. If
@var{count} is not given or zero, an endless sequence of random bytes
will be emitted. If used with @option{--armor} the output will be
base64 encoded. PLEASE, don't use this command unless you know what
you are doing; it may remove precious entropy from the system!
@item --gen-prime @code{mode} @code{bits}
@opindex gen-prime
Use the source, Luke :-). The output format is still subject to change.
@item --enarmor
@item --dearmor
@opindex enarmor
@opindex dearmor
Pack or unpack an arbitrary input into/from an OpenPGP ASCII armor.
This is a GnuPG extension to OpenPGP and in general not very useful.
@c @item --server
@c @opindex server
@c Run gpg in server mode. This feature is not yet ready for use and
@c thus not documented.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c ******* KEY MANGEMENT COMMANDS **********
@c *******************************************
@node OpenPGP Key Management
@subsection How to manage your keys
This section explains the main commands for key management
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --quick-gen-key @code{user-id}
@opindex quick-gen-key
This is a simple command to generate a standard key with one user id.
In contrast to @option{--gen-key} the key is generated directly
without the need to answer a bunch of prompts. Unless the option
@option{--yes} is given, the key creation will be canceled if the
given user id already exists in the key ring.
If invoked directly on the console without any special options an
answer to a ``Continue?'' style confirmation prompt is required. In
case the user id already exists in the key ring a second prompt to
force the creation of the key will show up.
If this command is used with @option{--batch},
@option{--pinentry-mode} has been set to @code{loopback}, and one of
the passphrase options (@option{--passphrase},
@option{--passphrase-fd}, or @option{passphrase-file}) is used, the
supplied passphrase is used for the new key and the agent does not ask
for it. To create a key without any protection @code{--passphrase ''}
may be used.
@item --gen-key
@opindex gen-key
Generate a new key pair using teh current default parameters. This is
the standard command to create a new key.
@item --full-gen-key
@opindex gen-key
Generate a new key pair with dialogs for all options. This is an
extended version of @option{--gen-key}.
There is also a feature which allows you to create keys in batch
mode. See the the manual section ``Unattended key generation'' on how
to use this.
@item --gen-revoke @code{name}
@opindex gen-revoke
Generate a revocation certificate for the complete key. To revoke
a subkey or a signature, use the @option{--edit} command.
@item --desig-revoke @code{name}
@opindex desig-revoke
Generate a designated revocation certificate for a key. This allows a
user (with the permission of the keyholder) to revoke someone else's
key.
@item --edit-key
@opindex edit-key
Present a menu which enables you to do most of the key management
related tasks. It expects the specification of a key on the command
line.
@c ******** Begin Edit-key Options **********
@table @asis
@item uid @code{n}
@opindex keyedit:uid
Toggle selection of user ID or photographic user ID with index @code{n}.
Use @code{*} to select all and @code{0} to deselect all.
@item key @code{n}
@opindex keyedit:key
Toggle selection of subkey with index @code{n}.
Use @code{*} to select all and @code{0} to deselect all.
@item sign
@opindex keyedit:sign
Make a signature on key of user @code{name} If the key is not yet
signed by the default user (or the users given with -u), the program
displays the information of the key again, together with its
fingerprint and asks whether it should be signed. This question is
repeated for all users specified with
-u.
@item lsign
@opindex keyedit:lsign
Same as "sign" but the signature is marked as non-exportable and will
therefore never be used by others. This may be used to make keys
valid only in the local environment.
@item nrsign
@opindex keyedit:nrsign
Same as "sign" but the signature is marked as non-revocable and can
therefore never be revoked.
@item tsign
@opindex keyedit:tsign
Make a trust signature. This is a signature that combines the notions
of certification (like a regular signature), and trust (like the
"trust" command). It is generally only useful in distinct communities
or groups.
@end table
@c man:.RS
Note that "l" (for local / non-exportable), "nr" (for non-revocable,
and "t" (for trust) may be freely mixed and prefixed to "sign" to
create a signature of any type desired.
@c man:.RE
@table @asis
@item delsig
@opindex keyedit:delsig
Delete a signature. Note that it is not possible to retract a signature,
once it has been send to the public (i.e. to a keyserver). In that case
you better use @code{revsig}.
@item revsig
@opindex keyedit:revsig
Revoke a signature. For every signature which has been generated by
one of the secret keys, GnuPG asks whether a revocation certificate
should be generated.
@item check
@opindex keyedit:check
Check the signatures on all selected user IDs.
@item adduid
@opindex keyedit:adduid
Create an additional user ID.
@item addphoto
@opindex keyedit:addphoto
Create a photographic user ID. This will prompt for a JPEG file that
will be embedded into the user ID. Note that a very large JPEG will make
for a very large key. Also note that some programs will display your
JPEG unchanged (GnuPG), and some programs will scale it to fit in a
dialog box (PGP).
@item showphoto
@opindex keyedit:showphoto
Display the selected photographic user ID.
@item deluid
@opindex keyedit:deluid
Delete a user ID or photographic user ID. Note that it is not
possible to retract a user id, once it has been send to the public
(i.e. to a keyserver). In that case you better use @code{revuid}.
@item revuid
@opindex keyedit:revuid
Revoke a user ID or photographic user ID.
@item primary
@opindex keyedit:primary
Flag the current user id as the primary one, removes the primary user
id flag from all other user ids and sets the timestamp of all affected
self-signatures one second ahead. Note that setting a photo user ID
as primary makes it primary over other photo user IDs, and setting a
regular user ID as primary makes it primary over other regular user
IDs.
@item keyserver
@opindex keyedit:keyserver
Set a preferred keyserver for the specified user ID(s). This allows
other users to know where you prefer they get your key from. See
@option{--keyserver-options honor-keyserver-url} for more on how this
works. Setting a value of "none" removes an existing preferred
keyserver.
@item notation
@opindex keyedit:notation
Set a name=value notation for the specified user ID(s). See
@option{--cert-notation} for more on how this works. Setting a value of
"none" removes all notations, setting a notation prefixed with a minus
sign (-) removes that notation, and setting a notation name (without the
=value) prefixed with a minus sign removes all notations with that name.
@item pref
@opindex keyedit:pref
List preferences from the selected user ID. This shows the actual
preferences, without including any implied preferences.
@item showpref
@opindex keyedit:showpref
More verbose preferences listing for the selected user ID. This shows
the preferences in effect by including the implied preferences of 3DES
(cipher), SHA-1 (digest), and Uncompressed (compression) if they are
not already included in the preference list. In addition, the
preferred keyserver and signature notations (if any) are shown.
@item setpref @code{string}
@opindex keyedit:setpref
Set the list of user ID preferences to @code{string} for all (or just
the selected) user IDs. Calling setpref with no arguments sets the
preference list to the default (either built-in or set via
@option{--default-preference-list}), and calling setpref with "none"
as the argument sets an empty preference list. Use @command{@gpgname
--version} to get a list of available algorithms. Note that while you
can change the preferences on an attribute user ID (aka "photo ID"),
GnuPG does not select keys via attribute user IDs so these preferences
will not be used by GnuPG.
When setting preferences, you should list the algorithms in the order
which you'd like to see them used by someone else when encrypting a
message to your key. If you don't include 3DES, it will be
automatically added at the end. Note that there are many factors that
go into choosing an algorithm (for example, your key may not be the
only recipient), and so the remote OpenPGP application being used to
send to you may or may not follow your exact chosen order for a given
message. It will, however, only choose an algorithm that is present
on the preference list of every recipient key. See also the
INTEROPERABILITY WITH OTHER OPENPGP PROGRAMS section below.
@item addkey
@opindex keyedit:addkey
Add a subkey to this key.
@item addcardkey
@opindex keyedit:addcardkey
Generate a subkey on a card and add it to this key.
@item keytocard
@opindex keyedit:keytocard
Transfer the selected secret subkey (or the primary key if no subkey
has been selected) to a smartcard. The secret key in the keyring will
be replaced by a stub if the key could be stored successfully on the
card and you use the save command later. Only certain key types may be
transferred to the card. A sub menu allows you to select on what card
to store the key. Note that it is not possible to get that key back
from the card - if the card gets broken your secret key will be lost
unless you have a backup somewhere.
@item bkuptocard @code{file}
@opindex keyedit:bkuptocard
Restore the given file to a card. This command may be used to restore a
backup key (as generated during card initialization) to a new card. In
almost all cases this will be the encryption key. You should use this
command only with the corresponding public key and make sure that the
file given as argument is indeed the backup to restore. You should then
select 2 to restore as encryption key. You will first be asked to enter
the passphrase of the backup key and then for the Admin PIN of the card.
@item delkey
@opindex keyedit:delkey
Remove a subkey (secondary key). Note that it is not possible to retract
a subkey, once it has been send to the public (i.e. to a keyserver). In
that case you better use @code{revkey}.
@item revkey
@opindex keyedit:revkey
Revoke a subkey.
@item expire
@opindex keyedit:expire
Change the key or subkey expiration time. If a subkey is selected, the
expiration time of this subkey will be changed. With no selection, the
key expiration of the primary key is changed.
@item trust
@opindex keyedit:trust
Change the owner trust value for the key. This updates the trust-db
immediately and no save is required.
@item disable
@itemx enable
@opindex keyedit:disable
@opindex keyedit:enable
Disable or enable an entire key. A disabled key can not normally be
used for encryption.
@item addrevoker
@opindex keyedit:addrevoker
Add a designated revoker to the key. This takes one optional argument:
"sensitive". If a designated revoker is marked as sensitive, it will
not be exported by default (see export-options).
@item passwd
@opindex keyedit:passwd
Change the passphrase of the secret key.
@item toggle
@opindex keyedit:toggle
Toggle between public and secret key listing.
@item clean
@opindex keyedit:clean
Compact (by removing all signatures except the selfsig) any user ID
that is no longer usable (e.g. revoked, or expired). Then, remove any
signatures that are not usable by the trust calculations.
Specifically, this removes any signature that does not validate, any
signature that is superseded by a later signature, revoked signatures,
and signatures issued by keys that are not present on the keyring.
@item minimize
@opindex keyedit:minimize
Make the key as small as possible. This removes all signatures from
each user ID except for the most recent self-signature.
@item cross-certify
@opindex keyedit:cross-certify
Add cross-certification signatures to signing subkeys that may not
currently have them. Cross-certification signatures protect against a
subtle attack against signing subkeys. See
@option{--require-cross-certification}. All new keys generated have
this signature by default, so this option is only useful to bring
older keys up to date.
@item save
@opindex keyedit:save
Save all changes to the key rings and quit.
@item quit
@opindex keyedit:quit
Quit the program without updating the
key rings.
@end table
@c man:.RS
The listing shows you the key with its secondary keys and all user
ids. The primary user id is indicated by a dot, and selected keys or
user ids are indicated by an asterisk. The trust
value is displayed with the primary key: the first is the assigned owner
trust and the second is the calculated trust value. Letters are used for
the values:
@c man:.RE
@table @asis
@item -
No ownertrust assigned / not yet calculated.
@item e
Trust
calculation has failed; probably due to an expired key.
@item q
Not enough information for calculation.
@item n
Never trust this key.
@item m
Marginally trusted.
@item f
Fully trusted.
@item u
Ultimately trusted.
@end table
@c ******** End Edit-key Options **********
@item --sign-key @code{name}
@opindex sign-key
Signs a public key with your secret key. This is a shortcut version of
the subcommand "sign" from @option{--edit}.
@item --lsign-key @code{name}
@opindex lsign-key
Signs a public key with your secret key but marks it as
non-exportable. This is a shortcut version of the subcommand "lsign"
from @option{--edit-key}.
@item --quick-sign-key @code{fpr} [@code{names}]
@itemx --quick-lsign-key @code{fpr} [@code{names}]
@opindex quick-sign-key
@opindex quick-lsign-key
Directly sign a key from the passphrase without any further user
interaction. The @code{fpr} must be the verified primary fingerprint
of a key in the local keyring. If no @code{names} are given, all
useful user ids are signed; with given [@code{names}] only useful user
ids matching one of theses names are signed. The command
@option{--quick-lsign-key} marks the signatures as non-exportable. If
such a non-exportable signature already exists the
@option{--quick-sign-key} turns it into a exportable signature.
This command uses reasonable defaults and thus does not provide the
full flexibility of the "sign" subcommand from @option{--edit-key}.
Its intended use is to help unattended key signing by utilizing a list
of verified fingerprints.
@item --quick-adduid @var{user-id} @var{new-user-id}
@opindex quick-adduid
This command adds a new user id to an existing key. In contrast to
the interactive sub-command @code{adduid} of @option{--edit-key} the
@var{new-user-id} is added verbatim with only leading and trailing
white space removed, it is expected to be UTF-8 encoded, and no checks
on its form are applied.
@item --passwd @var{user_id}
@opindex passwd
Change the passphrase of the secret key belonging to the certificate
specified as @var{user_id}. This is a shortcut for the sub-command
@code{passwd} of the edit key menu.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c *************** ****************
@c *************** OPTIONS ****************
@c *************** ****************
@c *******************************************
@mansect options
@node GPG Options
@section Option Summary
@command{@gpgname} features a bunch of options to control the exact
behaviour and to change the default configuration.
@menu
* GPG Configuration Options:: How to change the configuration.
* GPG Key related Options:: Key related options.
* GPG Input and Output:: Input and Output.
* OpenPGP Options:: OpenPGP protocol specific options.
* Compliance Options:: Compliance options.
* GPG Esoteric Options:: Doing things one usually don't want to do.
* Deprecated Options:: Deprecated options.
@end menu
Long options can be put in an options file (default
"~/.gnupg/gpg.conf"). Short option names will not work - for example,
"armor" is a valid option for the options file, while "a" is not. Do not
write the 2 dashes, but simply the name of the option and any required
arguments. Lines with a hash ('#') as the first non-white-space
character are ignored. Commands may be put in this file too, but that is
not generally useful as the command will execute automatically with
every execution of gpg.
Please remember that option parsing stops as soon as a non-option is
encountered, you can explicitly stop parsing by using the special option
@option{--}.
@c *******************************************
@c ******** CONFIGURATION OPTIONS **********
@c *******************************************
@node GPG Configuration Options
@subsection How to change the configuration
These options are used to change the configuration and are usually found
in the option file.
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --default-key @var{name}
@opindex default-key
Use @var{name} as the default key to sign with. If this option is not
used, the default key is the first key found in the secret keyring.
Note that @option{-u} or @option{--local-user} overrides this option.
@item --default-recipient @var{name}
@opindex default-recipient
Use @var{name} as default recipient if option @option{--recipient} is
not used and don't ask if this is a valid one. @var{name} must be
non-empty.
@item --default-recipient-self
@opindex default-recipient-self
Use the default key as default recipient if option @option{--recipient} is not
used and don't ask if this is a valid one. The default key is the first
one from the secret keyring or the one set with @option{--default-key}.
@item --no-default-recipient
@opindex no-default-recipient
Reset @option{--default-recipient} and @option{--default-recipient-self}.
@item -v, --verbose
@opindex verbose
Give more information during processing. If used
twice, the input data is listed in detail.
@item --no-verbose
@opindex no-verbose
Reset verbose level to 0.
@item -q, --quiet
@opindex quiet
Try to be as quiet as possible.
@item --batch
@itemx --no-batch
@opindex batch
@opindex no-batch
Use batch mode. Never ask, do not allow interactive commands.
@option{--no-batch} disables this option. Note that even with a
filename given on the command line, gpg might still need to read from
STDIN (in particular if gpg figures that the input is a
detached signature and no data file has been specified). Thus if you
do not want to feed data via STDIN, you should connect STDIN to
@file{/dev/null}.
@item --no-tty
@opindex no-tty
Make sure that the TTY (terminal) is never used for any output.
This option is needed in some cases because GnuPG sometimes prints
warnings to the TTY even if @option{--batch} is used.
@item --yes
@opindex yes
Assume "yes" on most questions.
@item --no
@opindex no
Assume "no" on most questions.
@item --list-options @code{parameters}
@opindex list-options
This is a space or comma delimited string that gives options used when
listing keys and signatures (that is, @option{--list-keys},
@option{--list-sigs}, @option{--list-public-keys},
@option{--list-secret-keys}, and the @option{--edit-key} functions).
Options can be prepended with a @option{no-} (after the two dashes) to
give the opposite meaning. The options are:
@table @asis
@item show-photos
@opindex list-options:show-photos
Causes @option{--list-keys}, @option{--list-sigs},
@option{--list-public-keys}, and @option{--list-secret-keys} to
display any photo IDs attached to the key. Defaults to no. See also
@option{--photo-viewer}. Does not work with @option{--with-colons}:
see @option{--attribute-fd} for the appropriate way to get photo data
for scripts and other frontends.
@item show-usage
@opindex list-options:show-usage
Show usage information for keys and subkeys in the standard key
listing. This is a list of letters indicating the allowed usage for a
key (@code{E}=encryption, @code{S}=signing, @code{C}=certification,
@code{A}=authentication). Defaults to no.
@item show-policy-urls
@opindex list-options:show-policy-urls
Show policy URLs in the @option{--list-sigs} or @option{--check-sigs}
listings. Defaults to no.
@item show-notations
@itemx show-std-notations
@itemx show-user-notations
@opindex list-options:show-notations
@opindex list-options:show-std-notations
@opindex list-options:show-user-notations
Show all, IETF standard, or user-defined signature notations in the
@option{--list-sigs} or @option{--check-sigs} listings. Defaults to no.
@item show-keyserver-urls
@opindex list-options:show-keyserver-urls
Show any preferred keyserver URL in the @option{--list-sigs} or
@option{--check-sigs} listings. Defaults to no.
@item show-uid-validity
@opindex list-options:show-uid-validity
Display the calculated validity of user IDs during key listings.
Defaults to no.
@item show-unusable-uids
@opindex list-options:show-unusable-uids
Show revoked and expired user IDs in key listings. Defaults to no.
@item show-unusable-subkeys
@opindex list-options:show-unusable-subkeys
Show revoked and expired subkeys in key listings. Defaults to no.
@item show-keyring
@opindex list-options:show-keyring
Display the keyring name at the head of key listings to show which
keyring a given key resides on. Defaults to no.
@item show-sig-expire
@opindex list-options:show-sig-expire
Show signature expiration dates (if any) during @option{--list-sigs} or
@option{--check-sigs} listings. Defaults to no.
@item show-sig-subpackets
@opindex list-options:show-sig-subpackets
Include signature subpackets in the key listing. This option can take an
optional argument list of the subpackets to list. If no argument is
passed, list all subpackets. Defaults to no. This option is only
meaningful when using @option{--with-colons} along with
@option{--list-sigs} or @option{--check-sigs}.
@end table
@item --verify-options @code{parameters}
@opindex verify-options
This is a space or comma delimited string that gives options used when
verifying signatures. Options can be prepended with a `no-' to give
the opposite meaning. The options are:
@table @asis
@item show-photos
@opindex verify-options:show-photos
Display any photo IDs present on the key that issued the signature.
Defaults to no. See also @option{--photo-viewer}.
@item show-policy-urls
@opindex verify-options:show-policy-urls
Show policy URLs in the signature being verified. Defaults to no.
@item show-notations
@itemx show-std-notations
@itemx show-user-notations
@opindex verify-options:show-notations
@opindex verify-options:show-std-notations
@opindex verify-options:show-user-notations
Show all, IETF standard, or user-defined signature notations in the
signature being verified. Defaults to IETF standard.
@item show-keyserver-urls
@opindex verify-options:show-keyserver-urls
Show any preferred keyserver URL in the signature being verified.
Defaults to no.
@item show-uid-validity
@opindex verify-options:show-uid-validity
Display the calculated validity of the user IDs on the key that issued
the signature. Defaults to no.
@item show-unusable-uids
@opindex verify-options:show-unusable-uids
Show revoked and expired user IDs during signature verification.
Defaults to no.
@item show-primary-uid-only
@opindex verify-options:show-primary-uid-only
Show only the primary user ID during signature verification. That is
all the AKA lines as well as photo Ids are not shown with the signature
verification status.
@item pka-lookups
@opindex verify-options:pka-lookups
Enable PKA lookups to verify sender addresses. Note that PKA is based
on DNS, and so enabling this option may disclose information on when
and what signatures are verified or to whom data is encrypted. This
is similar to the "web bug" described for the auto-key-retrieve
feature.
@item pka-trust-increase
@opindex verify-options:pka-trust-increase
Raise the trust in a signature to full if the signature passes PKA
validation. This option is only meaningful if pka-lookups is set.
@end table
@item --enable-large-rsa
@itemx --disable-large-rsa
@opindex enable-large-rsa
@opindex disable-large-rsa
With --gen-key and --batch, enable the creation of larger RSA secret
keys than is generally recommended (up to 8192 bits). These large
keys are more expensive to use, and their signatures and
certifications are also larger.
@item --enable-dsa2
@itemx --disable-dsa2
@opindex enable-dsa2
@opindex disable-dsa2
Enable hash truncation for all DSA keys even for old DSA Keys up to
1024 bit. This is also the default with @option{--openpgp}. Note
that older versions of GnuPG also required this flag to allow the
generation of DSA larger than 1024 bit.
@item --photo-viewer @code{string}
@opindex photo-viewer
This is the command line that should be run to view a photo ID. "%i"
will be expanded to a filename containing the photo. "%I" does the
same, except the file will not be deleted once the viewer exits.
Other flags are "%k" for the key ID, "%K" for the long key ID, "%f"
for the key fingerprint, "%t" for the extension of the image type
(e.g. "jpg"), "%T" for the MIME type of the image (e.g. "image/jpeg"),
"%v" for the single-character calculated validity of the image being
viewed (e.g. "f"), "%V" for the calculated validity as a string (e.g.
"full"), "%U" for a base32 encoded hash of the user ID,
and "%%" for an actual percent sign. If neither %i or %I are present,
then the photo will be supplied to the viewer on standard input.
The default viewer is "xloadimage -fork -quiet -title 'KeyID 0x%k'
STDIN". Note that if your image viewer program is not secure, then
executing it from GnuPG does not make it secure.
@item --exec-path @code{string}
@opindex exec-path
Sets a list of directories to search for photo viewers and keyserver
helpers. If not provided, keyserver helpers use the compiled-in
default directory, and photo viewers use the $PATH environment
variable.
Note, that on W32 system this value is ignored when searching for
keyserver helpers.
@item --keyring @code{file}
@opindex keyring
Add @code{file} to the current list of keyrings. If @code{file} begins
with a tilde and a slash, these are replaced by the $HOME directory. If
the filename does not contain a slash, it is assumed to be in the GnuPG
home directory ("~/.gnupg" if @option{--homedir} or $GNUPGHOME is not
used).
Note that this adds a keyring to the current list. If the intent is to
use the specified keyring alone, use @option{--keyring} along with
@option{--no-default-keyring}.
@item --secret-keyring @code{file}
@opindex secret-keyring
This is an obsolete option and ignored. All secret keys are stored in
the @file{private-keys-v1.d} directory below the GnuPG home directory.
@item --primary-keyring @code{file}
@opindex primary-keyring
Designate @code{file} as the primary public keyring. This means that
newly imported keys (via @option{--import} or keyserver
@option{--recv-from}) will go to this keyring.
@item --trustdb-name @code{file}
@opindex trustdb-name
Use @code{file} instead of the default trustdb. If @code{file} begins
with a tilde and a slash, these are replaced by the $HOME directory. If
the filename does not contain a slash, it is assumed to be in the GnuPG
home directory (@file{~/.gnupg} if @option{--homedir} or $GNUPGHOME is
not used).
@include opt-homedir.texi
@item --display-charset @code{name}
@opindex display-charset
Set the name of the native character set. This is used to convert
some informational strings like user IDs to the proper UTF-8 encoding.
Note that this has nothing to do with the character set of data to be
encrypted or signed; GnuPG does not recode user-supplied data. If
this option is not used, the default character set is determined from
the current locale. A verbosity level of 3 shows the chosen set.
Valid values for @code{name} are:
@table @asis
@item iso-8859-1
@opindex display-charset:iso-8859-1
This is the Latin 1 set.
@item iso-8859-2
@opindex display-charset:iso-8859-2
The Latin 2 set.
@item iso-8859-15
@opindex display-charset:iso-8859-15
This is currently an alias for
the Latin 1 set.
@item koi8-r
@opindex display-charset:koi8-r
The usual Russian set (rfc1489).
@item utf-8
@opindex display-charset:utf-8
Bypass all translations and assume
that the OS uses native UTF-8 encoding.
@end table
@item --utf8-strings
@itemx --no-utf8-strings
@opindex utf8-strings
Assume that command line arguments are given as UTF8 strings. The
default (@option{--no-utf8-strings}) is to assume that arguments are
encoded in the character set as specified by
@option{--display-charset}. These options affect all following
arguments. Both options may be used multiple times.
@anchor{gpg-option --options}
@item --options @code{file}
@opindex options
Read options from @code{file} and do not try to read them from the
default options file in the homedir (see @option{--homedir}). This
option is ignored if used in an options file.
@item --no-options
@opindex no-options
Shortcut for @option{--options /dev/null}. This option is detected
before an attempt to open an option file. Using this option will also
prevent the creation of a @file{~/.gnupg} homedir.
@item -z @code{n}
@itemx --compress-level @code{n}
@itemx --bzip2-compress-level @code{n}
@opindex compress-level
@opindex bzip2-compress-level
Set compression level to @code{n} for the ZIP and ZLIB compression
algorithms. The default is to use the default compression level of zlib
(normally 6). @option{--bzip2-compress-level} sets the compression level
for the BZIP2 compression algorithm (defaulting to 6 as well). This is a
different option from @option{--compress-level} since BZIP2 uses a
significant amount of memory for each additional compression level.
@option{-z} sets both. A value of 0 for @code{n} disables compression.
@item --bzip2-decompress-lowmem
@opindex bzip2-decompress-lowmem
Use a different decompression method for BZIP2 compressed files. This
alternate method uses a bit more than half the memory, but also runs
at half the speed. This is useful under extreme low memory
circumstances when the file was originally compressed at a high
@option{--bzip2-compress-level}.
@item --mangle-dos-filenames
@itemx --no-mangle-dos-filenames
@opindex mangle-dos-filenames
@opindex no-mangle-dos-filenames
Older version of Windows cannot handle filenames with more than one
dot. @option{--mangle-dos-filenames} causes GnuPG to replace (rather
than add to) the extension of an output filename to avoid this
problem. This option is off by default and has no effect on non-Windows
platforms.
@item --ask-cert-level
@itemx --no-ask-cert-level
@opindex ask-cert-level
When making a key signature, prompt for a certification level. If this
option is not specified, the certification level used is set via
@option{--default-cert-level}. See @option{--default-cert-level} for
information on the specific levels and how they are
used. @option{--no-ask-cert-level} disables this option. This option
defaults to no.
@item --default-cert-level @code{n}
@opindex default-cert-level
The default to use for the check level when signing a key.
0 means you make no particular claim as to how carefully you verified
the key.
1 means you believe the key is owned by the person who claims to own
it but you could not, or did not verify the key at all. This is
useful for a "persona" verification, where you sign the key of a
pseudonymous user.
2 means you did casual verification of the key. For example, this
could mean that you verified the key fingerprint and checked the
user ID on the key against a photo ID.
3 means you did extensive verification of the key. For example, this
could mean that you verified the key fingerprint with the owner of the
key in person, and that you checked, by means of a hard to forge
document with a photo ID (such as a passport) that the name of the key
owner matches the name in the user ID on the key, and finally that you
verified (by exchange of email) that the email address on the key
belongs to the key owner.
Note that the examples given above for levels 2 and 3 are just that:
examples. In the end, it is up to you to decide just what "casual"
and "extensive" mean to you.
This option defaults to 0 (no particular claim).
@item --min-cert-level
@opindex min-cert-level
When building the trust database, treat any signatures with a
certification level below this as invalid. Defaults to 2, which
disregards level 1 signatures. Note that level 0 "no particular
claim" signatures are always accepted.
@item --trusted-key @code{long key ID}
@opindex trusted-key
Assume that the specified key (which must be given
as a full 8 byte key ID) is as trustworthy as one of
your own secret keys. This option is useful if you
don't want to keep your secret keys (or one of them)
online but still want to be able to check the validity of a given
recipient's or signator's key.
@item --trust-model @code{pgp|classic|direct|always|auto}
@opindex trust-model
Set what trust model GnuPG should follow. The models are:
@table @asis
@item pgp
@opindex trust-mode:pgp
This is the Web of Trust combined with trust signatures as used in PGP
5.x and later. This is the default trust model when creating a new
trust database.
@item classic
@opindex trust-mode:classic
This is the standard Web of Trust as introduced by PGP 2.
@item direct
@opindex trust-mode:direct
Key validity is set directly by the user and not calculated via the
Web of Trust.
@item always
@opindex trust-mode:always
Skip key validation and assume that used keys are always fully
valid. You generally won't use this unless you are using some
external validation scheme. This option also suppresses the
"[uncertain]" tag printed with signature checks when there is no
evidence that the user ID is bound to the key. Note that this
trust model still does not allow the use of expired, revoked, or
disabled keys.
@item auto
@opindex trust-mode:auto
Select the trust model depending on whatever the internal trust
database says. This is the default model if such a database already
exists.
@end table
@item --auto-key-locate @code{parameters}
@itemx --no-auto-key-locate
@opindex auto-key-locate
GnuPG can automatically locate and retrieve keys as needed using this
option. This happens when encrypting to an email address (in the
"user@@example.com" form), and there are no user@@example.com keys on
the local keyring. This option takes any number of the following
mechanisms, in the order they are to be tried:
@table @asis
@item cert
Locate a key using DNS CERT, as specified in rfc4398.
@item pka
Locate a key using DNS PKA.
@item ldap
Using DNS Service Discovery, check the domain in question for any LDAP
keyservers to use. If this fails, attempt to locate the key using the
PGP Universal method of checking @samp{ldap://keys.(thedomain)}.
@item keyserver
Locate a key using whatever keyserver is defined using the
@option{--keyserver} option.
@item keyserver-URL
In addition, a keyserver URL as used in the @option{--keyserver} option
may be used here to query that particular keyserver.
@item local
Locate the key using the local keyrings. This mechanism allows to
select the order a local key lookup is done. Thus using
@samp{--auto-key-locate local} is identical to
@option{--no-auto-key-locate}.
@item nodefault
This flag disables the standard local key lookup, done before any of the
mechanisms defined by the @option{--auto-key-locate} are tried. The
position of this mechanism in the list does not matter. It is not
required if @code{local} is also used.
@item clear
Clear all defined mechanisms. This is useful to override
mechanisms given in a config file.
@end table
@item --keyid-format @code{short|0xshort|long|0xlong}
@opindex keyid-format
Select how to display key IDs. "short" is the traditional 8-character
key ID. "long" is the more accurate (but less convenient)
16-character key ID. Add an "0x" to either to include an "0x" at the
beginning of the key ID, as in 0x99242560. Note that this option is
ignored if the option --with-colons is used.
@item --keyserver @code{name}
@opindex keyserver
Use @code{name} as your keyserver. This is the server that
@option{--recv-keys}, @option{--send-keys}, and @option{--search-keys}
will communicate with to receive keys from, send keys to, and search for
keys on. The format of the @code{name} is a URI:
`scheme:[//]keyservername[:port]' The scheme is the type of keyserver:
"hkp" for the HTTP (or compatible) keyservers, "ldap" for the LDAP
keyservers, or "mailto" for the Graff email keyserver. Note that your
particular installation of GnuPG may have other keyserver types
available as well. Keyserver schemes are case-insensitive. After the
keyserver name, optional keyserver configuration options may be
provided. These are the same as the global @option{--keyserver-options}
from below, but apply only to this particular keyserver.
Most keyservers synchronize with each other, so there is generally no
need to send keys to more than one server. The keyserver
@code{hkp://keys.gnupg.net} uses round robin DNS to give a different
keyserver each time you use it.
@item --keyserver-options @code{name=value}
@opindex keyserver-options
This is a space or comma delimited string that gives options for the
keyserver. Options can be prefixed with a `no-' to give the opposite
meaning. Valid import-options or export-options may be used here as
well to apply to importing (@option{--recv-key}) or exporting
(@option{--send-key}) a key from a keyserver. While not all options
are available for all keyserver types, some common options are:
@table @asis
@item include-revoked
When searching for a key with @option{--search-keys}, include keys that
are marked on the keyserver as revoked. Note that not all keyservers
differentiate between revoked and unrevoked keys, and for such
keyservers this option is meaningless. Note also that most keyservers do
not have cryptographic verification of key revocations, and so turning
this option off may result in skipping keys that are incorrectly marked
as revoked.
@item include-disabled
When searching for a key with @option{--search-keys}, include keys that
are marked on the keyserver as disabled. Note that this option is not
used with HKP keyservers.
@item auto-key-retrieve
This option enables the automatic retrieving of keys from a keyserver
when verifying signatures made by keys that are not on the local
keyring.
Note that this option makes a "web bug" like behavior possible.
Keyserver operators can see which keys you request, so by sending you
a message signed by a brand new key (which you naturally will not have
on your local keyring), the operator can tell both your IP address and
the time when you verified the signature.
@item honor-keyserver-url
When using @option{--refresh-keys}, if the key in question has a preferred
keyserver URL, then use that preferred keyserver to refresh the key
from. In addition, if auto-key-retrieve is set, and the signature
being verified has a preferred keyserver URL, then use that preferred
keyserver to fetch the key from. Note that this option introduces a
"web bug": The creator of the key can see when the keys is
refreshed. Thus this option is not enabled by default.
@item honor-pka-record
If auto-key-retrieve is set, and the signature being verified has a
PKA record, then use the PKA information to fetch the key. Defaults
to "yes".
@item include-subkeys
When receiving a key, include subkeys as potential targets. Note that
this option is not used with HKP keyservers, as they do not support
retrieving keys by subkey id.
@item timeout
Tell the keyserver helper program how long (in seconds) to try and
perform a keyserver action before giving up. Note that performing
multiple actions at the same time uses this timeout value per action.
For example, when retrieving multiple keys via @option{--recv-keys}, the
timeout applies separately to each key retrieval, and not to the
@option{--recv-keys} command as a whole. Defaults to 30 seconds.
@item http-proxy=@code{value}
Set the proxy to use for HTTP and HKP keyservers.
This overrides any proxy defined in @file{dirmngr.conf}.
@item verbose
This option has no more function since GnuPG 2.1. Use the
@code{dirmngr} configuration options instead.
@item debug
This option has no more function since GnuPG 2.1. Use the
@code{dirmngr} configuration options instead.
@item check-cert
This option has no more function since GnuPG 2.1. Use the
@code{dirmngr} configuration options instead.
@item ca-cert-file
This option has no more function since GnuPG 2.1. Use the
@code{dirmngr} configuration options instead.
@end table
@item --completes-needed @code{n}
@opindex compliant-needed
Number of completely trusted users to introduce a new
key signer (defaults to 1).
@item --marginals-needed @code{n}
@opindex marginals-needed
Number of marginally trusted users to introduce a new
key signer (defaults to 3)
@item --max-cert-depth @code{n}
@opindex max-cert-depth
Maximum depth of a certification chain (default is 5).
@item --no-sig-cache
@opindex no-sig-cache
Do not cache the verification status of key signatures.
Caching gives a much better performance in key listings. However, if
you suspect that your public keyring is not save against write
modifications, you can use this option to disable the caching. It
probably does not make sense to disable it because all kind of damage
can be done if someone else has write access to your public keyring.
@item --no-sig-create-check
@opindex no-sig-create-check
GnuPG normally verifies each signature right after creation to protect
against bugs and hardware malfunctions which could leak out bits from
the secret key. This extra verification needs some time (about 115%
for DSA keys), and so this option can be used to disable it.
However, due to the fact that the signature creation needs manual
interaction, this performance penalty does not matter in most settings.
@item --auto-check-trustdb
@itemx --no-auto-check-trustdb
@opindex auto-check-trustdb
If GnuPG feels that its information about the Web of Trust has to be
updated, it automatically runs the @option{--check-trustdb} command
internally. This may be a time consuming
process. @option{--no-auto-check-trustdb} disables this option.
@item --use-agent
@itemx --no-use-agent
@opindex use-agent
This is dummy option. @command{@gpgname} always requires the agent.
@item --gpg-agent-info
@opindex gpg-agent-info
This is dummy option. It has no effect when used with @command{gpg2}.
@item --agent-program @var{file}
@opindex agent-program
Specify an agent program to be used for secret key operations. The
default value is determined by running @command{gpgconf} with the
option @option{--list-dirs}. Note that the pipe symbol (@code{|}) is
used for a regression test suite hack and may thus not be used in the
file name.
@item --dirmngr-program @var{file}
@opindex dirmngr-program
Specify a dirmngr program to be used for keyserver access. The
-default value is @file{/usr/sbin/dirmngr}. This is only used as a
+default value is @file{@value{BINDIR}/dirmngr}. This is only used as a
fallback when the environment variable @code{DIRMNGR_INFO} is not set or
a running dirmngr cannot be connected.
@item --no-autostart
@opindex no-autostart
Do not start the gpg-agent or the dirmngr if it has not yet been
started and its service is required. This option is mostly useful on
machines where the connection to gpg-agent has been redirected to
another machines. If dirmngr is required on the remote machine, it
may be started manually using @command{gpgconf --launch dirmngr}.
@item --lock-once
@opindex lock-once
Lock the databases the first time a lock is requested
and do not release the lock until the process
terminates.
@item --lock-multiple
@opindex lock-multiple
Release the locks every time a lock is no longer
needed. Use this to override a previous @option{--lock-once}
from a config file.
@item --lock-never
@opindex lock-never
Disable locking entirely. This option should be used only in very
special environments, where it can be assured that only one process
is accessing those files. A bootable floppy with a stand-alone
encryption system will probably use this. Improper usage of this
option may lead to data and key corruption.
@item --exit-on-status-write-error
@opindex exit-on-status-write-error
This option will cause write errors on the status FD to immediately
terminate the process. That should in fact be the default but it never
worked this way and thus we need an option to enable this, so that the
change won't break applications which close their end of a status fd
connected pipe too early. Using this option along with
@option{--enable-progress-filter} may be used to cleanly cancel long
running gpg operations.
@item --limit-card-insert-tries @code{n}
@opindex limit-card-insert-tries
With @code{n} greater than 0 the number of prompts asking to insert a
smartcard gets limited to N-1. Thus with a value of 1 gpg won't at
all ask to insert a card if none has been inserted at startup. This
option is useful in the configuration file in case an application does
not know about the smartcard support and waits ad infinitum for an
inserted card.
@item --no-random-seed-file
@opindex no-random-seed-file
GnuPG uses a file to store its internal random pool over invocations.
This makes random generation faster; however sometimes write operations
are not desired. This option can be used to achieve that with the cost of
slower random generation.
@item --no-greeting
@opindex no-greeting
Suppress the initial copyright message.
@item --no-secmem-warning
@opindex no-secmem-warning
Suppress the warning about "using insecure memory".
@item --no-permission-warning
@opindex permission-warning
Suppress the warning about unsafe file and home directory (@option{--homedir})
permissions. Note that the permission checks that GnuPG performs are
not intended to be authoritative, but rather they simply warn about
certain common permission problems. Do not assume that the lack of a
warning means that your system is secure.
Note that the warning for unsafe @option{--homedir} permissions cannot be
suppressed in the gpg.conf file, as this would allow an attacker to
place an unsafe gpg.conf file in place, and use this file to suppress
warnings about itself. The @option{--homedir} permissions warning may only be
suppressed on the command line.
@item --no-mdc-warning
@opindex no-mdc-warning
Suppress the warning about missing MDC integrity protection.
@item --require-secmem
@itemx --no-require-secmem
@opindex require-secmem
Refuse to run if GnuPG cannot get secure memory. Defaults to no
(i.e. run, but give a warning).
@item --require-cross-certification
@itemx --no-require-cross-certification
@opindex require-cross-certification
When verifying a signature made from a subkey, ensure that the cross
certification "back signature" on the subkey is present and valid. This
protects against a subtle attack against subkeys that can sign.
Defaults to @option{--require-cross-certification} for
@command{@gpgname}.
@item --expert
@itemx --no-expert
@opindex expert
Allow the user to do certain nonsensical or "silly" things like
signing an expired or revoked key, or certain potentially incompatible
things like generating unusual key types. This also disables certain
warning messages about potentially incompatible actions. As the name
implies, this option is for experts only. If you don't fully
understand the implications of what it allows you to do, leave this
off. @option{--no-expert} disables this option.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c ******** KEY RELATED OPTIONS ************
@c *******************************************
@node GPG Key related Options
@subsection Key related options
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --recipient @var{name}
@itemx -r
@opindex recipient
Encrypt for user id @var{name}. If this option or
@option{--hidden-recipient} is not specified, GnuPG asks for the user-id
unless @option{--default-recipient} is given.
@item --hidden-recipient @var{name}
@itemx -R
@opindex hidden-recipient
Encrypt for user ID @var{name}, but hide the key ID of this user's
key. This option helps to hide the receiver of the message and is a
limited countermeasure against traffic analysis. If this option or
@option{--recipient} is not specified, GnuPG asks for the user ID unless
@option{--default-recipient} is given.
@item --encrypt-to @code{name}
@opindex encrypt-to
Same as @option{--recipient} but this one is intended for use in the
options file and may be used with your own user-id as an
"encrypt-to-self". These keys are only used when there are other
recipients given either by use of @option{--recipient} or by the asked
user id. No trust checking is performed for these user ids and even
disabled keys can be used.
@item --hidden-encrypt-to @code{name}
@opindex hidden-encrypt-to
Same as @option{--hidden-recipient} but this one is intended for use in the
options file and may be used with your own user-id as a hidden
"encrypt-to-self". These keys are only used when there are other
recipients given either by use of @option{--recipient} or by the asked user id.
No trust checking is performed for these user ids and even disabled
keys can be used.
@item --no-encrypt-to
@opindex no-encrypt-to
Disable the use of all @option{--encrypt-to} and
@option{--hidden-encrypt-to} keys.
@item --group @code{name=value1 }
@opindex group
Sets up a named group, which is similar to aliases in email programs.
Any time the group name is a recipient (@option{-r} or
@option{--recipient}), it will be expanded to the values
specified. Multiple groups with the same name are automatically merged
into a single group.
The values are @code{key IDs} or fingerprints, but any key description
is accepted. Note that a value with spaces in it will be treated as
two different values. Note also there is only one level of expansion
--- you cannot make an group that points to another group. When used
from the command line, it may be necessary to quote the argument to
this option to prevent the shell from treating it as multiple
arguments.
@item --ungroup @code{name}
@opindex ungroup
Remove a given entry from the @option{--group} list.
@item --no-groups
@opindex no-groups
Remove all entries from the @option{--group} list.
@item --local-user @var{name}
@itemx -u
@opindex local-user
Use @var{name} as the key to sign with. Note that this option overrides
@option{--default-key}.
@item --try-secret-key @var{name}
@opindex try-secret-key
For hidden recipients GPG needs to know the keys to use for trial
decryption. The key set with @option{--default-key} is always tried
first, but this is often not sufficient. This option allows to set more
keys to be used for trial decryption. Although any valid user-id
specification may be used for @var{name} it makes sense to use at least
the long keyid to avoid ambiguities. Note that gpg-agent might pop up a
pinentry for a lot keys to do the trial decryption. If you want to stop
all further trial decryption you may use close-window button instead of
the cancel button.
@item --try-all-secrets
@opindex try-all-secrets
Don't look at the key ID as stored in the message but try all secret
keys in turn to find the right decryption key. This option forces the
behaviour as used by anonymous recipients (created by using
@option{--throw-keyids} or @option{--hidden-recipient}) and might come
handy in case where an encrypted message contains a bogus key ID.
@item --skip-hidden-recipients
@itemx --no-skip-hidden-recipients
@opindex skip-hidden-recipients
@opindex no-skip-hidden-recipients
During decryption skip all anonymous recipients. This option helps in
the case that people use the hidden recipients feature to hide there
own encrypt-to key from others. If oneself has many secret keys this
may lead to a major annoyance because all keys are tried in turn to
decrypt something which was not really intended for it. The drawback
of this option is that it is currently not possible to decrypt a
message which includes real anonymous recipients.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c ******** INPUT AND OUTPUT ***************
@c *******************************************
@node GPG Input and Output
@subsection Input and Output
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --armor
@itemx -a
@opindex armor
Create ASCII armored output. The default is to create the binary
OpenPGP format.
@item --no-armor
@opindex no-armor
Assume the input data is not in ASCII armored format.
@item --output @var{file}
@itemx -o @var{file}
@opindex output
Write output to @var{file}.
@item --max-output @code{n}
@opindex max-output
This option sets a limit on the number of bytes that will be generated
when processing a file. Since OpenPGP supports various levels of
compression, it is possible that the plaintext of a given message may be
significantly larger than the original OpenPGP message. While GnuPG
works properly with such messages, there is often a desire to set a
maximum file size that will be generated before processing is forced to
stop by the OS limits. Defaults to 0, which means "no limit".
@item --import-options @code{parameters}
@opindex import-options
This is a space or comma delimited string that gives options for
importing keys. Options can be prepended with a `no-' to give the
opposite meaning. The options are:
@table @asis
@item import-local-sigs
Allow importing key signatures marked as "local". This is not
generally useful unless a shared keyring scheme is being used.
Defaults to no.
@item keep-ownertrust
Normally possible still existing ownertrust values of a key are
cleared if a key is imported. This is in general desirable so that
a formerly deleted key does not automatically gain an ownertrust
values merely due to import. On the other hand it is sometimes
necessary to re-import a trusted set of keys again but keeping
already assigned ownertrust values. This can be achived by using
this option.
@item repair-pks-subkey-bug
During import, attempt to repair the damage caused by the PKS keyserver
bug (pre version 0.9.6) that mangles keys with multiple subkeys. Note
that this cannot completely repair the damaged key as some crucial data
is removed by the keyserver, but it does at least give you back one
subkey. Defaults to no for regular @option{--import} and to yes for
keyserver @option{--recv-keys}.
@item merge-only
During import, allow key updates to existing keys, but do not allow
any new keys to be imported. Defaults to no.
@item import-clean
After import, compact (remove all signatures except the
self-signature) any user IDs from the new key that are not usable.
Then, remove any signatures from the new key that are not usable.
This includes signatures that were issued by keys that are not present
on the keyring. This option is the same as running the @option{--edit-key}
command "clean" after import. Defaults to no.
@item import-minimal
Import the smallest key possible. This removes all signatures except
the most recent self-signature on each user ID. This option is the
same as running the @option{--edit-key} command "minimize" after import.
Defaults to no.
@end table
@item --export-options @code{parameters}
@opindex export-options
This is a space or comma delimited string that gives options for
exporting keys. Options can be prepended with a `no-' to give the
opposite meaning. The options are:
@table @asis
@item export-local-sigs
Allow exporting key signatures marked as "local". This is not
generally useful unless a shared keyring scheme is being used.
Defaults to no.
@item export-attributes
Include attribute user IDs (photo IDs) while exporting. This is
useful to export keys if they are going to be used by an OpenPGP
program that does not accept attribute user IDs. Defaults to yes.
@item export-sensitive-revkeys
Include designated revoker information that was marked as
"sensitive". Defaults to no.
@c Since GnuPG 2.1 gpg-agent manages the secret key and thus the
@c export-reset-subkey-passwd hack is not anymore justified. Such use
@c cases may be implemented using a specialized secret key export
@c tool.
@c @item export-reset-subkey-passwd
@c When using the @option{--export-secret-subkeys} command, this option resets
@c the passphrases for all exported subkeys to empty. This is useful
@c when the exported subkey is to be used on an unattended machine where
@c a passphrase doesn't necessarily make sense. Defaults to no.
@item export-clean
Compact (remove all signatures from) user IDs on the key being
exported if the user IDs are not usable. Also, do not export any
signatures that are not usable. This includes signatures that were
issued by keys that are not present on the keyring. This option is
the same as running the @option{--edit-key} command "clean" before export
except that the local copy of the key is not modified. Defaults to
no.
@item export-minimal
Export the smallest key possible. This removes all signatures except the
most recent self-signature on each user ID. This option is the same as
running the @option{--edit-key} command "minimize" before export except
that the local copy of the key is not modified. Defaults to no.
@end table
@item --with-colons
@opindex with-colons
Print key listings delimited by colons. Note that the output will be
encoded in UTF-8 regardless of any @option{--display-charset} setting. This
format is useful when GnuPG is called from scripts and other programs
as it is easily machine parsed. The details of this format are
documented in the file @file{doc/DETAILS}, which is included in the GnuPG
source distribution.
@item --print-pka-records
@opindex print-pka-records
Modify the output of the list commands to print PKA records suitable
to put into DNS zone files. An ORIGIN line is printed before each
record to allow diverting the records to the corresponding zone file.
@item --fixed-list-mode
@opindex fixed-list-mode
Do not merge primary user ID and primary key in @option{--with-colon}
listing mode and print all timestamps as seconds since 1970-01-01.
Since GnuPG 2.0.10, this mode is always used and thus this option is
obsolete; it does not harm to use it though.
@item --legacy-list-mode
@opindex legacy-list-mode
Revert to the pre-2.1 public key list mode. This only affects the
human readable output and not the machine interface
(i.e. @code{--with-colons}). Note that the legacy format does not
allow to convey suitable information for elliptic curves.
@item --with-fingerprint
@opindex with-fingerprint
Same as the command @option{--fingerprint} but changes only the format
of the output and may be used together with another command.
@item --with-icao-spelling
@opindex with-icao-spelling
Print the ICAO spelling of the fingerprint in addition to the hex digits.
@item --with-keygrip
@opindex with-keygrip
Include the keygrip in the key listings.
@item --with-secret
@opindex with-secret
Include info about the presence of a secret key in public key listings
done with @code{--with-colons}.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c ******** OPENPGP OPTIONS ****************
@c *******************************************
@node OpenPGP Options
@subsection OpenPGP protocol specific options.
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item -t, --textmode
@itemx --no-textmode
@opindex textmode
Treat input files as text and store them in the OpenPGP canonical text
form with standard "CRLF" line endings. This also sets the necessary
flags to inform the recipient that the encrypted or signed data is text
and may need its line endings converted back to whatever the local
system uses. This option is useful when communicating between two
platforms that have different line ending conventions (UNIX-like to Mac,
Mac to Windows, etc). @option{--no-textmode} disables this option, and
is the default.
@item --force-v3-sigs
@itemx --no-force-v3-sigs
@item --force-v4-certs
@itemx --no-force-v4-certs
These options are obsolete and have no effect since GnuPG 2.1.
@item --force-mdc
@opindex force-mdc
Force the use of encryption with a modification detection code. This
is always used with the newer ciphers (those with a blocksize greater
than 64 bits), or if all of the recipient keys indicate MDC support in
their feature flags.
@item --disable-mdc
@opindex disable-mdc
Disable the use of the modification detection code. Note that by
using this option, the encrypted message becomes vulnerable to a
message modification attack.
@item --personal-cipher-preferences @code{string}
@opindex personal-cipher-preferences
Set the list of personal cipher preferences to @code{string}. Use
@command{@gpgname --version} to get a list of available algorithms,
and use @code{none} to set no preference at all. This allows the user
to safely override the algorithm chosen by the recipient key
preferences, as GPG will only select an algorithm that is usable by
all recipients. The most highly ranked cipher in this list is also
used for the @option{--symmetric} encryption command.
@item --personal-digest-preferences @code{string}
@opindex personal-digest-preferences
Set the list of personal digest preferences to @code{string}. Use
@command{@gpgname --version} to get a list of available algorithms,
and use @code{none} to set no preference at all. This allows the user
to safely override the algorithm chosen by the recipient key
preferences, as GPG will only select an algorithm that is usable by
all recipients. The most highly ranked digest algorithm in this list
is also used when signing without encryption
(e.g. @option{--clearsign} or @option{--sign}).
@item --personal-compress-preferences @code{string}
@opindex personal-compress-preferences
Set the list of personal compression preferences to @code{string}.
Use @command{@gpgname --version} to get a list of available
algorithms, and use @code{none} to set no preference at all. This
allows the user to safely override the algorithm chosen by the
recipient key preferences, as GPG will only select an algorithm that
is usable by all recipients. The most highly ranked compression
algorithm in this list is also used when there are no recipient keys
to consider (e.g. @option{--symmetric}).
@item --s2k-cipher-algo @code{name}
@opindex s2k-cipher-algo
Use @code{name} as the cipher algorithm used to protect secret keys.
-The default cipher is @value{DEFSYMENCALGO}. This cipher is also used
+The default cipher is @value{GPGSYMENCALGO}. This cipher is also used
for symmetric encryption with a passphrase if
@option{--personal-cipher-preferences} and @option{--cipher-algo} is
not given.
@item --s2k-digest-algo @code{name}
@opindex s2k-digest-algo
Use @code{name} as the digest algorithm used to mangle the passphrases.
The default algorithm is SHA-1.
@item --s2k-mode @code{n}
@opindex s2k-mode
Selects how passphrases are mangled. If @code{n} is 0 a plain
passphrase (which is not recommended) will be used, a 1 adds a salt to
the passphrase and a 3 (the default) iterates the whole process a
number of times (see --s2k-count). Unless @option{--rfc1991} is used,
this mode is also used for symmetric encryption with a passphrase.
@item --s2k-count @code{n}
@opindex s2k-count
Specify how many times the passphrase mangling is repeated. This
value may range between 1024 and 65011712 inclusive. The default is
inquired from gpg-agent. Note that not all values in the
1024-65011712 range are legal and if an illegal value is selected,
GnuPG will round up to the nearest legal value. This option is only
meaningful if @option{--s2k-mode} is 3.
@end table
@c ***************************
@c ******* Compliance ********
@c ***************************
@node Compliance Options
@subsection Compliance options
These options control what GnuPG is compliant to. Only one of these
options may be active at a time. Note that the default setting of
this is nearly always the correct one. See the INTEROPERABILITY WITH
OTHER OPENPGP PROGRAMS section below before using one of these
options.
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --gnupg
@opindex gnupg
Use standard GnuPG behavior. This is essentially OpenPGP behavior
(see @option{--openpgp}), but with some additional workarounds for common
compatibility problems in different versions of PGP. This is the
default option, so it is not generally needed, but it may be useful to
override a different compliance option in the gpg.conf file.
@item --openpgp
@opindex openpgp
Reset all packet, cipher and digest options to strict OpenPGP
behavior. Use this option to reset all previous options like
@option{--s2k-*}, @option{--cipher-algo}, @option{--digest-algo} and
@option{--compress-algo} to OpenPGP compliant values. All PGP
workarounds are disabled.
@item --rfc4880
@opindex rfc4880
Reset all packet, cipher and digest options to strict RFC-4880
behavior. Note that this is currently the same thing as
@option{--openpgp}.
@item --rfc2440
@opindex rfc2440
Reset all packet, cipher and digest options to strict RFC-2440
behavior.
@ifclear gpgtowone
@item --rfc1991
@opindex rfc1991
Try to be more RFC-1991 (PGP 2.x) compliant. This option is
deprecated will be removed in GnuPG 2.1.
@item --pgp2
@opindex pgp2
Set up all options to be as PGP 2.x compliant as possible, and warn if
an action is taken (e.g. encrypting to a non-RSA key) that will create
a message that PGP 2.x will not be able to handle. Note that `PGP
2.x' here means `MIT PGP 2.6.2'. There are other versions of PGP 2.x
available, but the MIT release is a good common baseline.
This option implies
@option{--rfc1991 --disable-mdc --no-force-v4-certs
--escape-from-lines --force-v3-sigs --allow-weak-digest-algos
--cipher-algo IDEA --digest-algo MD5 --compress-algo ZIP}.
It also disables @option{--textmode} when encrypting.
This option is deprecated will be removed in GnuPG 2.1. The reason
for dropping PGP-2 support is that the PGP 2 format is not anymore
considered safe (for example due to the use of the broken MD5 algorithm).
Note that the decryption of PGP-2 created messages will continue to work.
@end ifclear
@item --pgp6
@opindex pgp6
Set up all options to be as PGP 6 compliant as possible. This
restricts you to the ciphers IDEA (if the IDEA plugin is installed),
3DES, and CAST5, the hashes MD5, SHA1 and RIPEMD160, and the
compression algorithms none and ZIP. This also disables
--throw-keyids, and making signatures with signing subkeys as PGP 6
does not understand signatures made by signing subkeys.
This option implies @option{--disable-mdc --escape-from-lines}.
@item --pgp7
@opindex pgp7
Set up all options to be as PGP 7 compliant as possible. This is
identical to @option{--pgp6} except that MDCs are not disabled, and the
list of allowable ciphers is expanded to add AES128, AES192, AES256, and
TWOFISH.
@item --pgp8
@opindex pgp8
Set up all options to be as PGP 8 compliant as possible. PGP 8 is a lot
closer to the OpenPGP standard than previous versions of PGP, so all
this does is disable @option{--throw-keyids} and set
@option{--escape-from-lines}. All algorithms are allowed except for the
SHA224, SHA384, and SHA512 digests.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c ******** ESOTERIC OPTIONS ***************
@c *******************************************
@node GPG Esoteric Options
@subsection Doing things one usually doesn't want to do.
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item -n
@itemx --dry-run
@opindex dry-run
Don't make any changes (this is not completely implemented).
@item --list-only
@opindex list-only
Changes the behaviour of some commands. This is like @option{--dry-run} but
different in some cases. The semantic of this command may be extended in
the future. Currently it only skips the actual decryption pass and
therefore enables a fast listing of the encryption keys.
@item -i
@itemx --interactive
@opindex interactive
Prompt before overwriting any files.
@item --debug-level @var{level}
@opindex debug-level
Select the debug level for investigating problems. @var{level} may be
a numeric value or by a keyword:
@table @code
@item none
No debugging at all. A value of less than 1 may be used instead of
the keyword.
@item basic
Some basic debug messages. A value between 1 and 2 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item advanced
More verbose debug messages. A value between 3 and 5 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item expert
Even more detailed messages. A value between 6 and 8 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item guru
All of the debug messages you can get. A value greater than 8 may be
used instead of the keyword. The creation of hash tracing files is
only enabled if the keyword is used.
@end table
How these messages are mapped to the actual debugging flags is not
specified and may change with newer releases of this program. They are
however carefully selected to best aid in debugging.
@item --debug @var{flags}
@opindex debug
Set debugging flags. All flags are or-ed and @var{flags} may
be given in C syntax (e.g. 0x0042).
@item --debug-all
@opindex debug-all
Set all useful debugging flags.
@item --debug-iolbf
@opindex debug-iolbf
Set stdout into line buffered mode. This option is only honored when
given on the command line.
@item --faked-system-time @var{epoch}
@opindex faked-system-time
This option is only useful for testing; it sets the system time back or
forth to @var{epoch} which is the number of seconds elapsed since the year
1970. Alternatively @var{epoch} may be given as a full ISO time string
(e.g. "20070924T154812").
@item --enable-progress-filter
@opindex enable-progress-filter
Enable certain PROGRESS status outputs. This option allows frontends
to display a progress indicator while gpg is processing larger files.
There is a slight performance overhead using it.
@item --status-fd @code{n}
@opindex status-fd
Write special status strings to the file descriptor @code{n}.
See the file DETAILS in the documentation for a listing of them.
@item --status-file @code{file}
@opindex status-file
Same as @option{--status-fd}, except the status data is written to file
@code{file}.
@item --logger-fd @code{n}
@opindex logger-fd
Write log output to file descriptor @code{n} and not to STDERR.
@item --log-file @code{file}
@itemx --logger-file @code{file}
@opindex log-file
Same as @option{--logger-fd}, except the logger data is written to file
@code{file}. Note that @option{--log-file} is only implemented for
GnuPG-2.
@item --attribute-fd @code{n}
@opindex attribute-fd
Write attribute subpackets to the file descriptor @code{n}. This is most
useful for use with @option{--status-fd}, since the status messages are
needed to separate out the various subpackets from the stream delivered
to the file descriptor.
@item --attribute-file @code{file}
@opindex attribute-file
Same as @option{--attribute-fd}, except the attribute data is written to
file @code{file}.
@item --comment @code{string}
@itemx --no-comments
@opindex comment
Use @code{string} as a comment string in clear text signatures and ASCII
armored messages or keys (see @option{--armor}). The default behavior is
not to use a comment string. @option{--comment} may be repeated multiple
times to get multiple comment strings. @option{--no-comments} removes
all comments. It is a good idea to keep the length of a single comment
below 60 characters to avoid problems with mail programs wrapping such
lines. Note that comment lines, like all other header lines, are not
protected by the signature.
@item --emit-version
@itemx --no-emit-version
@opindex emit-version
Force inclusion of the version string in ASCII armored output. If
given once only the name of the program and the major number is
emitted (default), given twice the minor is also emitted, given triple
the micro is added, and given quad an operating system identification
is also emitted. @option{--no-emit-version} disables the version
line.
@item --sig-notation @code{name=value}
@itemx --cert-notation @code{name=value}
@itemx -N, --set-notation @code{name=value}
@opindex sig-notation
@opindex cert-notation
@opindex set-notation
Put the name value pair into the signature as notation data.
@code{name} must consist only of printable characters or spaces, and
must contain a '@@' character in the form keyname@@domain.example.com
(substituting the appropriate keyname and domain name, of course). This
is to help prevent pollution of the IETF reserved notation
namespace. The @option{--expert} flag overrides the '@@'
check. @code{value} may be any printable string; it will be encoded in
UTF8, so you should check that your @option{--display-charset} is set
correctly. If you prefix @code{name} with an exclamation mark (!), the
notation data will be flagged as critical
(rfc4880:5.2.3.16). @option{--sig-notation} sets a notation for data
signatures. @option{--cert-notation} sets a notation for key signatures
(certifications). @option{--set-notation} sets both.
There are special codes that may be used in notation names. "%k" will
be expanded into the key ID of the key being signed, "%K" into the
long key ID of the key being signed, "%f" into the fingerprint of the
key being signed, "%s" into the key ID of the key making the
signature, "%S" into the long key ID of the key making the signature,
"%g" into the fingerprint of the key making the signature (which might
be a subkey), "%p" into the fingerprint of the primary key of the key
making the signature, "%c" into the signature count from the OpenPGP
smartcard, and "%%" results in a single "%". %k, %K, and %f are only
meaningful when making a key signature (certification), and %c is only
meaningful when using the OpenPGP smartcard.
@item --sig-policy-url @code{string}
@itemx --cert-policy-url @code{string}
@itemx --set-policy-url @code{string}
@opindex sig-policy-url
@opindex cert-policy-url
@opindex set-policy-url
Use @code{string} as a Policy URL for signatures (rfc4880:5.2.3.20). If
you prefix it with an exclamation mark (!), the policy URL packet will
be flagged as critical. @option{--sig-policy-url} sets a policy url for
data signatures. @option{--cert-policy-url} sets a policy url for key
signatures (certifications). @option{--set-policy-url} sets both.
The same %-expandos used for notation data are available here as well.
@item --sig-keyserver-url @code{string}
@opindex sig-keyserver-url
Use @code{string} as a preferred keyserver URL for data signatures. If
you prefix it with an exclamation mark (!), the keyserver URL packet
will be flagged as critical.
The same %-expandos used for notation data are available here as well.
@item --set-filename @code{string}
@opindex set-filename
Use @code{string} as the filename which is stored inside messages.
This overrides the default, which is to use the actual filename of the
file being encrypted.
@item --for-your-eyes-only
@itemx --no-for-your-eyes-only
@opindex for-your-eyes-only
Set the `for your eyes only' flag in the message. This causes GnuPG to
refuse to save the file unless the @option{--output} option is given,
and PGP to use a "secure viewer" with a claimed Tempest-resistant font
to display the message. This option overrides @option{--set-filename}.
@option{--no-for-your-eyes-only} disables this option.
@item --use-embedded-filename
@itemx --no-use-embedded-filename
@opindex use-embedded-filename
Try to create a file with a name as embedded in the data. This can be
a dangerous option as it allows to overwrite files. Defaults to no.
@item --cipher-algo @code{name}
@opindex cipher-algo
Use @code{name} as cipher algorithm. Running the program with the
command @option{--version} yields a list of supported algorithms. If
this is not used the cipher algorithm is selected from the preferences
stored with the key. In general, you do not want to use this option as
it allows you to violate the OpenPGP standard.
@option{--personal-cipher-preferences} is the safe way to accomplish the
same thing.
@item --digest-algo @code{name}
@opindex digest-algo
Use @code{name} as the message digest algorithm. Running the program
with the command @option{--version} yields a list of supported algorithms. In
general, you do not want to use this option as it allows you to
violate the OpenPGP standard. @option{--personal-digest-preferences} is the
safe way to accomplish the same thing.
@item --compress-algo @code{name}
@opindex compress-algo
Use compression algorithm @code{name}. "zlib" is RFC-1950 ZLIB
compression. "zip" is RFC-1951 ZIP compression which is used by PGP.
"bzip2" is a more modern compression scheme that can compress some
things better than zip or zlib, but at the cost of more memory used
during compression and decompression. "uncompressed" or "none"
disables compression. If this option is not used, the default
behavior is to examine the recipient key preferences to see which
algorithms the recipient supports. If all else fails, ZIP is used for
maximum compatibility.
ZLIB may give better compression results than ZIP, as the compression
window size is not limited to 8k. BZIP2 may give even better
compression results than that, but will use a significantly larger
amount of memory while compressing and decompressing. This may be
significant in low memory situations. Note, however, that PGP (all
versions) only supports ZIP compression. Using any algorithm other
than ZIP or "none" will make the message unreadable with PGP. In
general, you do not want to use this option as it allows you to
violate the OpenPGP standard. @option{--personal-compress-preferences} is the
safe way to accomplish the same thing.
@item --cert-digest-algo @code{name}
@opindex cert-digest-algo
Use @code{name} as the message digest algorithm used when signing a
key. Running the program with the command @option{--version} yields a
list of supported algorithms. Be aware that if you choose an algorithm
that GnuPG supports but other OpenPGP implementations do not, then some
users will not be able to use the key signatures you make, or quite
possibly your entire key.
@item --disable-cipher-algo @code{name}
@opindex disable-cipher-algo
Never allow the use of @code{name} as cipher algorithm.
The given name will not be checked so that a later loaded algorithm
will still get disabled.
@item --disable-pubkey-algo @code{name}
@opindex disable-pubkey-algo
Never allow the use of @code{name} as public key algorithm.
The given name will not be checked so that a later loaded algorithm
will still get disabled.
@item --throw-keyids
@itemx --no-throw-keyids
@opindex throw-keyids
Do not put the recipient key IDs into encrypted messages. This helps to
hide the receivers of the message and is a limited countermeasure
against traffic analysis.@footnote{Using a little social engineering
anyone who is able to decrypt the message can check whether one of the
other recipients is the one he suspects.} On the receiving side, it may
slow down the decryption process because all available secret keys must
be tried. @option{--no-throw-keyids} disables this option. This option
is essentially the same as using @option{--hidden-recipient} for all
recipients.
@item --not-dash-escaped
@opindex not-dash-escaped
This option changes the behavior of cleartext signatures
so that they can be used for patch files. You should not
send such an armored file via email because all spaces
and line endings are hashed too. You can not use this
option for data which has 5 dashes at the beginning of a
line, patch files don't have this. A special armor header
line tells GnuPG about this cleartext signature option.
@item --escape-from-lines
@itemx --no-escape-from-lines
@opindex escape-from-lines
Because some mailers change lines starting with "From " to ">From " it
is good to handle such lines in a special way when creating cleartext
signatures to prevent the mail system from breaking the signature. Note
that all other PGP versions do it this way too. Enabled by
default. @option{--no-escape-from-lines} disables this option.
@item --passphrase-repeat @code{n}
@opindex passphrase-repeat
Specify how many times @command{@gpgname} will request a new
passphrase be repeated. This is useful for helping memorize a
passphrase. Defaults to 1 repetition.
@item --passphrase-fd @code{n}
@opindex passphrase-fd
Read the passphrase from file descriptor @code{n}. Only the first line
will be read from file descriptor @code{n}. If you use 0 for @code{n},
the passphrase will be read from STDIN. This can only be used if only
one passphrase is supplied.
Note that this passphrase is only used if the option @option{--batch}
has also been given. This is different from GnuPG version 1.x.
@item --passphrase-file @code{file}
@opindex passphrase-file
Read the passphrase from file @code{file}. Only the first line will
be read from file @code{file}. This can only be used if only one
passphrase is supplied. Obviously, a passphrase stored in a file is
of questionable security if other users can read this file. Don't use
this option if you can avoid it.
Note that this passphrase is only used if the option @option{--batch}
has also been given. This is different from GnuPG version 1.x.
@item --passphrase @code{string}
@opindex passphrase
Use @code{string} as the passphrase. This can only be used if only one
passphrase is supplied. Obviously, this is of very questionable
security on a multi-user system. Don't use this option if you can
avoid it.
Note that this passphrase is only used if the option @option{--batch}
has also been given. This is different from GnuPG version 1.x.
@item --pinentry-mode @code{mode}
@opindex pinentry-mode
Set the pinentry mode to @code{mode}. Allowed values for @code{mode}
are:
@table @asis
@item default
Use the default of the agent, which is @code{ask}.
@item ask
Force the use of the Pinentry.
@item cancel
Emulate use of Pinentry's cancel button.
@item error
Return a Pinentry error (``No Pinentry'').
@item loopback
Redirect Pinentry queries to the caller. Note that in contrast to
Pinentry the user is not prompted again if he enters a bad password.
@end table
@item --command-fd @code{n}
@opindex command-fd
This is a replacement for the deprecated shared-memory IPC mode.
If this option is enabled, user input on questions is not expected
from the TTY but from the given file descriptor. It should be used
together with @option{--status-fd}. See the file doc/DETAILS in the source
distribution for details on how to use it.
@item --command-file @code{file}
@opindex command-file
Same as @option{--command-fd}, except the commands are read out of file
@code{file}
@item --allow-non-selfsigned-uid
@itemx --no-allow-non-selfsigned-uid
@opindex allow-non-selfsigned-uid
Allow the import and use of keys with user IDs which are not
self-signed. This is not recommended, as a non self-signed user ID is
trivial to forge. @option{--no-allow-non-selfsigned-uid} disables.
@item --allow-freeform-uid
@opindex allow-freeform-uid
Disable all checks on the form of the user ID while generating a new
one. This option should only be used in very special environments as
it does not ensure the de-facto standard format of user IDs.
@item --ignore-time-conflict
@opindex ignore-time-conflict
GnuPG normally checks that the timestamps associated with keys and
signatures have plausible values. However, sometimes a signature
seems to be older than the key due to clock problems. This option
makes these checks just a warning. See also @option{--ignore-valid-from} for
timestamp issues on subkeys.
@item --ignore-valid-from
@opindex ignore-valid-from
GnuPG normally does not select and use subkeys created in the future.
This option allows the use of such keys and thus exhibits the
pre-1.0.7 behaviour. You should not use this option unless there
is some clock problem. See also @option{--ignore-time-conflict} for timestamp
issues with signatures.
@item --ignore-crc-error
@opindex ignore-crc-error
The ASCII armor used by OpenPGP is protected by a CRC checksum against
transmission errors. Occasionally the CRC gets mangled somewhere on
the transmission channel but the actual content (which is protected by
the OpenPGP protocol anyway) is still okay. This option allows GnuPG
to ignore CRC errors.
@item --ignore-mdc-error
@opindex ignore-mdc-error
This option changes a MDC integrity protection failure into a warning.
This can be useful if a message is partially corrupt, but it is
necessary to get as much data as possible out of the corrupt message.
However, be aware that a MDC protection failure may also mean that the
message was tampered with intentionally by an attacker.
@item --allow-weak-digest-algos
@opindex allow-weak-digest-algos
Signatures made with the broken MD5 algorithm are normally rejected
with an ``invalid digest algorithm'' message. This option allows the
verification of signatures made with such weak algorithms.
@item --no-default-keyring
@opindex no-default-keyring
Do not add the default keyrings to the list of keyrings. Note that
GnuPG will not operate without any keyrings, so if you use this option
and do not provide alternate keyrings via @option{--keyring} or
@option{--secret-keyring}, then GnuPG will still use the default public or
secret keyrings.
@item --skip-verify
@opindex skip-verify
Skip the signature verification step. This may be
used to make the decryption faster if the signature
verification is not needed.
@item --with-key-data
@opindex with-key-data
Print key listings delimited by colons (like @option{--with-colons}) and
print the public key data.
@item --fast-list-mode
@opindex fast-list-mode
Changes the output of the list commands to work faster; this is achieved
by leaving some parts empty. Some applications don't need the user ID
and the trust information given in the listings. By using this options
they can get a faster listing. The exact behaviour of this option may
change in future versions. If you are missing some information, don't
use this option.
@item --no-literal
@opindex no-literal
This is not for normal use. Use the source to see for what it might be useful.
@item --set-filesize
@opindex set-filesize
This is not for normal use. Use the source to see for what it might be useful.
@item --show-session-key
@opindex show-session-key
Display the session key used for one message. See
@option{--override-session-key} for the counterpart of this option.
We think that Key Escrow is a Bad Thing; however the user should have
the freedom to decide whether to go to prison or to reveal the content
of one specific message without compromising all messages ever
encrypted for one secret key.
You can also use this option if you receive an encrypted message which
is abusive or offensive, to prove to the administrators of the
messaging system that the ciphertext transmitted corresponds to an
inappropriate plaintext so they can take action against the offending
user.
@item --override-session-key @code{string}
@opindex override-session-key
Don't use the public key but the session key @code{string}. The format
of this string is the same as the one printed by
@option{--show-session-key}. This option is normally not used but comes
handy in case someone forces you to reveal the content of an encrypted
message; using this option you can do this without handing out the
secret key.
@item --ask-sig-expire
@itemx --no-ask-sig-expire
@opindex ask-sig-expire
When making a data signature, prompt for an expiration time. If this
option is not specified, the expiration time set via
@option{--default-sig-expire} is used. @option{--no-ask-sig-expire}
disables this option.
@item --default-sig-expire
@opindex default-sig-expire
The default expiration time to use for signature expiration. Valid
values are "0" for no expiration, a number followed by the letter d
(for days), w (for weeks), m (for months), or y (for years) (for
example "2m" for two months, or "5y" for five years), or an absolute
date in the form YYYY-MM-DD. Defaults to "0".
@item --ask-cert-expire
@itemx --no-ask-cert-expire
@opindex ask-cert-expire
When making a key signature, prompt for an expiration time. If this
option is not specified, the expiration time set via
@option{--default-cert-expire} is used. @option{--no-ask-cert-expire}
disables this option.
@item --default-cert-expire
@opindex default-cert-expire
The default expiration time to use for key signature expiration.
Valid values are "0" for no expiration, a number followed by the
letter d (for days), w (for weeks), m (for months), or y (for years)
(for example "2m" for two months, or "5y" for five years), or an
absolute date in the form YYYY-MM-DD. Defaults to "0".
@item --allow-secret-key-import
@opindex allow-secret-key-import
This is an obsolete option and is not used anywhere.
@item --allow-multiple-messages
@item --no-allow-multiple-messages
@opindex allow-multiple-messages
Allow processing of multiple OpenPGP messages contained in a single file
or stream. Some programs that call GPG are not prepared to deal with
multiple messages being processed together, so this option defaults to
no. Note that versions of GPG prior to 1.4.7 always allowed multiple
messages.
Warning: Do not use this option unless you need it as a temporary
workaround!
@item --enable-special-filenames
@opindex enable-special-filenames
This options enables a mode in which filenames of the form
@file{-&n}, where n is a non-negative decimal number,
refer to the file descriptor n and not to a file with that name.
@item --no-expensive-trust-checks
@opindex no-expensive-trust-checks
Experimental use only.
@item --preserve-permissions
@opindex preserve-permissions
Don't change the permissions of a secret keyring back to user
read/write only. Use this option only if you really know what you are doing.
@item --default-preference-list @code{string}
@opindex default-preference-list
Set the list of default preferences to @code{string}. This preference
list is used for new keys and becomes the default for "setpref" in the
edit menu.
@item --default-keyserver-url @code{name}
@opindex default-keyserver-url
Set the default keyserver URL to @code{name}. This keyserver will be
used as the keyserver URL when writing a new self-signature on a key,
which includes key generation and changing preferences.
@item --list-config
@opindex list-config
Display various internal configuration parameters of GnuPG. This option
is intended for external programs that call GnuPG to perform tasks, and
is thus not generally useful. See the file @file{doc/DETAILS} in the
source distribution for the details of which configuration items may be
listed. @option{--list-config} is only usable with
@option{--with-colons} set.
@item --list-gcrypt-config
@opindex list-gcrypt-config
Display various internal configuration parameters of Libgcrypt.
@item --gpgconf-list
@opindex gpgconf-list
This command is similar to @option{--list-config} but in general only
internally used by the @command{gpgconf} tool.
@item --gpgconf-test
@opindex gpgconf-test
This is more or less dummy action. However it parses the configuration
file and returns with failure if the configuration file would prevent
@command{gpg} from startup. Thus it may be used to run a syntax check
on the configuration file.
@end table
@c *******************************
@c ******* Deprecated ************
@c *******************************
@node Deprecated Options
@subsection Deprecated options
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --show-photos
@itemx --no-show-photos
@opindex show-photos
Causes @option{--list-keys}, @option{--list-sigs},
@option{--list-public-keys}, @option{--list-secret-keys}, and verifying
a signature to also display the photo ID attached to the key, if
any. See also @option{--photo-viewer}. These options are deprecated. Use
@option{--list-options [no-]show-photos} and/or @option{--verify-options
[no-]show-photos} instead.
@item --show-keyring
@opindex show-keyring
Display the keyring name at the head of key listings to show which
keyring a given key resides on. This option is deprecated: use
@option{--list-options [no-]show-keyring} instead.
@item --always-trust
@opindex always-trust
Identical to @option{--trust-model always}. This option is deprecated.
@item --show-notation
@itemx --no-show-notation
@opindex show-notation
Show signature notations in the @option{--list-sigs} or @option{--check-sigs} listings
as well as when verifying a signature with a notation in it. These
options are deprecated. Use @option{--list-options [no-]show-notation}
and/or @option{--verify-options [no-]show-notation} instead.
@item --show-policy-url
@itemx --no-show-policy-url
@opindex show-policy-url
Show policy URLs in the @option{--list-sigs} or @option{--check-sigs}
listings as well as when verifying a signature with a policy URL in
it. These options are deprecated. Use @option{--list-options
[no-]show-policy-url} and/or @option{--verify-options
[no-]show-policy-url} instead.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c *************** ****************
@c *************** FILES ****************
@c *************** ****************
@c *******************************************
@mansect files
@node GPG Configuration
@section Configuration files
There are a few configuration files to control certain aspects of
@command{@gpgname}'s operation. Unless noted, they are expected in the
current home directory (@pxref{option --homedir}).
@table @file
@item gpg.conf
@cindex gpg.conf
This is the standard configuration file read by @command{@gpgname} on
startup. It may contain any valid long option; the leading two dashes
may not be entered and the option may not be abbreviated. This default
name may be changed on the command line (@pxref{gpg-option --options}).
You should backup this file.
@end table
@c man:.RE
Note that on larger installations, it is useful to put predefined files
-into the directory @file{/etc/skel/.gnupg/} so that newly created users
-start up with a working configuration.
+into the directory @file{@value{SYSCONFSKELDIR}} so that
+newly created users start up with a working configuration.
For existing users a small
helper script is provided to create these files (@pxref{addgnupghome}).
For internal purposes @command{@gpgname} creates and maintains a few other
files; They all live in in the current home directory (@pxref{option
--homedir}). Only the @command{@gpgname} may modify these files.
@table @file
@item ~/.gnupg/pubring.gpg
The public keyring. You should backup this file.
@item ~/.gnupg/pubring.gpg.lock
The lock file for the public keyring.
@item ~/.gnupg/pubring.kbx
The public keyring using a different format. This file is sharred
with @command{gpgsm}. You should backup this file.
@item ~/.gnupg/pubring.kbx.lock
The lock file for @file{pubring.kbx}.
@item ~/.gnupg/secring.gpg
A secret keyring as used by GnuPG versions before 2.1. It is not
used by GnuPG 2.1 and later.
@item ~/.gnupg/.gpg-v21-migrated
File indicating that a migration to GnuPG 2.1 has been done.
@item ~/.gnupg/trustdb.gpg
The trust database. There is no need to backup this file; it is better
to backup the ownertrust values (@pxref{option --export-ownertrust}).
@item ~/.gnupg/trustdb.gpg.lock
The lock file for the trust database.
@item ~/.gnupg/random_seed
A file used to preserve the state of the internal random pool.
@item ~/.gnupg/secring.gpg.lock
The lock file for the secret keyring.
@item ~/.gnupg/openpgp-revocs.d/
This is the directory where gpg stores pre-generated revocation
certificates. The file name corresponds to the OpenPGP fingerprint of
the respective key. It is suggested to backup those certificates and
if the primary private key is not stored on the disk to move them to
an external storage device. Anyone who can access theses files is
able to revoke the corresponding key. You may want to print them out.
You should backup all files in this directory and take care to keep
this backup closed away.
- @item /usr[/local]/share/gnupg/options.skel
+ @item @value{DATADIR}/options.skel
The skeleton options file.
- @item /usr[/local]/lib/gnupg/
+ @item @value{LIBDIR}/
Default location for extensions.
@end table
@c man:.RE
Operation is further controlled by a few environment variables:
@table @asis
@item HOME
Used to locate the default home directory.
@item GNUPGHOME
If set directory used instead of "~/.gnupg".
@item GPG_AGENT_INFO
This variable was used by GnuPG versions before 2.1
@item PINENTRY_USER_DATA
This value is passed via gpg-agent to pinentry. It is useful to convey
extra information to a custom pinentry.
@item COLUMNS
@itemx LINES
Used to size some displays to the full size of the screen.
@item LANGUAGE
Apart from its use by GNU, it is used in the W32 version to override the
language selection done through the Registry. If used and set to a
valid and available language name (@var{langid}), the file with the
translation is loaded from
@code{@var{gpgdir}/gnupg.nls/@var{langid}.mo}. Here @var{gpgdir} is the
directory out of which the gpg binary has been loaded. If it can't be
loaded the Registry is tried and as last resort the native Windows
locale system is used.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c *************** ****************
@c *************** EXAMPLES ****************
@c *************** ****************
@c *******************************************
@mansect examples
@node GPG Examples
@section Examples
@table @asis
@item gpg -se -r @code{Bob} @code{file}
sign and encrypt for user Bob
@item gpg --clearsign @code{file}
make a clear text signature
@item gpg -sb @code{file}
make a detached signature
@item gpg -u 0x12345678 -sb @code{file}
make a detached signature with the key 0x12345678
@item gpg --list-keys @code{user_ID}
show keys
@item gpg --fingerprint @code{user_ID}
show fingerprint
@item gpg --verify @code{pgpfile}
@itemx gpg --verify @code{sigfile}
Verify the signature of the file but do not output the data. The
second form is used for detached signatures, where @code{sigfile}
is the detached signature (either ASCII armored or binary) and
are the signed data; if this is not given, the name of
the file holding the signed data is constructed by cutting off the
extension (".asc" or ".sig") of @code{sigfile} or by asking the
user for the filename.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c *************** ****************
@c *************** USER ID ****************
@c *************** ****************
@c *******************************************
@mansect how to specify a user id
@ifset isman
@include specify-user-id.texi
@end ifset
@mansect return value
@chapheading RETURN VALUE
The program returns 0 if everything was fine, 1 if at least
a signature was bad, and other error codes for fatal errors.
@mansect warnings
@chapheading WARNINGS
Use a *good* password for your user account and a *good* passphrase
to protect your secret key. This passphrase is the weakest part of the
whole system. Programs to do dictionary attacks on your secret keyring
are very easy to write and so you should protect your "~/.gnupg/"
directory very well.
Keep in mind that, if this program is used over a network (telnet), it
is *very* easy to spy out your passphrase!
If you are going to verify detached signatures, make sure that the
program knows about it; either give both filenames on the command line
or use @samp{-} to specify STDIN.
@mansect interoperability
@chapheading INTEROPERABILITY WITH OTHER OPENPGP PROGRAMS
GnuPG tries to be a very flexible implementation of the OpenPGP
standard. In particular, GnuPG implements many of the optional parts
of the standard, such as the SHA-512 hash, and the ZLIB and BZIP2
compression algorithms. It is important to be aware that not all
OpenPGP programs implement these optional algorithms and that by
forcing their use via the @option{--cipher-algo},
@option{--digest-algo}, @option{--cert-digest-algo}, or
@option{--compress-algo} options in GnuPG, it is possible to create a
perfectly valid OpenPGP message, but one that cannot be read by the
intended recipient.
There are dozens of variations of OpenPGP programs available, and each
supports a slightly different subset of these optional algorithms.
For example, until recently, no (unhacked) version of PGP supported
the BLOWFISH cipher algorithm. A message using BLOWFISH simply could
not be read by a PGP user. By default, GnuPG uses the standard
OpenPGP preferences system that will always do the right thing and
create messages that are usable by all recipients, regardless of which
OpenPGP program they use. Only override this safe default if you
really know what you are doing.
If you absolutely must override the safe default, or if the preferences
on a given key are invalid for some reason, you are far better off using
the @option{--pgp6}, @option{--pgp7}, or @option{--pgp8} options. These
options are safe as they do not force any particular algorithms in
violation of OpenPGP, but rather reduce the available algorithms to a
"PGP-safe" list.
@mansect bugs
@chapheading BUGS
On older systems this program should be installed as setuid(root). This
is necessary to lock memory pages. Locking memory pages prevents the
operating system from writing memory pages (which may contain
passphrases or other sensitive material) to disk. If you get no
warning message about insecure memory your operating system supports
locking without being root. The program drops root privileges as soon
as locked memory is allocated.
Note also that some systems (especially laptops) have the ability to
``suspend to disk'' (also known as ``safe sleep'' or ``hibernate'').
This writes all memory to disk before going into a low power or even
powered off mode. Unless measures are taken in the operating system
to protect the saved memory, passphrases or other sensitive material
may be recoverable from it later.
Before you report a bug you should first search the mailing list
archives for similar problems and second check whether such a bug has
already been reported to our bug tracker at http://bugs.gnupg.org .
@c *******************************************
@c *************** **************
@c *************** UNATTENDED **************
@c *************** **************
@c *******************************************
@manpause
@node Unattended Usage of GPG
@section Unattended Usage
@command{gpg} is often used as a backend engine by other software. To help
with this a machine interface has been defined to have an unambiguous
way to do this. The options @option{--status-fd} and @option{--batch}
are almost always required for this.
@menu
* Unattended GPG key generation:: Unattended key generation
@end menu
@node Unattended GPG key generation
@subsection Unattended key generation
The command @option{--gen-key} may be used along with the option
@option{--batch} for unattended key generation. The parameters are
either read from stdin or given as a file on the command line.
The format of the parameter file is as follows:
@itemize @bullet
@item Text only, line length is limited to about 1000 characters.
@item UTF-8 encoding must be used to specify non-ASCII characters.
@item Empty lines are ignored.
@item Leading and trailing while space is ignored.
@item A hash sign as the first non white space character indicates
a comment line.
@item Control statements are indicated by a leading percent sign, the
arguments are separated by white space from the keyword.
@item Parameters are specified by a keyword, followed by a colon. Arguments
are separated by white space.
@item
The first parameter must be @samp{Key-Type}; control statements may be
placed anywhere.
@item
The order of the parameters does not matter except for @samp{Key-Type}
which must be the first parameter. The parameters are only used for
the generated keyblock (primary and subkeys); parameters from previous
sets are not used. Some syntactically checks may be performed.
@item
Key generation takes place when either the end of the parameter file
is reached, the next @samp{Key-Type} parameter is encountered or at the
control statement @samp{%commit} is encountered.
@end itemize
@noindent
Control statements:
@table @asis
@item %echo @var{text}
Print @var{text} as diagnostic.
@item %dry-run
Suppress actual key generation (useful for syntax checking).
@item %commit
Perform the key generation. Note that an implicit commit is done at
the next @asis{Key-Type} parameter.
@item %pubring @var{filename}
@itemx %secring @var{filename}
Do not write the key to the default or commandline given keyring but
to @var{filename}. This must be given before the first commit to take
place, duplicate specification of the same filename is ignored, the
last filename before a commit is used. The filename is used until a
new filename is used (at commit points) and all keys are written to
that file. If a new filename is given, this file is created (and
overwrites an existing one). For GnuPG versions prior to 2.1, both
control statements must be given. For GnuPG 2.1 and later
@samp{%secring} is a no-op.
@item %ask-passphrase
@itemx %no-ask-passphrase
This option is a no-op for GnuPG 2.1 and later.
@item %no-protection
Using this option allows the creation of keys without any passphrase
protection. This option is mainly intended for regression tests.
@item %transient-key
If given the keys are created using a faster and a somewhat less
secure random number generator. This option may be used for keys
which are only used for a short time and do not require full
cryptographic strength. It takes only effect if used together with
the control statement @samp{%no-protection}.
@end table
@noindent
General Parameters:
@table @asis
@item Key-Type: @var{algo}
Starts a new parameter block by giving the type of the primary
key. The algorithm must be capable of signing. This is a required
parameter. @var{algo} may either be an OpenPGP algorithm number or a
string with the algorithm name. The special value @samp{default} may
be used for @var{algo} to create the default key type; in this case a
@samp{Key-Usage} shall not be given and @samp{default} also be used
for @samp{Subkey-Type}.
@item Key-Length: @var{nbits}
The requested length of the generated key in bits. The default is
returned by running the command @samp{gpg2 --gpgconf-list}.
@item Key-Grip: @var{hexstring}
This is optional and used to generate a CSR or certificate for an
already existing key. Key-Length will be ignored when given.
@item Key-Usage: @var{usage-list}
Space or comma delimited list of key usages. Allowed values are
@samp{encrypt}, @samp{sign}, and @samp{auth}. This is used to
generate the key flags. Please make sure that the algorithm is
capable of this usage. Note that OpenPGP requires that all primary
keys are capable of certification, so no matter what usage is given
here, the @samp{cert} flag will be on. If no @samp{Key-Usage} is
specified and the @samp{Key-Type} is not @samp{default}, all allowed
usages for that particular algorithm are used; if it is not given but
@samp{default} is used the usage will be @samp{sign}.
@item Subkey-Type: @var{algo}
This generates a secondary key (subkey). Currently only one subkey
can be handled. See also @samp{Key-Type} above.
@item Subkey-Length: @var{nbits}
Length of the secondary key (subkey) in bits. The default is returned
by running the command @samp{gpg2 --gpgconf-list}".
@item Subkey-Usage: @var{usage-list}
Key usage lists for a subkey; similar to @samp{Key-Usage}.
@item Passphrase: @var{string}
If you want to specify a passphrase for the secret key, enter it here.
Default is to use the Pinentry dialog to ask for a passphrase.
@item Name-Real: @var{name}
@itemx Name-Comment: @var{comment}
@itemx Name-Email: @var{email}
The three parts of a user name. Remember to use UTF-8 encoding here.
If you don't give any of them, no user ID is created.
@item Expire-Date: @var{iso-date}|(@var{number}[d|w|m|y])
Set the expiration date for the key (and the subkey). It may either
be entered in ISO date format (e.g. "20000815T145012") or as number of
days, weeks, month or years after the creation date. The special
notation "seconds=N" is also allowed to specify a number of seconds
since creation. Without a letter days are assumed. Note that there
is no check done on the overflow of the type used by OpenPGP for
timestamps. Thus you better make sure that the given value make
sense. Although OpenPGP works with time intervals, GnuPG uses an
absolute value internally and thus the last year we can represent is
2105.
@item Creation-Date: @var{iso-date}
Set the creation date of the key as stored in the key information and
which is also part of the fingerprint calculation. Either a date like
"1986-04-26" or a full timestamp like "19860426T042640" may be used.
The time is considered to be UTC. The special notation "seconds=N"
may be used to directly specify a the number of seconds since Epoch
(Unix time). If it is not given the current time is used.
@item Preferences: @var{string}
Set the cipher, hash, and compression preference values for this key.
This expects the same type of string as the sub-command @samp{setpref}
in the @option{--edit-key} menu.
@item Revoker: @var{algo}:@var{fpr} [sensitive]
Add a designated revoker to the generated key. Algo is the public key
algorithm of the designated revoker (i.e. RSA=1, DSA=17, etc.)
@var{fpr} is the fingerprint of the designated revoker. The optional
@samp{sensitive} flag marks the designated revoker as sensitive
information. Only v4 keys may be designated revokers.
@item Keyserver: @var{string}
This is an optional parameter that specifies the preferred keyserver
URL for the key.
@item Handle: @var{string}
This is an optional parameter only used with the status lines
KEY_CREATED and KEY_NOT_CREATED. @var{string} may be up to 100
characters and should not contain spaces. It is useful for batch key
generation to associate a key parameter block with a status line.
@end table
@noindent
Here is an example on how to create a key:
@smallexample
$ cat >foo <
ssb 1024g/8F70E2C0 2000-03-09
@end smallexample
@noindent
If you want to create a key with the default algorithms you would use
these parameters:
@smallexample
%echo Generating a default key
Key-Type: default
Subkey-Type: default
Name-Real: Joe Tester
Name-Comment: with stupid passphrase
Name-Email: joe@@foo.bar
Expire-Date: 0
Passphrase: abc
%pubring foo.pub
%secring foo.sec
# Do a commit here, so that we can later print "done" :-)
%commit
%echo done
@end smallexample
@mansect see also
@ifset isman
@command{gpgv}(1),
@command{gpgsm}(1),
@command{gpg-agent}(1)
@end ifset
@include see-also-note.texi
diff --git a/doc/gpgsm.texi b/doc/gpgsm.texi
index 1b57d1a2c..21e9372d2 100644
--- a/doc/gpgsm.texi
+++ b/doc/gpgsm.texi
@@ -1,1469 +1,1471 @@
@c Copyright (C) 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
@c This is part of the GnuPG manual.
@c For copying conditions, see the file gnupg.texi.
+@include defs.inc
+
@node Invoking GPGSM
@chapter Invoking GPGSM
@cindex GPGSM command options
@cindex command options
@cindex options, GPGSM command
@manpage gpgsm.1
@ifset manverb
.B gpgsm
\- CMS encryption and signing tool
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B gpgsm
.RB [ \-\-homedir
.IR dir ]
.RB [ \-\-options
.IR file ]
.RI [ options ]
.I command
.RI [ args ]
@end ifset
@mansect description
@command{gpgsm} is a tool similar to @command{gpg} to provide digital
encryption and signing services on X.509 certificates and the CMS
protocol. It is mainly used as a backend for S/MIME mail processing.
@command{gpgsm} includes a full featured certificate management and
complies with all rules defined for the German Sphinx project.
@manpause
@xref{Option Index}, for an index to @command{GPGSM}'s commands and options.
@mancont
@menu
* GPGSM Commands:: List of all commands.
* GPGSM Options:: List of all options.
* GPGSM Configuration:: Configuration files.
* GPGSM Examples:: Some usage examples.
Developer information:
* Unattended Usage:: Using @command{gpgsm} from other programs.
* GPGSM Protocol:: The protocol the server mode uses.
@end menu
@c *******************************************
@c *************** ****************
@c *************** COMMANDS ****************
@c *************** ****************
@c *******************************************
@mansect commands
@node GPGSM Commands
@section Commands
Commands are not distinguished from options except for the fact that
only one command is allowed.
@menu
* General GPGSM Commands:: Commands not specific to the functionality.
* Operational GPGSM Commands:: Commands to select the type of operation.
* Certificate Management:: How to manage certificates.
@end menu
@c *******************************************
@c ********** GENERAL COMMANDS *************
@c *******************************************
@node General GPGSM Commands
@subsection Commands not specific to the function
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --version
@opindex version
Print the program version and licensing information. Note that you
cannot abbreviate this command.
@item --help, -h
@opindex help
Print a usage message summarizing the most useful command-line options.
Note that you cannot abbreviate this command.
@item --warranty
@opindex warranty
Print warranty information. Note that you cannot abbreviate this
command.
@item --dump-options
@opindex dump-options
Print a list of all available options and commands. Note that you cannot
abbreviate this command.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c ******** OPERATIONAL COMMANDS ***********
@c *******************************************
@node Operational GPGSM Commands
@subsection Commands to select the type of operation
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --encrypt
@opindex encrypt
Perform an encryption. The keys the data is encrypted too must be set
using the option @option{--recipient}.
@item --decrypt
@opindex decrypt
Perform a decryption; the type of input is automatically determined. It
may either be in binary form or PEM encoded; automatic determination of
base-64 encoding is not done.
@item --sign
@opindex sign
Create a digital signature. The key used is either the fist one found
in the keybox or those set with the @option{--local-user} option.
@item --verify
@opindex verify
Check a signature file for validity. Depending on the arguments a
detached signature may also be checked.
@item --server
@opindex server
Run in server mode and wait for commands on the @code{stdin}.
@item --call-dirmngr @var{command} [@var{args}]
@opindex call-dirmngr
Behave as a Dirmngr client issuing the request @var{command} with the
optional list of @var{args}. The output of the Dirmngr is printed
stdout. Please note that file names given as arguments should have an
absolute file name (i.e. commencing with @code{/} because they are
passed verbatim to the Dirmngr and the working directory of the
Dirmngr might not be the same as the one of this client. Currently it
is not possible to pass data via stdin to the Dirmngr. @var{command}
should not contain spaces.
This is command is required for certain maintaining tasks of the dirmngr
where a dirmngr must be able to call back to @command{gpgsm}. See the Dirmngr
manual for details.
@item --call-protect-tool @var{arguments}
@opindex call-protect-tool
Certain maintenance operations are done by an external program call
@command{gpg-protect-tool}; this is usually not installed in a directory
listed in the PATH variable. This command provides a simple wrapper to
access this tool. @var{arguments} are passed verbatim to this command;
use @samp{--help} to get a list of supported operations.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c ******* CERTIFICATE MANAGEMENT **********
@c *******************************************
@node Certificate Management
@subsection How to manage the certificates and keys
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --gen-key
@opindex gen-key
This command allows the creation of a certificate signing request or a
self-signed certificate. It is commonly used along with the
@option{--output} option to save the created CSR or certificate into a
file. If used with the @option{--batch} a parameter file is used to
create the CSR or certificate and it is further possible to create
non-self-signed certificates.
@item --list-keys
@itemx -k
@opindex list-keys
List all available certificates stored in the local key database.
Note that the displayed data might be reformatted for better human
readability and illegal characters are replaced by safe substitutes.
@item --list-secret-keys
@itemx -K
@opindex list-secret-keys
List all available certificates for which a corresponding a secret key
is available.
@item --list-external-keys @var{pattern}
@opindex list-keys
List certificates matching @var{pattern} using an external server. This
utilizes the @code{dirmngr} service.
@item --list-chain
@opindex list-chain
Same as @option{--list-keys} but also prints all keys making up the chain.
@item --dump-cert
@itemx --dump-keys
@opindex dump-cert
@opindex dump-keys
List all available certificates stored in the local key database using a
format useful mainly for debugging.
@item --dump-chain
@opindex dump-chain
Same as @option{--dump-keys} but also prints all keys making up the chain.
@item --dump-secret-keys
@opindex dump-secret-keys
List all available certificates for which a corresponding a secret key
is available using a format useful mainly for debugging.
@item --dump-external-keys @var{pattern}
@opindex dump-external-keys
List certificates matching @var{pattern} using an external server.
This utilizes the @code{dirmngr} service. It uses a format useful
mainly for debugging.
@item --keydb-clear-some-cert-flags
@opindex keydb-clear-some-cert-flags
This is a debugging aid to reset certain flags in the key database
which are used to cache certain certificate stati. It is especially
useful if a bad CRL or a weird running OCSP responder did accidentally
revoke certificate. There is no security issue with this command
because @command{gpgsm} always make sure that the validity of a certificate is
checked right before it is used.
@item --delete-keys @var{pattern}
@opindex delete-keys
Delete the keys matching @var{pattern}. Note that there is no command
to delete the secret part of the key directly. In case you need to do
this, you should run the command @code{gpgsm --dump-secret-keys KEYID}
before you delete the key, copy the string of hex-digits in the
``keygrip'' line and delete the file consisting of these hex-digits
and the suffix @code{.key} from the @file{private-keys-v1.d} directory
below our GnuPG home directory (usually @file{~/.gnupg}).
@item --export [@var{pattern}]
@opindex export
Export all certificates stored in the Keybox or those specified by the
optional @var{pattern}. Those pattern consist of a list of user ids
(@pxref{how-to-specify-a-user-id}). When used along with the
@option{--armor} option a few informational lines are prepended before
each block. There is one limitation: As there is no commonly agreed
upon way to pack more than one certificate into an ASN.1 structure,
the binary export (i.e. without using @option{armor}) works only for
the export of one certificate. Thus it is required to specify a
@var{pattern} which yields exactly one certificate. Ephemeral
certificate are only exported if all @var{pattern} are given as
fingerprints or keygrips.
@item --export-secret-key-p12 @var{key-id}
@opindex export-secret-key-p12
Export the private key and the certificate identified by @var{key-id} in
a PKCS#12 format. When used with the @code{--armor} option a few
informational lines are prepended to the output. Note, that the PKCS#12
format is not very secure and this command is only provided if there is
no other way to exchange the private key. (@pxref{option --p12-charset})
@item --export-secret-key-p8 @var{key-id}
@itemx --export-secret-key-raw @var{key-id}
@opindex export-secret-key-p8
@opindex export-secret-key-raw
Export the private key of the certificate identified by @var{key-id}
with any encryption stripped. The @code{...-raw} command exports in
PKCS#1 format; the @code{...-p8} command exports in PKCS#8 format.
When used with the @code{--armor} option a few informational lines are
prepended to the output. These commands are useful to prepare a key
for use on a TLS server.
@item --import [@var{files}]
@opindex import
Import the certificates from the PEM or binary encoded files as well as
from signed-only messages. This command may also be used to import a
secret key from a PKCS#12 file.
@item --learn-card
@opindex learn-card
Read information about the private keys from the smartcard and import
the certificates from there. This command utilizes the @command{gpg-agent}
and in turn the @command{scdaemon}.
@item --passwd @var{user_id}
@opindex passwd
Change the passphrase of the private key belonging to the certificate
specified as @var{user_id}. Note, that changing the passphrase/PIN of a
smartcard is not yet supported.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c *************** ****************
@c *************** OPTIONS ****************
@c *************** ****************
@c *******************************************
@mansect options
@node GPGSM Options
@section Option Summary
@command{GPGSM} features a bunch of options to control the exact behaviour
and to change the default configuration.
@menu
* Configuration Options:: How to change the configuration.
* Certificate Options:: Certificate related options.
* Input and Output:: Input and Output.
* CMS Options:: How to change how the CMS is created.
* Esoteric Options:: Doing things one usually do not want to do.
@end menu
@c *******************************************
@c ******** CONFIGURATION OPTIONS **********
@c *******************************************
@node Configuration Options
@subsection How to change the configuration
These options are used to change the configuration and are usually found
in the option file.
@table @gnupgtabopt
@anchor{gpgsm-option --options}
@item --options @var{file}
@opindex options
Reads configuration from @var{file} instead of from the default
per-user configuration file. The default configuration file is named
@file{gpgsm.conf} and expected in the @file{.gnupg} directory directly
below the home directory of the user.
@include opt-homedir.texi
@item -v
@item --verbose
@opindex v
@opindex verbose
Outputs additional information while running.
You can increase the verbosity by giving several
verbose commands to @command{gpgsm}, such as @samp{-vv}.
@item --policy-file @var{filename}
@opindex policy-file
Change the default name of the policy file to @var{filename}.
@item --agent-program @var{file}
@opindex agent-program
Specify an agent program to be used for secret key operations. The
default value is determined by running the command @command{gpgconf}.
Note that the pipe symbol (@code{|}) is used for a regression test
suite hack and may thus not be used in the file name.
@item --dirmngr-program @var{file}
@opindex dirmngr-program
Specify a dirmngr program to be used for @acronym{CRL} checks. The
-default value is @file{/usr/sbin/dirmngr}. This is only used as a
+default value is @file{@value{BINDIR}/dirmngr}. This is only used as a
fallback when the environment variable @code{DIRMNGR_INFO} is not set or
a running dirmngr cannot be connected.
@item --prefer-system-dirmngr
@opindex prefer-system-dirmngr
If a system wide @command{dirmngr} is running in daemon mode, first try
to connect to this one. Fallback to a pipe based server if this does
not work. Under Windows this option is ignored because the system dirmngr is
always used.
@item --disable-dirmngr
Entirely disable the use of the Dirmngr.
@item --no-autostart
@opindex no-autostart
Do not start the gpg-agent or the dirmngr if it has not yet been
started and its service is required. This option is mostly useful on
machines where the connection to gpg-agent has been redirected to
another machines. If dirmngr is required on the remote machine, it
may be started manually using @command{gpgconf --launch dirmngr}.
@item --no-secmem-warning
@opindex no-secmem-warning
Do not print a warning when the so called "secure memory" cannot be used.
@item --log-file @var{file}
@opindex log-file
When running in server mode, append all logging output to @var{file}.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c ******** CERTIFICATE OPTIONS ************
@c *******************************************
@node Certificate Options
@subsection Certificate related options
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --enable-policy-checks
@itemx --disable-policy-checks
@opindex enable-policy-checks
@opindex disable-policy-checks
By default policy checks are enabled. These options may be used to
change it.
@item --enable-crl-checks
@itemx --disable-crl-checks
@opindex enable-crl-checks
@opindex disable-crl-checks
By default the @acronym{CRL} checks are enabled and the DirMngr is used
to check for revoked certificates. The disable option is most useful
with an off-line network connection to suppress this check.
@item --enable-trusted-cert-crl-check
@itemx --disable-trusted-cert-crl-check
@opindex enable-trusted-cert-crl-check
@opindex disable-trusted-cert-crl-check
By default the @acronym{CRL} for trusted root certificates are checked
like for any other certificates. This allows a CA to revoke its own
certificates voluntary without the need of putting all ever issued
certificates into a CRL. The disable option may be used to switch this
extra check off. Due to the caching done by the Dirmngr, there will not be
any noticeable performance gain. Note, that this also disables possible
OCSP checks for trusted root certificates. A more specific way of
disabling this check is by adding the ``relax'' keyword to the root CA
line of the @file{trustlist.txt}
@item --force-crl-refresh
@opindex force-crl-refresh
Tell the dirmngr to reload the CRL for each request. For better
performance, the dirmngr will actually optimize this by suppressing
the loading for short time intervals (e.g. 30 minutes). This option
is useful to make sure that a fresh CRL is available for certificates
hold in the keybox. The suggested way of doing this is by using it
along with the option @option{--with-validation} for a key listing
command. This option should not be used in a configuration file.
@item --enable-ocsp
@itemx --disable-ocsp
@opindex enable-ocsp
@opindex disable-ocsp
By default @acronym{OCSP} checks are disabled. The enable option may
be used to enable OCSP checks via Dirmngr. If @acronym{CRL} checks
are also enabled, CRLs will be used as a fallback if for some reason an
OCSP request will not succeed. Note, that you have to allow OCSP
requests in Dirmngr's configuration too (option
@option{--allow-ocsp}) and configure Dirmngr properly. If you do not do
so you will get the error code @samp{Not supported}.
@item --auto-issuer-key-retrieve
@opindex auto-issuer-key-retrieve
If a required certificate is missing while validating the chain of
certificates, try to load that certificate from an external location.
This usually means that Dirmngr is employed to search for the
certificate. Note that this option makes a "web bug" like behavior
possible. LDAP server operators can see which keys you request, so by
sending you a message signed by a brand new key (which you naturally
will not have on your local keybox), the operator can tell both your IP
address and the time when you verified the signature.
@item --validation-model @var{name}
@opindex validation-model
This option changes the default validation model. The only possible
values are "shell" (which is the default), "chain" which forces the
use of the chain model and "steed" for a new simplified model. The
chain model is also used if an option in the @file{trustlist.txt} or
an attribute of the certificate requests it. However the standard
model (shell) is in that case always tried first.
@item --ignore-cert-extension @var{oid}
@opindex ignore-cert-extension
Add @var{oid} to the list of ignored certificate extensions. The
@var{oid} is expected to be in dotted decimal form, like
@code{2.5.29.3}. This option may be used more than once. Critical
flagged certificate extensions matching one of the OIDs in the list
are treated as if they are actually handled and thus the certificate
will not be rejected due to an unknown critical extension. Use this
option with care because extensions are usually flagged as critical
for a reason.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c *********** INPUT AND OUTPUT ************
@c *******************************************
@node Input and Output
@subsection Input and Output
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --armor
@itemx -a
@opindex armor
Create PEM encoded output. Default is binary output.
@item --base64
@opindex base64
Create Base-64 encoded output; i.e. PEM without the header lines.
@item --assume-armor
@opindex assume-armor
Assume the input data is PEM encoded. Default is to autodetect the
encoding but this is may fail.
@item --assume-base64
@opindex assume-base64
Assume the input data is plain base-64 encoded.
@item --assume-binary
@opindex assume-binary
Assume the input data is binary encoded.
@anchor{option --p12-charset}
@item --p12-charset @var{name}
@opindex p12-charset
@command{gpgsm} uses the UTF-8 encoding when encoding passphrases for
PKCS#12 files. This option may be used to force the passphrase to be
encoded in the specified encoding @var{name}. This is useful if the
application used to import the key uses a different encoding and thus
will not be able to import a file generated by @command{gpgsm}. Commonly
used values for @var{name} are @code{Latin1} and @code{CP850}. Note
that @command{gpgsm} itself automagically imports any file with a
passphrase encoded to the most commonly used encodings.
@item --default-key @var{user_id}
@opindex default-key
Use @var{user_id} as the standard key for signing. This key is used if
no other key has been defined as a signing key. Note, that the first
@option{--local-users} option also sets this key if it has not yet been
set; however @option{--default-key} always overrides this.
@item --local-user @var{user_id}
@item -u @var{user_id}
@opindex local-user
Set the user(s) to be used for signing. The default is the first
secret key found in the database.
@item --recipient @var{name}
@itemx -r
@opindex recipient
Encrypt to the user id @var{name}. There are several ways a user id
may be given (@pxref{how-to-specify-a-user-id}).
@item --output @var{file}
@itemx -o @var{file}
@opindex output
Write output to @var{file}. The default is to write it to stdout.
@item --with-key-data
@opindex with-key-data
Displays extra information with the @code{--list-keys} commands. Especially
a line tagged @code{grp} is printed which tells you the keygrip of a
key. This string is for example used as the file name of the
secret key.
@item --with-validation
@opindex with-validation
When doing a key listing, do a full validation check for each key and
print the result. This is usually a slow operation because it
requires a CRL lookup and other operations.
When used along with --import, a validation of the certificate to
import is done and only imported if it succeeds the test. Note that
this does not affect an already available certificate in the DB.
This option is therefore useful to simply verify a certificate.
@item --with-md5-fingerprint
For standard key listings, also print the MD5 fingerprint of the
certificate.
@item --with-keygrip
Include the keygrip in standard key listings. Note that the keygrip is
always listed in --with-colons mode.
@item --with-secret
@opindex with-secret
Include info about the presence of a secret key in public key listings
done with @code{--with-colons}.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c ************* CMS OPTIONS ***************
@c *******************************************
@node CMS Options
@subsection How to change how the CMS is created.
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --include-certs @var{n}
@opindex include-certs
Using @var{n} of -2 includes all certificate except for the root cert,
-1 includes all certs, 0 does not include any certs, 1 includes only the
signers cert and all other positive values include up to @var{n}
certificates starting with the signer cert. The default is -2.
@item --cipher-algo @var{oid}
@opindex cipher-algo
Use the cipher algorithm with the ASN.1 object identifier @var{oid} for
encryption. For convenience the strings @code{3DES}, @code{AES} and
@code{AES256} may be used instead of their OIDs. The default is
@code{AES} (2.16.840.1.101.3.4.1.2).
@item --digest-algo @code{name}
Use @code{name} as the message digest algorithm. Usually this
algorithm is deduced from the respective signing certificate. This
option forces the use of the given algorithm and may lead to severe
interoperability problems.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c ******** ESOTERIC OPTIONS ***************
@c *******************************************
@node Esoteric Options
@subsection Doing things one usually do not want to do.
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --extra-digest-algo @var{name}
@opindex extra-digest-algo
Sometimes signatures are broken in that they announce a different digest
algorithm than actually used. @command{gpgsm} uses a one-pass data
processing model and thus needs to rely on the announced digest
algorithms to properly hash the data. As a workaround this option may
be used to tell gpg to also hash the data using the algorithm
@var{name}; this slows processing down a little bit but allows to verify
such broken signatures. If @command{gpgsm} prints an error like
``digest algo 8 has not been enabled'' you may want to try this option,
with @samp{SHA256} for @var{name}.
@item --faked-system-time @var{epoch}
@opindex faked-system-time
This option is only useful for testing; it sets the system time back or
forth to @var{epoch} which is the number of seconds elapsed since the year
1970. Alternatively @var{epoch} may be given as a full ISO time string
(e.g. "20070924T154812").
@item --with-ephemeral-keys
@opindex with-ephemeral-keys
Include ephemeral flagged keys in the output of key listings. Note
that they are included anyway if the key specification for a listing
is given as fingerprint or keygrip.
@item --debug-level @var{level}
@opindex debug-level
Select the debug level for investigating problems. @var{level} may be
a numeric value or by a keyword:
@table @code
@item none
No debugging at all. A value of less than 1 may be used instead of
the keyword.
@item basic
Some basic debug messages. A value between 1 and 2 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item advanced
More verbose debug messages. A value between 3 and 5 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item expert
Even more detailed messages. A value between 6 and 8 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item guru
All of the debug messages you can get. A value greater than 8 may be
used instead of the keyword. The creation of hash tracing files is
only enabled if the keyword is used.
@end table
How these messages are mapped to the actual debugging flags is not
specified and may change with newer releases of this program. They are
however carefully selected to best aid in debugging.
@item --debug @var{flags}
@opindex debug
This option is only useful for debugging and the behaviour may change
at any time without notice; using @code{--debug-levels} is the
preferred method to select the debug verbosity. FLAGS are bit encoded
and may be given in usual C-Syntax. The currently defined bits are:
@table @code
@item 0 (1)
X.509 or OpenPGP protocol related data
@item 1 (2)
values of big number integers
@item 2 (4)
low level crypto operations
@item 5 (32)
memory allocation
@item 6 (64)
caching
@item 7 (128)
show memory statistics.
@item 9 (512)
write hashed data to files named @code{dbgmd-000*}
@item 10 (1024)
trace Assuan protocol
@end table
Note, that all flags set using this option may get overridden by
@code{--debug-level}.
@item --debug-all
@opindex debug-all
Same as @code{--debug=0xffffffff}
@item --debug-allow-core-dump
@opindex debug-allow-core-dump
Usually @command{gpgsm} tries to avoid dumping core by well written code and by
disabling core dumps for security reasons. However, bugs are pretty
durable beasts and to squash them it is sometimes useful to have a core
dump. This option enables core dumps unless the Bad Thing happened
before the option parsing.
@item --debug-no-chain-validation
@opindex debug-no-chain-validation
This is actually not a debugging option but only useful as such. It
lets @command{gpgsm} bypass all certificate chain validation checks.
@item --debug-ignore-expiration
@opindex debug-ignore-expiration
This is actually not a debugging option but only useful as such. It
lets @command{gpgsm} ignore all notAfter dates, this is used by the regression
tests.
@item --fixed-passphrase @var{string}
@opindex fixed-passphrase
Supply the passphrase @var{string} to the gpg-protect-tool. This
option is only useful for the regression tests included with this
package and may be revised or removed at any time without notice.
@item --no-common-certs-import
@opindex no-common-certs-import
Suppress the import of common certificates on keybox creation.
@end table
All the long options may also be given in the configuration file after
stripping off the two leading dashes.
@c *******************************************
@c *************** ****************
@c *************** USER ID ****************
@c *************** ****************
@c *******************************************
@mansect how to specify a user id
@ifset isman
@include specify-user-id.texi
@end ifset
@c *******************************************
@c *************** ****************
@c *************** FILES ****************
@c *************** ****************
@c *******************************************
@mansect files
@node GPGSM Configuration
@section Configuration files
There are a few configuration files to control certain aspects of
@command{gpgsm}'s operation. Unless noted, they are expected in the
current home directory (@pxref{option --homedir}).
@table @file
@item gpgsm.conf
@cindex gpgsm.conf
This is the standard configuration file read by @command{gpgsm} on
startup. It may contain any valid long option; the leading two dashes
may not be entered and the option may not be abbreviated. This default
name may be changed on the command line (@pxref{gpgsm-option --options}).
You should backup this file.
@item policies.txt
@cindex policies.txt
This is a list of allowed CA policies. This file should list the
object identifiers of the policies line by line. Empty lines and
lines starting with a hash mark are ignored. Policies missing in this
file and not marked as critical in the certificate will print only a
warning; certificates with policies marked as critical and not listed
in this file will fail the signature verification. You should backup
this file.
For example, to allow only the policy 2.289.9.9, the file should look
like this:
@c man:.RS
@example
# Allowed policies
2.289.9.9
@end example
@c man:.RE
@item qualified.txt
@cindex qualified.txt
This is the list of root certificates used for qualified certificates.
They are defined as certificates capable of creating legally binding
signatures in the same way as handwritten signatures are. Comments
start with a hash mark and empty lines are ignored. Lines do have a
length limit but this is not a serious limitation as the format of the
entries is fixed and checked by gpgsm: A non-comment line starts with
optional whitespace, followed by exactly 40 hex character, white space
and a lowercased 2 letter country code. Additional data delimited with
by a white space is current ignored but might late be used for other
purposes.
Note that even if a certificate is listed in this file, this does not
mean that the certificate is trusted; in general the certificates listed
in this file need to be listed also in @file{trustlist.txt}.
This is a global file an installed in the data directory
-(e.g. @file{/usr/share/gnupg/qualified.txt}). GnuPG installs a suitable
+(e.g. @file{@value{DATADIR}/qualified.txt}). GnuPG installs a suitable
file with root certificates as used in Germany. As new Root-CA
certificates may be issued over time, these entries may need to be
updated; new distributions of this software should come with an updated
list but it is still the responsibility of the Administrator to check
that this list is correct.
Everytime @command{gpgsm} uses a certificate for signing or verification
this file will be consulted to check whether the certificate under
question has ultimately been issued by one of these CAs. If this is the
case the user will be informed that the verified signature represents a
legally binding (``qualified'') signature. When creating a signature
using such a certificate an extra prompt will be issued to let the user
confirm that such a legally binding signature shall really be created.
Because this software has not yet been approved for use with such
certificates, appropriate notices will be shown to indicate this fact.
@item help.txt
@cindex help.txt
This is plain text file with a few help entries used with
@command{pinentry} as well as a large list of help items for
@command{gpg} and @command{gpgsm}. The standard file has English help
texts; to install localized versions use filenames like @file{help.LL.txt}
with LL denoting the locale. GnuPG comes with a set of predefined help
-files in the data directory (e.g. @file{/usr/share/gnupg/help.de.txt})
+files in the data directory (e.g. @file{@value{DATADIR}/gnupg/help.de.txt})
and allows overriding of any help item by help files stored in the
-system configuration directory (e.g. @file{/etc/gnupg/help.de.txt}).
+system configuration directory (e.g. @file{@value{SYSCONFDIR}/help.de.txt}).
For a reference of the help file's syntax, please see the installed
@file{help.txt} file.
@item com-certs.pem
@cindex com-certs.pem
This file is a collection of common certificates used to populated a
newly created @file{pubring.kbx}. An administrator may replace this
file with a custom one. The format is a concatenation of PEM encoded
X.509 certificates. This global file is installed in the data directory
-(e.g. @file{/usr/share/gnupg/com-certs.pem}).
+(e.g. @file{@value{DATADIR}/com-certs.pem}).
@end table
@c man:.RE
Note that on larger installations, it is useful to put predefined files
into the directory @file{/etc/skel/.gnupg/} so that newly created users
start up with a working configuration. For existing users a small
helper script is provided to create these files (@pxref{addgnupghome}).
For internal purposes gpgsm creates and maintains a few other files;
they all live in in the current home directory (@pxref{option
--homedir}). Only @command{gpgsm} may modify these files.
@table @file
@item pubring.kbx
@cindex pubring.kbx
This a database file storing the certificates as well as meta
information. For debugging purposes the tool @command{kbxutil} may be
used to show the internal structure of this file. You should backup
this file.
@item random_seed
@cindex random_seed
This content of this file is used to maintain the internal state of the
random number generator across invocations. The same file is used by
other programs of this software too.
@item S.gpg-agent
@cindex S.gpg-agent
If this file exists
@command{gpgsm} will first try to connect to this socket for
accessing @command{gpg-agent} before starting a new @command{gpg-agent}
instance. Under Windows this socket (which in reality be a plain file
describing a regular TCP listening port) is the standard way of
connecting the @command{gpg-agent}.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c *************** ****************
@c *************** EXAMPLES ****************
@c *************** ****************
@c *******************************************
@mansect examples
@node GPGSM Examples
@section Examples
@example
$ gpgsm -er goo@@bar.net ciphertext
@end example
@c *******************************************
@c *************** **************
@c *************** UNATTENDED **************
@c *************** **************
@c *******************************************
@manpause
@node Unattended Usage
@section Unattended Usage
@command{gpgsm} is often used as a backend engine by other software. To help
with this a machine interface has been defined to have an unambiguous
way to do this. This is most likely used with the @code{--server} command
but may also be used in the standard operation mode by using the
@code{--status-fd} option.
@menu
* Automated signature checking:: Automated signature checking.
* CSR and certificate creation:: CSR and certificate creation.
@end menu
@node Automated signature checking
@subsection Automated signature checking
It is very important to understand the semantics used with signature
verification. Checking a signature is not as simple as it may sound and
so the operation is a bit complicated. In most cases it is required
to look at several status lines. Here is a table of all cases a signed
message may have:
@table @asis
@item The signature is valid
This does mean that the signature has been successfully verified, the
certificates are all sane. However there are two subcases with
important information: One of the certificates may have expired or a
signature of a message itself as expired. It is a sound practise to
consider such a signature still as valid but additional information
should be displayed. Depending on the subcase @command{gpgsm} will issue
these status codes:
@table @asis
@item signature valid and nothing did expire
@code{GOODSIG}, @code{VALIDSIG}, @code{TRUST_FULLY}
@item signature valid but at least one certificate has expired
@code{EXPKEYSIG}, @code{VALIDSIG}, @code{TRUST_FULLY}
@item signature valid but expired
@code{EXPSIG}, @code{VALIDSIG}, @code{TRUST_FULLY}
Note, that this case is currently not implemented.
@end table
@item The signature is invalid
This means that the signature verification failed (this is an indication
of af a transfer error, a program error or tampering with the message).
@command{gpgsm} issues one of these status codes sequences:
@table @code
@item @code{BADSIG}
@item @code{GOODSIG}, @code{VALIDSIG} @code{TRUST_NEVER}
@end table
@item Error verifying a signature
For some reason the signature could not be verified, i.e. it cannot be
decided whether the signature is valid or invalid. A common reason for
this is a missing certificate.
@end table
@node CSR and certificate creation
@subsection CSR and certificate creation
The command @option{--gen-key} may be used along with the option
@option{--batch} to either create a certificate signing request (CSR)
or an X.509 certificate. This is controlled by a parameter file; the
format of this file is as follows:
@itemize @bullet
@item Text only, line length is limited to about 1000 characters.
@item UTF-8 encoding must be used to specify non-ASCII characters.
@item Empty lines are ignored.
@item Leading and trailing while space is ignored.
@item A hash sign as the first non white space character indicates
a comment line.
@item Control statements are indicated by a leading percent sign, the
arguments are separated by white space from the keyword.
@item Parameters are specified by a keyword, followed by a colon. Arguments
are separated by white space.
@item The first parameter must be @samp{Key-Type}, control statements
may be placed anywhere.
@item
The order of the parameters does not matter except for @samp{Key-Type}
which must be the first parameter. The parameters are only used for
the generated CSR/certificate; parameters from previous sets are not
used. Some syntactically checks may be performed.
@item
Key generation takes place when either the end of the parameter file
is reached, the next @samp{Key-Type} parameter is encountered or at the
control statement @samp{%commit} is encountered.
@end itemize
@noindent
Control statements:
@table @asis
@item %echo @var{text}
Print @var{text} as diagnostic.
@item %dry-run
Suppress actual key generation (useful for syntax checking).
@item %commit
Perform the key generation. Note that an implicit commit is done at
the next @asis{Key-Type} parameter.
@c %certfile
@c [Not yet implemented!]
@c Do not write the certificate to the keyDB but to .
@c This must be given before the first
@c commit to take place, duplicate specification of the same filename
@c is ignored, the last filename before a commit is used.
@c The filename is used until a new filename is used (at commit points)
@c and all keys are written to that file. If a new filename is given,
@c this file is created (and overwrites an existing one).
@c Both control statements must be given.
@end table
@noindent
General Parameters:
@table @asis
@item Key-Type: @var{algo}
Starts a new parameter block by giving the type of the primary
key. The algorithm must be capable of signing. This is a required
parameter. The only supported value for @var{algo} is @samp{rsa}.
@item Key-Length: @var{nbits}
The requested length of a generated key in bits. Defaults to 2048.
@item Key-Grip: @var{hexstring}
This is optional and used to generate a CSR or certificatet for an
already existing key. Key-Length will be ignored when given.
@item Key-Usage: @var{usage-list}
Space or comma delimited list of key usage, allowed values are
@samp{encrypt}, @samp{sign} and @samp{cert}. This is used to generate
the keyUsage extension. Please make sure that the algorithm is
capable of this usage. Default is to allow encrypt and sign.
@item Name-DN: @var{subject-name}
This is the Distinguished Name (DN) of the subject in RFC-2253 format.
@item Name-Email: @var{string}
This is an email address for the altSubjectName. This parameter is
optional but may occur several times to add several email addresses to
a certificate.
@item Name-DNS: @var{string}
The is an DNS name for the altSubjectName. This parameter is optional
but may occur several times to add several DNS names to a certificate.
@item Name-URI: @var{string}
This is an URI for the altSubjectName. This parameter is optional but
may occur several times to add several URIs to a certificate.
@end table
@noindent
Additional parameters used to create a certificate (in contrast to a
certificate signing request):
@table @asis
@item Serial: @var{sn}
If this parameter is given an X.509 certificate will be generated.
@var{sn} is expected to be a hex string representing an unsigned
integer of arbitary length. The special value @samp{random} can be
used to create a 64 bit random serial number.
@item Issuer-DN: @var{issuer-name}
This is the DN name of the issuer in rfc2253 format. If it is not set
it will default to the subject DN and a special GnuPG extension will
be included in the certificate to mark it as a standalone certificate.
@item Creation-Date: @var{iso-date}
@itemx Not-Before: @var{iso-date}
Set the notBefore date of the certificate. Either a date like
@samp{1986-04-26} or @samp{1986-04-26 12:00} or a standard ISO
timestamp like @samp{19860426T042640} may be used. The time is
considered to be UTC. If it is not given the current date is used.
@item Expire-Date: @var{iso-date}
@itemx Not-After: @var{iso-date}
Set the notAfter date of the certificate. Either a date like
@samp{2063-04-05} or @samp{2063-04-05 17:00} or a standard ISO
timestamp like @samp{20630405T170000} may be used. The time is
considered to be UTC. If it is not given a default value in the not
too far future is used.
@item Signing-Key: @var{keygrip}
This gives the keygrip of the key used to sign the certificate. If it
is not given a self-signed certificate will be created. For
compatibility with future versions, it is suggested to prefix the
keygrip with a @samp{&}.
@item Hash-Algo: @var{hash-algo}
Use @var{hash-algo} for this CSR or certificate. The supported hash
algorithms are: @samp{sha1}, @samp{sha256}, @samp{sha384} and
@samp{sha512}; they may also be specified with uppercase letters. The
default is @samp{sha256}.
@end table
@c *******************************************
@c *************** *****************
@c *************** ASSSUAN *****************
@c *************** *****************
@c *******************************************
@node GPGSM Protocol
@section The Protocol the Server Mode Uses.
Description of the protocol used to access @command{GPGSM}.
@command{GPGSM} does implement the Assuan protocol and in addition
provides a regular command line interface which exhibits a full client
to this protocol (but uses internal linking). To start
@command{gpgsm} as a server the command line the option
@code{--server} must be used. Additional options are provided to
select the communication method (i.e. the name of the socket).
We assume that the connection has already been established; see the
Assuan manual for details.
@menu
* GPGSM ENCRYPT:: Encrypting a message.
* GPGSM DECRYPT:: Decrypting a message.
* GPGSM SIGN:: Signing a message.
* GPGSM VERIFY:: Verifying a message.
* GPGSM GENKEY:: Generating a key.
* GPGSM LISTKEYS:: List available keys.
* GPGSM EXPORT:: Export certificates.
* GPGSM IMPORT:: Import certificates.
* GPGSM DELETE:: Delete certificates.
* GPGSM GETINFO:: Information about the process
@end menu
@node GPGSM ENCRYPT
@subsection Encrypting a Message
Before encryption can be done the recipient must be set using the
command:
@example
RECIPIENT @var{userID}
@end example
Set the recipient for the encryption. @var{userID} should be the
internal representation of the key; the server may accept any other way
of specification. If this is a valid and trusted recipient the server
does respond with OK, otherwise the return is an ERR with the reason why
the recipient cannot be used, the encryption will then not be done for
this recipient. If the policy is not to encrypt at all if not all
recipients are valid, the client has to take care of this. All
@code{RECIPIENT} commands are cumulative until a @code{RESET} or an
successful @code{ENCRYPT} command.
@example
INPUT FD[=@var{n}] [--armor|--base64|--binary]
@end example
Set the file descriptor for the message to be encrypted to @var{n}.
Obviously the pipe must be open at that point, the server establishes
its own end. If the server returns an error the client should consider
this session failed. If @var{n} is not given, this commands uses the
last file descriptor passed to the application.
@xref{fun-assuan_sendfd, ,the assuan_sendfd function,assuan,the Libassuan
manual}, on how to do descriptor passing.
The @code{--armor} option may be used to advice the server that the
input data is in @acronym{PEM} format, @code{--base64} advices that a
raw base-64 encoding is used, @code{--binary} advices of raw binary
input (@acronym{BER}). If none of these options is used, the server
tries to figure out the used encoding, but this may not always be
correct.
@example
OUTPUT FD[=@var{n}] [--armor|--base64]
@end example
Set the file descriptor to be used for the output (i.e. the encrypted
message). Obviously the pipe must be open at that point, the server
establishes its own end. If the server returns an error he client
should consider this session failed.
The option armor encodes the output in @acronym{PEM} format, the
@code{--base64} option applies just a base 64 encoding. No option
creates binary output (@acronym{BER}).
The actual encryption is done using the command
@example
ENCRYPT
@end example
It takes the plaintext from the @code{INPUT} command, writes to the
ciphertext to the file descriptor set with the @code{OUTPUT} command,
take the recipients from all the recipients set so far. If this command
fails the clients should try to delete all output currently done or
otherwise mark it as invalid. @command{GPGSM} does ensure that there
will not be any
security problem with leftover data on the output in this case.
This command should in general not fail, as all necessary checks have
been done while setting the recipients. The input and output pipes are
closed.
@node GPGSM DECRYPT
@subsection Decrypting a message
Input and output FDs are set the same way as in encryption, but
@code{INPUT} refers to the ciphertext and output to the plaintext. There
is no need to set recipients. @command{GPGSM} automatically strips any
@acronym{S/MIME} headers from the input, so it is valid to pass an
entire MIME part to the INPUT pipe.
The encryption is done by using the command
@example
DECRYPT
@end example
It performs the decrypt operation after doing some check on the internal
state. (e.g. that all needed data has been set). Because it utilizes
the GPG-Agent for the session key decryption, there is no need to ask
the client for a protecting passphrase - GpgAgent takes care of this by
requesting this from the user.
@node GPGSM SIGN
@subsection Signing a Message
Signing is usually done with these commands:
@example
INPUT FD[=@var{n}] [--armor|--base64|--binary]
@end example
This tells @command{GPGSM} to read the data to sign from file descriptor @var{n}.
@example
OUTPUT FD[=@var{m}] [--armor|--base64]
@end example
Write the output to file descriptor @var{m}. If a detached signature is
requested, only the signature is written.
@example
SIGN [--detached]
@end example
Sign the data set with the INPUT command and write it to the sink set by
OUTPUT. With @code{--detached}, a detached signature is created
(surprise).
The key used for signing is the default one or the one specified in
the configuration file. To get finer control over the keys, it is
possible to use the command
@example
SIGNER @var{userID}
@end example
to the signer's key. @var{userID} should be the
internal representation of the key; the server may accept any other way
of specification. If this is a valid and trusted recipient the server
does respond with OK, otherwise the return is an ERR with the reason why
the key cannot be used, the signature will then not be created using
this key. If the policy is not to sign at all if not all
keys are valid, the client has to take care of this. All
@code{SIGNER} commands are cumulative until a @code{RESET} is done.
Note that a @code{SIGN} does not reset this list of signers which is in
contrats to the @code{RECIPIENT} command.
@node GPGSM VERIFY
@subsection Verifying a Message
To verify a mesage the command:
@example
VERIFY
@end example
is used. It does a verify operation on the message send to the input FD.
The result is written out using status lines. If an output FD was
given, the signed text will be written to that. If the signature is a
detached one, the server will inquire about the signed material and the
client must provide it.
@node GPGSM GENKEY
@subsection Generating a Key
This is used to generate a new keypair, store the secret part in the
@acronym{PSE} and the public key in the key database. We will probably
add optional commands to allow the client to select whether a hardware
token is used to store the key. Configuration options to
@command{GPGSM} can be used to restrict the use of this command.
@example
GENKEY
@end example
@command{GPGSM} checks whether this command is allowed and then does an
INQUIRY to get the key parameters, the client should then send the
key parameters in the native format:
@example
S: INQUIRE KEY_PARAM native
C: D foo:fgfgfg
C: D bar
C: END
@end example
Please note that the server may send Status info lines while reading the
data lines from the client. After this the key generation takes place
and the server eventually does send an ERR or OK response. Status lines
may be issued as a progress indicator.
@node GPGSM LISTKEYS
@subsection List available keys
To list the keys in the internal database or using an external key
provider, the command:
@example
LISTKEYS @var{pattern}
@end example
is used. To allow multiple patterns (which are ORed during the search)
quoting is required: Spaces are to be translated into "+" or into "%20";
in turn this requires that the usual escape quoting rules are done.
@example
LISTSECRETKEYS @var{pattern}
@end example
Lists only the keys where a secret key is available.
The list commands commands are affected by the option
@example
OPTION list-mode=@var{mode}
@end example
where mode may be:
@table @code
@item 0
Use default (which is usually the same as 1).
@item 1
List only the internal keys.
@item 2
List only the external keys.
@item 3
List internal and external keys.
@end table
Note that options are valid for the entire session.
@node GPGSM EXPORT
@subsection Export certificates
To export certificate from the internal key database the command:
@example
EXPORT [--data [--armor] [--base64]] [--] @var{pattern}
@end example
is used. To allow multiple patterns (which are ORed) quoting is
required: Spaces are to be translated into "+" or into "%20"; in turn
this requires that the usual escape quoting rules are done.
If the @option{--data} option has not been given, the format of the
output depends on what was set with the OUTPUT command. When using
@acronym{PEM} encoding a few informational lines are prepended.
If the @option{--data} has been given, a target set via OUTPUT is
ignored and the data is returned inline using standard
@code{D}-lines. This avoids the need for an extra file descriptor. In
this case the options @option{--armor} and @option{--base64} may be used
in the same way as with the OUTPUT command.
@node GPGSM IMPORT
@subsection Import certificates
To import certificates into the internal key database, the command
@example
IMPORT [--re-import]
@end example
is used. The data is expected on the file descriptor set with the
@code{INPUT} command. Certain checks are performed on the
certificate. Note that the code will also handle PKCS#12 files and
import private keys; a helper program is used for that.
With the option @option{--re-import} the input data is expected to a be
a linefeed separated list of fingerprints. The command will re-import
the corresponding certificates; that is they are made permanent by
removing their ephemeral flag.
@node GPGSM DELETE
@subsection Delete certificates
To delete a certificate the command
@example
DELKEYS @var{pattern}
@end example
is used. To allow multiple patterns (which are ORed) quoting is
required: Spaces are to be translated into "+" or into "%20"; in turn
this requires that the usual escape quoting rules are done.
The certificates must be specified unambiguously otherwise an error is
returned.
@node GPGSM GETINFO
@subsection Return information about the process
This is a multipurpose function to return a variety of information.
@example
GETINFO @var{what}
@end example
The value of @var{what} specifies the kind of information returned:
@table @code
@item version
Return the version of the program.
@item pid
Return the process id of the process.
@item agent-check
Return success if the agent is running.
@item cmd_has_option @var{cmd} @var{opt}
Return success if the command @var{cmd} implements the option @var{opt}.
The leading two dashes usually used with @var{opt} shall not be given.
@end table
@mansect see also
@ifset isman
@command{gpg2}(1),
@command{gpg-agent}(1)
@end ifset
@include see-also-note.texi
diff --git a/doc/gpgv.texi b/doc/gpgv.texi
index 0cb2360f8..8d7164ae0 100644
--- a/doc/gpgv.texi
+++ b/doc/gpgv.texi
@@ -1,168 +1,170 @@
@c Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
@c This is part of the GnuPG manual.
@c For copying conditions, see the file GnuPG.texi.
@c
@c This is included by tools.texi.
@c
+@include defs.inc
+
@c Begin GnuPG 1.x specific stuff
@ifset gpgone
@macro gpgvname
gpgv
@end macro
@manpage gpgv.1
@node gpgv
@section Verify OpenPGP signatures
@ifset manverb
.B gpgv
\- Verify OpenPGP signatures
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B gpgv
.RI [ options ]
.I signed_files
@end ifset
@end ifset
@c End GnuPG 1.x specific stuff
@c Begin GnuPG 2 specific stuff
@ifclear gpgone
@macro gpgvname
gpgv2
@end macro
@manpage gpgv2.1
@node gpgv
@section Verify OpenPGP signatures
@ifset manverb
.B gpgv2
\- Verify OpenPGP signatures
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B gpgv2
.RI [ options ]
.I signed_files
@end ifset
@end ifclear
@c End GnuPG 2 specific stuff
@mansect description
@code{@gpgvname} is an OpenPGP signature verification tool.
This program is actually a stripped-down version of @code{gpg} which is
only able to check signatures. It is somewhat smaller than the fully-blown
@code{gpg} and uses a different (and simpler) way to check that
the public keys used to make the signature are valid. There are
no configuration files and only a few options are implemented.
@code{@gpgvname} assumes that all keys in the keyring are trustworthy.
That does also mean that it does not check for expired or revoked
keys.
By default a keyring named @file{trustedkeys.gpg} is used. This
default keyring is assumed to be in the home directory of GnuPG,
either the default home directory or the one set by an option or an
environment variable. The option @code{--keyring} may be used to
specify a different keyring or even multiple keyrings.
@noindent
@mansect options
@code{@gpgvname} recognizes these options:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --verbose
@itemx -v
@opindex verbose
Gives more information during processing. If used
twice, the input data is listed in detail.
@item --quiet
@itemx -q
@opindex quiet
Try to be as quiet as possible.
@item --keyring @var{file}
@opindex keyring
Add @var{file} to the list of keyrings.
If @var{file} begins with a tilde and a slash, these
are replaced by the HOME directory. If the filename
does not contain a slash, it is assumed to be in the
home-directory ("~/.gnupg" if --homedir is not used).
@item --status-fd @var{n}
@opindex status-fd
Write special status strings to the file descriptor @var{n}. See the
file DETAILS in the documentation for a listing of them.
@item --logger-fd @code{n}
@opindex logger-fd
Write log output to file descriptor @code{n} and not to stderr.
@item --ignore-time-conflict
@opindex ignore-time-conflict
GnuPG normally checks that the timestamps associated with keys and
signatures have plausible values. However, sometimes a signature seems to
be older than the key due to clock problems. This option turns these
checks into warnings.
@include opt-homedir.texi
@end table
@mansect return value
The program returns 0 if everything is fine, 1 if at least
one signature was bad, and other error codes for fatal errors.
@mansect examples
@subsection Examples
@table @asis
@item @gpgvname @code{pgpfile}
@itemx @gpgvname @code{sigfile} [@code{datafile}]
Verify the signature of the file. The second form is used for detached
signatures, where @code{sigfile} is the detached signature (either
ASCII-armored or binary) and @code{datafile} contains the signed data;
if @code{datafile} is "-" the signed data is expected on
@code{stdin}; if @code{datafile} is not given the name of the file
holding the signed data is constructed by cutting off the extension
(".asc", ".sig" or ".sign") from @code{sigfile}.
@end table
@mansect environment
@subsection Environment
@table @asis
@item HOME
Used to locate the default home directory.
@item GNUPGHOME
If set directory used instead of "~/.gnupg".
@end table
@mansect files
@subsection FILES
@table @asis
@item ~/.gnupg/trustedkeys.gpg
The default keyring with the allowed keys.
@end table
@mansect see also
@command{gpg2}(1)
@include see-also-note.texi
diff --git a/doc/instguide.texi b/doc/instguide.texi
index aff39556c..76d8de159 100644
--- a/doc/instguide.texi
+++ b/doc/instguide.texi
@@ -1,77 +1,77 @@
@c instguide.texi - Installation guide for GnuPG
@c Copyright (C) 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
@c This is part of the GnuPG manual.
@c For copying conditions, see the file gnupg.texi.
@node Installation
@chapter A short installation guide.
Unfortunately the installation guide has not been finished in time.
Instead of delaying the release of GnuPG 2.0 even further, I decided to
release without that guide. The chapter on gpg-agent and gpgsm do
include brief information on how to set up the whole thing. Please
watch the GnuPG website for updates of the documentation. In the
meantime you may search the GnuPG mailing list archives or ask on the
gnupg-users mailing listsfor advise on how to solve problems or how to
get that whole thing up and running.
** Building the software
Building the software is decribed in the file @file{INSTALL}. Given
that you are already reading this documentation we can only give some
extra hints
To comply with the rules on GNU systems you should have build time
configured @command{gnupg} using:
@example
./configure --sysconfdir=/etc --localstatedir=/var
@end example
This is to make sure that system wide configuration files are searched
-in the directory @file{/etc/gnupg} and variable data below @file{/var};
+in the directory @file{/etc} and variable data below @file{/var};
the default would be to also install them below @file{/usr/local} where
the binaries get installed. If you selected to use the
@option{--prefix=/} you obviously don't need those option as they are
the default then.
** Notes on setting a root CA key to trusted
X.509 is based on a hierarchical key infrastructure. At the root of the
tree a trusted anchor (root certificate) is required. There are usually
no other means of verifying whether this root certificate is trustworthy
than looking it up in a list. GnuPG uses a file (@file{trustlist.txt})
to keep track of all root certificates it knows about. There are 3 ways
to get certificates into this list:
@itemize
@item
Use the list which comes with GnuPG. However this list only
contains a few root certificates. Most installations will need more.
@item
Let @command{gpgsm} ask you whether you want to insert a new root
certificate. This feature is enabled by default; you may disable it
using the option @option{no-allow-mark-trusted} into
@file{gpg-agent.conf}.
@item
Manually maintain the list of trusted root certificates. For a multi
user installation this can be done once for all users on a machine.
Specific changes on a per-user base are also possible.
@end itemize
@c decribe how to maintain trustlist.txt and /etc/gnupg/trustlist.txt.
@c ** How to get the ssh support running
@c
@c XXX How to use the ssh support.
@c @section Installation Overview
@c
@c XXXX
diff --git a/doc/mkdefsinc.c b/doc/mkdefsinc.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c4f776f31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/mkdefsinc.c
@@ -0,0 +1,306 @@
+/* mkdefsinc.c - Tool to create defs.inc
+ * Copyright (C) 2015 g10 Code GmbH
+ *
+ * This file is free software; as a special exception the author gives
+ * unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, with or without
+ * modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+ *
+ * This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+ * WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without even the
+ * implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+ */
+
+/* This tool needs to be build with command line supplied -D options
+ for the various directory variables. See ../am/cmacros.am. It is
+ easier to do this in build file than to use fragile make rules and
+ a template file. */
+
+
+#include
+#include
+#include
+#include
+#include
+#include
+#include
+#include
+
+#define PGM "mkdefsinc"
+
+/* We include config.h after all include files because the config.h
+ values are not valid for the build platform but we need some values
+ nevertheless. */
+#include "config.h"
+
+
+static int verbose;
+
+
+/* The usual free wrapper. */
+static void
+xfree (void *a)
+{
+ if (a)
+ free (a);
+}
+
+
+static char *
+xmalloc (size_t n)
+{
+ char *p;
+
+ p = malloc (n);
+ if (!p)
+ {
+ fputs (PGM ": out of core\n", stderr);
+ exit (1);
+ }
+ return p;
+}
+
+
+static char *
+xstrdup (const char *string)
+{
+ char *p;
+
+ p = xmalloc (strlen (string)+1);
+ strcpy (p, string);
+ return p;
+}
+
+
+/* Return a malloced string with the last modification date of the
+ FILES. Returns NULL on error. */
+static char *
+get_date_from_files (char **files)
+{
+ const char *file;
+ const char *usedfile = NULL;
+ struct stat sb;
+ struct tm *tp;
+ int errors = 0;
+ time_t stamp = 0;
+ char *result;
+
+ for (; (file = *files); files++)
+ {
+ if (!*file || !strcmp (file, ".") || !strcmp (file, ".."))
+ continue;
+ if (stat (file, &sb))
+ {
+ fprintf (stderr, PGM ": stat failed for '%s': %s\n",
+ file, strerror (errno));
+ errors = 1;
+ continue;
+ }
+ if (sb.st_mtime > stamp)
+ {
+ stamp = sb.st_mtime;
+ usedfile = file;
+ }
+ }
+ if (errors)
+ exit (1);
+
+ if (usedfile)
+ fprintf (stderr, PGM ": taking date from '%s'\n", usedfile);
+
+ tp = gmtime (&stamp);
+ if (!tp)
+ return NULL;
+ result = xmalloc (4+1+2+1+2+1);
+ snprintf (result, 4+1+2+1+2+1, "%04d-%02d-%02d",
+ tp->tm_year + 1900, tp->tm_mon+1, tp->tm_mday);
+ return result;
+}
+
+
+
+int
+main (int argc, char **argv)
+{
+ int last_argc = -1;
+ char *opt_date = NULL;
+ int monthoff;
+ char *p, *pend;
+ size_t n;
+
+ /* Option parsing. */
+ if (argc)
+ {
+ argc--; argv++;
+ }
+ while (argc && last_argc != argc )
+ {
+ last_argc = argc;
+ if (!strcmp (*argv, "--"))
+ {
+ argc--; argv++;
+ break;
+ }
+ else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--help"))
+ {
+ fputs ("Usage: " PGM " [OPTION] [FILES]\n"
+ "Create defs.inc file.\nOptions:\n"
+ " -C DIR Change to DIR before doing anything\n"
+ " --date STRING Take publication date from STRING\n"
+ " --verbose Enable extra informational output\n"
+ " --help Display this help and exit\n"
+ , stdout);
+ exit (0);
+ }
+ else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--verbose"))
+ {
+ verbose = 1;
+ argc--; argv++;
+ }
+ else if (!strcmp (*argv, "-C"))
+ {
+ argc--; argv++;
+ if (argc)
+ {
+ if (chdir (*argv))
+ {
+ fprintf (stderr, PGM ": chdir to '%s' failed: %s\n",
+ *argv, strerror (errno));
+ exit (1);
+ }
+ argc--; argv++;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--date"))
+ {
+ argc--; argv++;
+ if (argc)
+ {
+ opt_date = xstrdup (*argv);
+ argc--; argv++;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (!strncmp (*argv, "--", 2))
+ {
+ fprintf (stderr, PGM ": unknown option '%s'\n", *argv);
+ exit (1);
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (opt_date && *opt_date)
+ {
+ time_t stamp;
+ struct tm *tp;
+
+ if (*opt_date == '2' && strlen (opt_date) >= 10
+ && opt_date[4] == '-' && opt_date[7] == '-')
+ {
+ opt_date[10] = 0;
+ }
+ else if ((stamp = strtoul (opt_date, NULL, 10)) > 0
+ && (tp = gmtime (&stamp)))
+ {
+ p = xmalloc (4+1+2+1+2+1);
+ snprintf (p, 4+1+2+1+2+1, "%04d-%02d-%02d",
+ tp->tm_year + 1900, tp->tm_mon+1, tp->tm_mday);
+ xfree (opt_date);
+ opt_date = p;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ fprintf (stderr, PGM ": bad date '%s'\n", opt_date);
+ exit (1);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ xfree (opt_date);
+ opt_date = argc? get_date_from_files (argv) : NULL;
+ }
+ if (!opt_date)
+ {
+ opt_date = xstrdup ("unknown");
+ monthoff = 0;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ const char *month = "?";
+
+ switch (atoi (opt_date+5))
+ {
+ case 1: month = "January"; break;
+ case 2: month = "February"; break;
+ case 3: month = "March"; break;
+ case 4: month = "April"; break;
+ case 5: month = "May"; break;
+ case 6: month = "June"; break;
+ case 7: month = "July"; break;
+ case 8: month = "August"; break;
+ case 9: month = "September"; break;
+ case 10: month = "October"; break;
+ case 11: month = "November"; break;
+ case 12: month = "December"; break;
+ }
+ n = strlen (opt_date) + strlen (month) + 2 + 1;
+ p = xmalloc (n);
+ snprintf (p, n, "%d %n%s %d",
+ atoi (opt_date+8), &monthoff, month, atoi (opt_date));
+ xfree (opt_date);
+ opt_date = p;
+ }
+
+
+ fputs ("@c defs.inc -*- texinfo -*-\n"
+ "@c Common and build specific constants for the manuals.\n"
+ "@c This file has been created by " PGM ".\n", stdout);
+
+ fputs ("\n@c Directories\n\n", stdout);
+
+ fputs ("@set BINDIR " GNUPG_BINDIR "\n"
+ "@set LIBEXECDIR " GNUPG_LIBEXECDIR "\n"
+ "@set LIBDIR " GNUPG_LIBDIR "\n"
+ "@set DATADIR " GNUPG_DATADIR "\n"
+ "@set SYSCONFDIR " GNUPG_SYSCONFDIR "\n"
+ "@set LOCALSTATEDIR " GNUPG_LOCALSTATEDIR "\n"
+ "@set LOCALCACHEDIR " GNUPG_LOCALSTATEDIR
+ /* */ "/cache/" PACKAGE_NAME "\n"
+ "@set LOCALRUNDIR " GNUPG_LOCALSTATEDIR
+ /* */ "/run/" PACKAGE_NAME "\n"
+ , stdout);
+
+ p = xstrdup (GNUPG_SYSCONFDIR);
+ pend = strrchr (p, '/');
+ fputs ("@set SYSCONFSKELDIR ", stdout);
+ if (pend)
+ {
+ *pend = 0;
+ fputs (p, stdout);
+ }
+ fputs ("/skel/." PACKAGE_NAME "\n", stdout);
+ xfree (p);
+
+ fputs ("\n@c Version information a la version.texi\n\n", stdout);
+
+ printf ("@set UPDATED %s\n", opt_date);
+ printf ("@set UPDATED-MONTH %s\n", opt_date + monthoff);
+ printf ("@set EDITION %s\n", PACKAGE_VERSION);
+ printf ("@set VERSION %s\n", PACKAGE_VERSION);
+
+ fputs ("\n@c Algorithm defaults\n\n", stdout);
+
+ /* Fixme: Use a config.h macro here: */
+ fputs ("@set GPGSYMENCALGO AES-128\n", stdout);
+
+
+ fputs ("\n"
+ "@c Loc" "al Variables:\n"
+ "@c buffer-read-only: t\n"
+ "@c End:\n", stdout);
+
+ if (ferror (stdout))
+ {
+ fprintf (stderr, PGM ": error writing to stdout: %s\n", strerror (errno));
+ return 1;
+ }
+
+ return 0;
+}
diff --git a/doc/opt-homedir.texi b/doc/opt-homedir.texi
index 033a9016b..7bcce4637 100644
--- a/doc/opt-homedir.texi
+++ b/doc/opt-homedir.texi
@@ -1,22 +1,22 @@
@c This option is included at several places.
@item --homedir @var{dir}
@opindex homedir
Set the name of the home directory to @var{dir}. If this option is not
used, the home directory defaults to @file{~/.gnupg}. It is only
recognized when given on the command line. It also overrides any home
directory stated through the environment variable @env{GNUPGHOME} or
(on Windows systems) by means of the Registry entry
@var{HKCU\Software\GNU\GnuPG:HomeDir}.
On Windows systems it is possible to install GnuPG as a portable
application. In this case only this command line option is
considered, all other ways to set a home directory are ignored.
To install GnuPG as a portable application under Windows, create an
empty file name @file{gpgconf.ctl} in the same directory as the tool
@file{gpgconf.exe}. The root of the installation is than that
directory; or, if @file{gpgconf.exe} has been installed directly below
a directory named @file{bin}, its parent directory. You also need to
make sure that the following directories exist and are writable:
-@file{ROOT/home} for the GnuPG home and @file{ROOT/var/cache/gnupg}
+@file{ROOT/home} for the GnuPG home and @file{ROOT@value{LOCALCACHEDIR}}
for internal cache files.
diff --git a/doc/scdaemon.texi b/doc/scdaemon.texi
index 79a5fccd5..7f1058bd8 100644
--- a/doc/scdaemon.texi
+++ b/doc/scdaemon.texi
@@ -1,761 +1,763 @@
@c Copyright (C) 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
@c This is part of the GnuPG manual.
@c For copying conditions, see the file gnupg.texi.
+@include defs.inc
+
@node Invoking SCDAEMON
@chapter Invoking the SCDAEMON
@cindex SCDAEMON command options
@cindex command options
@cindex options, SCDAEMON command
@manpage scdaemon.1
@ifset manverb
.B scdaemon
\- Smartcard daemon for the GnuPG system
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B scdaemon
.RB [ \-\-homedir
.IR dir ]
.RB [ \-\-options
.IR file ]
.RI [ options ]
.B \-\-server
.br
.B scdaemon
.RB [ \-\-homedir
.IR dir ]
.RB [ \-\-options
.IR file ]
.RI [ options ]
.B \-\-daemon
.RI [ command_line ]
@end ifset
@mansect description
The @command{scdaemon} is a daemon to manage smartcards. It is usually
invoked by @command{gpg-agent} and in general not used directly.
@manpause
@xref{Option Index}, for an index to @command{scdaemon}'s commands and
options.
@mancont
@menu
* Scdaemon Commands:: List of all commands.
* Scdaemon Options:: List of all options.
* Card applications:: Description of card applications.
* Scdaemon Configuration:: Configuration files.
* Scdaemon Examples:: Some usage examples.
* Scdaemon Protocol:: The protocol the daemon uses.
@end menu
@mansect commands
@node Scdaemon Commands
@section Commands
Commands are not distinguished from options except for the fact that
only one command is allowed.
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --version
@opindex version
Print the program version and licensing information. Not that you can
abbreviate this command.
@item --help, -h
@opindex help
Print a usage message summarizing the most useful command-line options.
Not that you can abbreviate this command.
@item --dump-options
@opindex dump-options
Print a list of all available options and commands. Not that you can
abbreviate this command.
@item --server
@opindex server
Run in server mode and wait for commands on the @code{stdin}. This is
default mode is to create a socket and listen for commands there.
@item --multi-server
@opindex multi-server
Run in server mode and wait for commands on the @code{stdin} as well as
on an additional Unix Domain socket. The server command @code{GETINFO}
may be used to get the name of that extra socket.
@item --daemon
@opindex daemon
Run the program in the background. This option is required to prevent
it from being accidentally running in the background.
@end table
@mansect options
@node Scdaemon Options
@section Option Summary
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --options @var{file}
@opindex options
Reads configuration from @var{file} instead of from the default
per-user configuration file. The default configuration file is named
@file{scdaemon.conf} and expected in the @file{.gnupg} directory directly
below the home directory of the user.
@include opt-homedir.texi
@item -v
@item --verbose
@opindex v
@opindex verbose
Outputs additional information while running.
You can increase the verbosity by giving several
verbose commands to @command{gpgsm}, such as @samp{-vv}.
@item --debug-level @var{level}
@opindex debug-level
Select the debug level for investigating problems. @var{level} may be
a numeric value or a keyword:
@table @code
@item none
No debugging at all. A value of less than 1 may be used instead of
the keyword.
@item basic
Some basic debug messages. A value between 1 and 2 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item advanced
More verbose debug messages. A value between 3 and 5 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item expert
Even more detailed messages. A value between 6 and 8 may be used
instead of the keyword.
@item guru
All of the debug messages you can get. A value greater than 8 may be
used instead of the keyword. The creation of hash tracing files is
only enabled if the keyword is used.
@end table
How these messages are mapped to the actual debugging flags is not
specified and may change with newer releases of this program. They are
however carefully selected to best aid in debugging.
@quotation Note
All debugging options are subject to change and thus should not be used
by any application program. As the name says, they are only used as
helpers to debug problems.
@end quotation
@item --debug @var{flags}
@opindex debug
This option is only useful for debugging and the behaviour may change at
any time without notice. FLAGS are bit encoded and may be given in
usual C-Syntax. The currently defined bits are:
@table @code
@item 0 (1)
command I/O
@item 1 (2)
values of big number integers
@item 2 (4)
low level crypto operations
@item 5 (32)
memory allocation
@item 6 (64)
caching
@item 7 (128)
show memory statistics.
@item 9 (512)
write hashed data to files named @code{dbgmd-000*}
@item 10 (1024)
trace Assuan protocol.
See also option @option{--debug-assuan-log-cats}.
@item 11 (2048)
trace APDU I/O to the card. This may reveal sensitive data.
@item 12 (4096)
trace some card reader related function calls.
@end table
@item --debug-all
@opindex debug-all
Same as @code{--debug=0xffffffff}
@item --debug-wait @var{n}
@opindex debug-wait
When running in server mode, wait @var{n} seconds before entering the
actual processing loop and print the pid. This gives time to attach a
debugger.
@item --debug-ccid-driver
@opindex debug-wait
Enable debug output from the included CCID driver for smartcards.
Using this option twice will also enable some tracing of the T=1
protocol. Note that this option may reveal sensitive data.
@item --debug-disable-ticker
@opindex debug-disable-ticker
This option disables all ticker functions like checking for card
insertions.
@item --debug-allow-core-dump
@opindex debug-allow-core-dump
For security reasons we won't create a core dump when the process
aborts. For debugging purposes it is sometimes better to allow core
dump. This options enables it and also changes the working directory to
@file{/tmp} when running in @option{--server} mode.
@item --debug-log-tid
@opindex debug-log-tid
This option appends a thread ID to the PID in the log output.
@item --debug-assuan-log-cats @var{cats}
@opindex debug-assuan-log-cats
Changes the active Libassuan logging categories to @var{cats}. The
value for @var{cats} is an unsigned integer given in usual C-Syntax.
A value of of 0 switches to a default category. If this option is not
used the categories are taken from the environment variable
@samp{ASSUAN_DEBUG}. Note that this option has only an effect if the
Assuan debug flag has also been with the option @option{--debug}. For
a list of categories see the Libassuan manual.
@item --no-detach
@opindex no-detach
Don't detach the process from the console. This is mainly useful for
debugging.
@item --log-file @var{file}
@opindex log-file
Append all logging output to @var{file}. This is very helpful in
seeing what the agent actually does.
@item --pcsc-driver @var{library}
@opindex pcsc-driver
Use @var{library} to access the smartcard reader. The current default
is @file{libpcsclite.so}. Instead of using this option you might also
want to install a symbolic link to the default file name
(e.g. from @file{libpcsclite.so.1}).
@item --ctapi-driver @var{library}
@opindex ctapi-driver
Use @var{library} to access the smartcard reader. The current default
is @file{libtowitoko.so}. Note that the use of this interface is
deprecated; it may be removed in future releases.
@item --disable-ccid
@opindex disable-ccid
Disable the integrated support for CCID compliant readers. This
allows to fall back to one of the other drivers even if the internal
CCID driver can handle the reader. Note, that CCID support is only
available if libusb was available at build time.
@item --reader-port @var{number_or_string}
@opindex reader-port
This option may be used to specify the port of the card terminal. A
value of 0 refers to the first serial device; add 32768 to access USB
devices. The default is 32768 (first USB device). PC/SC or CCID
readers might need a string here; run the program in verbose mode to get
a list of available readers. The default is then the first reader
found.
To get a list of available CCID readers you may use this command:
@cartouche
@smallexample
echo scd getinfo reader_list \
| gpg-connect-agent --decode | awk '/^D/ @{print $2@}'
@end smallexample
@end cartouche
@item --card-timeout @var{n}
@opindex card-timeout
If @var{n} is not 0 and no client is actively using the card, the card
will be powered down after @var{n} seconds. Powering down the card
avoids a potential risk of damaging a card when used with certain
cheap readers. This also allows non Scdaemon aware applications to
access the card. The disadvantage of using a card timeout is that
accessing the card takes longer and that the user needs to enter the
PIN again after the next power up.
Note that with the current version of Scdaemon the card is powered
down immediately at the next timer tick for any value of @var{n} other
than 0.
@item --enable-pinpad-varlen
@opindex enable-pinpad-varlen
Please specify this option when the card reader supports variable
length input for pinpad (default is no). For known readers (listed in
ccid-driver.c and apdu.c), this option is not needed. Note that if
your card reader doesn't supports variable length input but you want
to use it, you need to specify your pinpad request on your card.
@item --disable-pinpad
@opindex disable-pinpad
Even if a card reader features a pinpad, do not try to use it.
@item --deny-admin
@opindex deny-admin
@opindex allow-admin
This option disables the use of admin class commands for card
applications where this is supported. Currently we support it for the
OpenPGP card. This commands is useful to inhibit accidental access to
admin class command which could ultimately lock the card through wrong
PIN numbers. Note that GnuPG versions older than 2.0.11 featured an
@option{--allow-admin} command which was required to use such admin
commands. This option has no more effect today because the default is
now to allow admin commands.
@item --disable-application @var{name}
@opindex disable-application
This option disables the use of the card application named
@var{name}. This is mainly useful for debugging or if a application
with lower priority should be used by default.
@end table
All the long options may also be given in the configuration file after
stripping off the two leading dashes.
@mansect card applications
@node Card applications
@section Description of card applications
@command{scdaemon} supports the card applications as described below.
@menu
* OpenPGP Card:: The OpenPGP card application
* NKS Card:: The Telesec NetKey card application
* DINSIG Card:: The DINSIG card application
* PKCS#15 Card:: The PKCS#15 card application
* Geldkarte Card:: The Geldkarte application
* SmartCard-HSM:: The SmartCard-HSM application
* Undefined Card:: The Undefined stub application
@end menu
@node OpenPGP Card
@subsection The OpenPGP card application ``openpgp''
This application is currently only used by @command{gpg} but may in
future also be useful with @command{gpgsm}. Version 1 and version 2 of
the card is supported.
@noindent
The specifications for these cards are available at@*
@uref{http://g10code.com/docs/openpgp-card-1.0.pdf} and@*
@uref{http://g10code.com/docs/openpgp-card-2.0.pdf}.
@node NKS Card
@subsection The Telesec NetKey card ``nks''
This is the main application of the Telesec cards as available in
Germany. It is a superset of the German DINSIG card. The card is
used by @command{gpgsm}.
@node DINSIG Card
@subsection The DINSIG card application ``dinsig''
This is an application as described in the German draft standard
@emph{DIN V 66291-1}. It is intended to be used by cards supporting
the German signature law and its bylaws (SigG and SigV).
@node PKCS#15 Card
@subsection The PKCS#15 card application ``p15''
This is common framework for smart card applications. It is used by
@command{gpgsm}.
@node Geldkarte Card
@subsection The Geldkarte card application ``geldkarte''
This is a simple application to display information of a German
Geldkarte. The Geldkarte is a small amount debit card application which
comes with almost all German banking cards.
@node SmartCard-HSM
@subsection The SmartCard-HSM card application ``sc-hsm''
This application adds read/only support for keys and certificates
stored on a @uref{http://www.smartcard-hsm.com, SmartCard-HSM}.
To generate keys and store certifiates you may use
@uref{https://github.com/OpenSC/OpenSC/wiki/SmartCardHSM, OpenSC} or
the tools from @uref{http://www.openscdp.org, OpenSCDP}.
The SmartCard-HSM cards requires a card reader that supports Extended
Length APDUs.
@node Undefined Card
@subsection The Undefined card application ``undefined''
This is a stub application to allow the use of the APDU command even
if no supported application is found on the card. This application is
not used automatically but must be explicitly requested using the
SERIALNO command.
@c *******************************************
@c *************** ****************
@c *************** FILES ****************
@c *************** ****************
@c *******************************************
@mansect files
@node Scdaemon Configuration
@section Configuration files
There are a few configuration files to control certain aspects of
@command{scdaemons}'s operation. Unless noted, they are expected in the
current home directory (@pxref{option --homedir}).
@table @file
@item scdaemon.conf
@cindex scdaemon.conf
This is the standard configuration file read by @command{scdaemon} on
startup. It may contain any valid long option; the leading two dashes
may not be entered and the option may not be abbreviated. This default
name may be changed on the command line (@pxref{option --options}).
@item scd-event
@cindex scd-event
If this file is present and executable, it will be called on veyer card
reader's status changed. An example of this script is provided with the
distribution
@item reader_@var{n}.status
This file is created by @command{sdaemon} to let other applications now
about reader status changes. Its use is now deprecated in favor of
@file{scd-event}.
@end table
@c
@c Examples
@c
@mansect examples
@node Scdaemon Examples
@section Examples
@c man begin EXAMPLES
@example
$ scdaemon --server -v
@end example
@c man end
@c
@c Assuan Protocol
@c
@manpause
@node Scdaemon Protocol
@section Scdaemon's Assuan Protocol
The SC-Daemon should be started by the system to provide access to
external tokens. Using Smartcards on a multi-user system does not
make much sense expect for system services, but in this case no
regular user accounts are hosted on the machine.
A client connects to the SC-Daemon by connecting to the socket named
-@file{/var/run/scdaemon/socket}, configuration information is read from
-@var{/etc/scdaemon.conf}
+@file{@value{LOCALRUNDIR}/scdaemon/socket}, configuration information
+is read from @var{@value{SYSCONFDIR}/scdaemon.conf}
Each connection acts as one session, SC-Daemon takes care of
synchronizing access to a token between sessions.
@menu
* Scdaemon SERIALNO:: Return the serial number.
* Scdaemon LEARN:: Read all useful information from the card.
* Scdaemon READCERT:: Return a certificate.
* Scdaemon READKEY:: Return a public key.
* Scdaemon PKSIGN:: Signing data with a Smartcard.
* Scdaemon PKDECRYPT:: Decrypting data with a Smartcard.
* Scdaemon GETATTR:: Read an attribute's value.
* Scdaemon SETATTR:: Update an attribute's value.
* Scdaemon WRITEKEY:: Write a key to a card.
* Scdaemon GENKEY:: Generate a new key on-card.
* Scdaemon RANDOM:: Return random bytes generate on-card.
* Scdaemon PASSWD:: Change PINs.
* Scdaemon CHECKPIN:: Perform a VERIFY operation.
* Scdaemon RESTART:: Restart connection
* Scdaemon APDU:: Send a verbatim APDU to the card
@end menu
@node Scdaemon SERIALNO
@subsection Return the serial number
This command should be used to check for the presence of a card. It is
special in that it can be used to reset the card. Most other commands
will return an error when a card change has been detected and the use of
this function is therefore required.
Background: We want to keep the client clear of handling card changes
between operations; i.e. the client can assume that all operations are
done on the same card unless he call this function.
@example
SERIALNO
@end example
Return the serial number of the card using a status response like:
@example
S SERIALNO D27600000000000000000000 0
@end example
The trailing 0 should be ignored for now, it is reserved for a future
extension. The serial number is the hex encoded value identified by
the @code{0x5A} tag in the GDO file (FIX=0x2F02).
@node Scdaemon LEARN
@subsection Read all useful information from the card
@example
LEARN [--force]
@end example
Learn all useful information of the currently inserted card. When
used without the force options, the command might do an INQUIRE
like this:
@example
INQUIRE KNOWNCARDP
@end example
The client should just send an @code{END} if the processing should go on
or a @code{CANCEL} to force the function to terminate with a cancel
error message. The response of this command is a list of status lines
formatted as this:
@example
S KEYPAIRINFO @var{hexstring_with_keygrip} @var{hexstring_with_id}
@end example
If there is no certificate yet stored on the card a single "X" is
returned in @var{hexstring_with_keygrip}.
@node Scdaemon READCERT
@subsection Return a certificate
@example
READCERT @var{hexified_certid}|@var{keyid}
@end example
This function is used to read a certificate identified by
@var{hexified_certid} from the card. With OpenPGP cards the keyid
@code{OpenPGP.3} may be used to rad the certificate of version 2 cards.
@node Scdaemon READKEY
@subsection Return a public key
@example
READKEY @var{hexified_certid}
@end example
Return the public key for the given cert or key ID as an standard
S-Expression.
@node Scdaemon PKSIGN
@subsection Signing data with a Smartcard
To sign some data the caller should use the command
@example
SETDATA @var{hexstring}
@end example
to tell @command{scdaemon} about the data to be signed. The data must be given in
hex notation. The actual signing is done using the command
@example
PKSIGN @var{keyid}
@end example
where @var{keyid} is the hexified ID of the key to be used. The key id
may have been retrieved using the command @code{LEARN}. If another
hash algorithm than SHA-1 is used, that algorithm may be given like:
@example
PKSIGN --hash=@var{algoname} @var{keyid}
@end example
With @var{algoname} are one of @code{sha1}, @code{rmd160} or @code{md5}.
@node Scdaemon PKDECRYPT
@subsection Decrypting data with a Smartcard
To decrypt some data the caller should use the command
@example
SETDATA @var{hexstring}
@end example
to tell @command{scdaemon} about the data to be decrypted. The data
must be given in hex notation. The actual decryption is then done
using the command
@example
PKDECRYPT @var{keyid}
@end example
where @var{keyid} is the hexified ID of the key to be used.
If the card is ware of the apdding format a status line with padding
information is send before the plaintext data. The key for this
status line is @code{PADDING} with the only defined value being 0 and
meaning padding has been removed.
@node Scdaemon GETATTR
@subsection Read an attribute's value.
TO BE WRITTEN.
@node Scdaemon SETATTR
@subsection Update an attribute's value.
TO BE WRITTEN.
@node Scdaemon WRITEKEY
@subsection Write a key to a card.
@example
WRITEKEY [--force] @var{keyid}
@end example
This command is used to store a secret key on a smartcard. The
allowed keyids depend on the currently selected smartcard
application. The actual keydata is requested using the inquiry
@code{KEYDATA} and need to be provided without any protection. With
@option{--force} set an existing key under this @var{keyid} will get
overwritten. The key data is expected to be the usual canonical encoded
S-expression.
A PIN will be requested in most cases. This however depends on the
actual card application.
@node Scdaemon GENKEY
@subsection Generate a new key on-card.
TO BE WRITTEN.
@node Scdaemon RANDOM
@subsection Return random bytes generate on-card.
TO BE WRITTEN.
@node Scdaemon PASSWD
@subsection Change PINs.
@example
PASSWD [--reset] [--nullpin] @var{chvno}
@end example
Change the PIN or reset the retry counter of the card holder
verification vector number @var{chvno}. The option @option{--nullpin}
is used to initialize the PIN of TCOS cards (6 byte NullPIN only).
@node Scdaemon CHECKPIN
@subsection Perform a VERIFY operation.
@example
CHECKPIN @var{idstr}
@end example
Perform a VERIFY operation without doing anything else. This may be
used to initialize a the PIN cache earlier to long lasting
operations. Its use is highly application dependent:
@table @strong
@item OpenPGP
Perform a simple verify operation for CHV1 and CHV2, so that further
operations won't ask for CHV2 and it is possible to do a cheap check on
the PIN: If there is something wrong with the PIN entry system, only the
regular CHV will get blocked and not the dangerous CHV3. @var{idstr} is
the usual card's serial number in hex notation; an optional fingerprint
part will get ignored.
There is however a special mode if @var{idstr} is suffixed with the
literal string @code{[CHV3]}: In this case the Admin PIN is checked if
and only if the retry counter is still at 3.
@end table
@node Scdaemon RESTART
@subsection Perform a RESTART operation.
@example
RESTART
@end example
Restart the current connection; this is a kind of warm reset. It
deletes the context used by this connection but does not actually
reset the card.
This is used by gpg-agent to reuse a primary pipe connection and
may be used by clients to backup from a conflict in the serial
command; i.e. to select another application.
@node Scdaemon APDU
@subsection Send a verbatim APDU to the card.
@example
APDU [--atr] [--more] [--exlen[=@var{n}]] [@var{hexstring}]
@end example
Send an APDU to the current reader. This command bypasses the high
level functions and sends the data directly to the card.
@var{hexstring} is expected to be a proper APDU. If @var{hexstring} is
not given no commands are send to the card; However the command will
implicitly check whether the card is ready for use.
Using the option @code{--atr} returns the ATR of the card as a status
message before any data like this:
@example
S CARD-ATR 3BFA1300FF813180450031C173C00100009000B1
@end example
Using the option @code{--more} handles the card status word MORE_DATA
(61xx) and concatenate all responses to one block.
Using the option @code{--exlen} the returned APDU may use extended
length up to N bytes. If N is not given a default value is used
(currently 4096).
@mansect see also
@ifset isman
@command{gpg-agent}(1),
@command{gpgsm}(1),
@command{gpg2}(1)
@end ifset
@include see-also-note.texi
diff --git a/doc/tools.texi b/doc/tools.texi
index 7bf5066bf..a067eb66f 100644
--- a/doc/tools.texi
+++ b/doc/tools.texi
@@ -1,1930 +1,1932 @@
@c Copyright (C) 2004, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
@c This is part of the GnuPG manual.
@c For copying conditions, see the file GnuPG.texi.
+@include defs.inc
+
@node Helper Tools
@chapter Helper Tools
GnuPG comes with a couple of smaller tools:
@menu
* watchgnupg:: Read logs from a socket.
* gpgv:: Verify OpenPGP signatures.
* addgnupghome:: Create .gnupg home directories.
* gpgconf:: Modify .gnupg home directories.
* applygnupgdefaults:: Run gpgconf for all users.
* gpgsm-gencert.sh:: Generate an X.509 certificate request.
* gpg-preset-passphrase:: Put a passphrase into the cache.
* gpg-connect-agent:: Communicate with a running agent.
* dirmngr-client:: How to use the Dirmngr client tool.
* gpgparsemail:: Parse a mail message into an annotated format
* symcryptrun:: Call a simple symmetric encryption tool.
* gpg-zip:: Encrypt or sign files into an archive.
@end menu
@c
@c WATCHGNUPG
@c
@manpage watchgnupg.1
@node watchgnupg
@section Read logs from a socket
@ifset manverb
.B watchgnupg
\- Read and print logs from a socket
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B watchgnupg
.RB [ \-\-force ]
.RB [ \-\-verbose ]
.I socketname
@end ifset
@mansect description
Most of the main utilities are able to write their log files to a Unix
Domain socket if configured that way. @command{watchgnupg} is a simple
listener for such a socket. It ameliorates the output with a time stamp
and makes sure that long lines are not interspersed with log output from
other utilities. This tool is not available for Windows.
@noindent
@command{watchgnupg} is commonly invoked as
@example
watchgnupg --force ~/.gnupg/S.log
@end example
@manpause
@noindent
This starts it on the current terminal for listening on the socket
@file{~/.gnupg/S.log}.
@mansect options
@noindent
@command{watchgnupg} understands these options:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --force
@opindex force
Delete an already existing socket file.
@anchor{option watchgnupg --tcp}
@item --tcp @var{n}
Instead of reading from a local socket, listen for connects on TCP port
@var{n}.
@item --verbose
@opindex verbose
Enable extra informational output.
@item --version
@opindex version
Print version of the program and exit.
@item --help
@opindex help
Display a brief help page and exit.
@end table
@noindent
@mansect examples
@chapheading Examples
@example
$ watchgnupg --force /home/foo/.gnupg/S.log
@end example
This waits for connections on the local socket
@file{/home/foo/.gnupg/S.log} and shows all log entries. To make this
work the option @option{log-file} needs to be used with all modules
which logs are to be shown. The value for that option must be given
with a special prefix (e.g. in the conf file):
@example
log-file socket:///home/foo/.gnupg/S.log
@end example
For debugging purposes it is also possible to do remote logging. Take
care if you use this feature because the information is send in the
clear over the network. Use this syntax in the conf files:
@example
log-file tcp://192.168.1.1:4711
@end example
You may use any port and not just 4711 as shown above; only IP addresses
are supported (v4 and v6) and no host names. You need to start
@command{watchgnupg} with the @option{tcp} option. Note that under
Windows the registry entry @var{HKCU\Software\GNU\GnuPG:DefaultLogFile}
can be used to change the default log output from @code{stderr} to
whatever is given by that entry. However the only useful entry is a TCP
name for remote debugging.
@mansect see also
@ifset isman
@command{gpg}(1),
@command{gpgsm}(1),
@command{gpg-agent}(1),
@command{scdaemon}(1)
@end ifset
@include see-also-note.texi
@c
@c GPGV
@c
@include gpgv.texi
@c
@c ADDGNUPGHOME
@c
@manpage addgnupghome.8
@node addgnupghome
@section Create .gnupg home directories.
@ifset manverb
.B addgnupghome
\- Create .gnupg home directories
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B addgnupghome
.I account_1
.IR account_2 ... account_n
@end ifset
@mansect description
If GnuPG is installed on a system with existing user accounts, it is
sometimes required to populate the GnuPG home directory with existing
files. Especially a @file{trustlist.txt} and a keybox with some
initial certificates are often desired. This scripts help to do this
by copying all files from @file{/etc/skel/.gnupg} to the home
directories of the accounts given on the command line. It takes care
not to overwrite existing GnuPG home directories.
@noindent
@command{addgnupghome} is invoked by root as:
@example
addgnupghome account1 account2 ... accountn
@end example
@c
@c GPGCONF
@c
@manpage gpgconf.1
@node gpgconf
@section Modify .gnupg home directories.
@ifset manverb
.B gpgconf
\- Modify .gnupg home directories
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B gpgconf
.RI [ options ]
.B \-\-list-components
.br
.B gpgconf
.RI [ options ]
.B \-\-list-options
.I component
.br
.B gpgconf
.RI [ options ]
.B \-\-change-options
.I component
@end ifset
@mansect description
The @command{gpgconf} is a utility to automatically and reasonable
safely query and modify configuration files in the @file{.gnupg} home
directory. It is designed not to be invoked manually by the user, but
automatically by graphical user interfaces (GUI).@footnote{Please note
that currently no locking is done, so concurrent access should be
avoided. There are some precautions to avoid corruption with
concurrent usage, but results may be inconsistent and some changes may
get lost. The stateless design makes it difficult to provide more
guarantees.}
@command{gpgconf} provides access to the configuration of one or more
components of the GnuPG system. These components correspond more or
less to the programs that exist in the GnuPG framework, like GnuPG,
GPGSM, DirMngr, etc. But this is not a strict one-to-one
relationship. Not all configuration options are available through
@command{gpgconf}. @command{gpgconf} provides a generic and abstract
method to access the most important configuration options that can
feasibly be controlled via such a mechanism.
@command{gpgconf} can be used to gather and change the options
available in each component, and can also provide their default
values. @command{gpgconf} will give detailed type information that
can be used to restrict the user's input without making an attempt to
commit the changes.
@command{gpgconf} provides the backend of a configuration editor. The
configuration editor would usually be a graphical user interface
program, that allows to display the current options, their default
values, and allows the user to make changes to the options. These
changes can then be made active with @command{gpgconf} again. Such a
program that uses @command{gpgconf} in this way will be called GUI
throughout this section.
@menu
* Invoking gpgconf:: List of all commands and options.
* Format conventions:: Formatting conventions relevant for all commands.
* Listing components:: List all gpgconf components.
* Checking programs:: Check all programs know to gpgconf.
* Listing options:: List all options of a component.
* Changing options:: Changing options of a component.
* Listing global options:: List all global options.
* Files used by gpgconf:: What files are used by gpgconf.
@end menu
@manpause
@node Invoking gpgconf
@subsection Invoking gpgconf
@mansect commands
One of the following commands must be given:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --list-components
List all components. This is the default command used if none is
specified.
@item --check-programs
List all available backend programs and test whether they are runnable.
@item --list-options @var{component}
List all options of the component @var{component}.
@item --change-options @var{component}
Change the options of the component @var{component}.
@item --check-options @var{component}
Check the options for the component @var{component}.
@item --apply-defaults
Update all configuration files with values taken from the global
configuration file (usually @file{/etc/gnupg/gpgconf.conf}).
@item --list-dirs
Lists the directories used by @command{gpgconf}. One directory is
listed per line, and each line consists of a colon-separated list where
the first field names the directory type (for example @code{sysconfdir})
and the second field contains the percent-escaped directory. Although
they are not directories, the socket file names used by
@command{gpg-agent} and @command{dirmngr} are printed as well. Note
that the socket file names and the @code{homedir} lines are the default
names and they may be overridden by command line switches.
@item --list-config [@var{filename}]
List the global configuration file in a colon separated format. If
@var{filename} is given, check that file instead.
@item --check-config [@var{filename}]
Run a syntax check on the global configuration file. If @var{filename}
is given, check that file instead.
@item --reload [@var{component}]
@opindex reload
Reload all or the given component. This is basically the same as sending
a SIGHUP to the component. Components which don't support reloading are
ignored.
@item --launch [@var{component}]
@opindex launch
If the @var{component} is not already running, start it.
@command{component} must be a daemon. This is in general not required
because the system starts these daemons as needed. However, external
software making direct use of @command{gpg-agent} or @command{dirmngr}
may use this command to ensure that they are started.
@item --kill [@var{component}]
@opindex kill
Kill the given component. Components which support killing are
gpg-agent and scdaemon. Components which don't support reloading are
ignored. Note that as of now reload and kill have the same effect for
scdaemon.
@end table
@mansect options
The following options may be used:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item -o @var{file}
@itemx --output @var{file}
Write output to @var{file}. Default is to write to stdout.
@item -v
@itemx --verbose
Outputs additional information while running. Specifically, this
extends numerical field values by human-readable descriptions.
@item -q
@itemx --quiet
@opindex quiet
Try to be as quiet as possible.
@item -n
@itemx --dry-run
Do not actually change anything. This is currently only implemented
for @code{--change-options} and can be used for testing purposes.
@item -r
@itemx --runtime
Only used together with @code{--change-options}. If one of the
modified options can be changed in a running daemon process, signal
the running daemon to ask it to reparse its configuration file after
changing.
This means that the changes will take effect at run-time, as far as
this is possible. Otherwise, they will take effect at the next start
of the respective backend programs.
@manpause
@end table
@node Format conventions
@subsection Format conventions
Some lines in the output of @command{gpgconf} contain a list of
colon-separated fields. The following conventions apply:
@itemize @bullet
@item
The GUI program is required to strip off trailing newline and/or
carriage return characters from the output.
@item
@command{gpgconf} will never leave out fields. If a certain version
provides a certain field, this field will always be present in all
@command{gpgconf} versions from that time on.
@item
Future versions of @command{gpgconf} might append fields to the list.
New fields will always be separated from the previously last field by
a colon separator. The GUI should be prepared to parse the last field
it knows about up until a colon or end of line.
@item
Not all fields are defined under all conditions. You are required to
ignore the content of undefined fields.
@end itemize
There are several standard types for the content of a field:
@table @asis
@item verbatim
Some fields contain strings that are not escaped in any way. Such
fields are described to be used @emph{verbatim}. These fields will
never contain a colon character (for obvious reasons). No de-escaping
or other formatting is required to use the field content. This is for
easy parsing of the output, when it is known that the content can
never contain any special characters.
@item percent-escaped
Some fields contain strings that are described to be
@emph{percent-escaped}. Such strings need to be de-escaped before
their content can be presented to the user. A percent-escaped string
is de-escaped by replacing all occurrences of @code{%XY} by the byte
that has the hexadecimal value @code{XY}. @code{X} and @code{Y} are
from the set @code{0-9a-f}.
@item localised
Some fields contain strings that are described to be @emph{localised}.
Such strings are translated to the active language and formatted in
the active character set.
@item @w{unsigned number}
Some fields contain an @emph{unsigned number}. This number will
always fit into a 32-bit unsigned integer variable. The number may be
followed by a space, followed by a human readable description of that
value (if the verbose option is used). You should ignore everything
in the field that follows the number.
@item @w{signed number}
Some fields contain a @emph{signed number}. This number will always
fit into a 32-bit signed integer variable. The number may be followed
by a space, followed by a human readable description of that value (if
the verbose option is used). You should ignore everything in the
field that follows the number.
@item @w{boolean value}
Some fields contain a @emph{boolean value}. This is a number with
either the value 0 or 1. The number may be followed by a space,
followed by a human readable description of that value (if the verbose
option is used). You should ignore everything in the field that follows
the number; checking just the first character is sufficient in this
case.
@item option
Some fields contain an @emph{option} argument. The format of an
option argument depends on the type of the option and on some flags:
@table @asis
@item no argument
The simplest case is that the option does not take an argument at all
(@var{type} @code{0}). Then the option argument is an unsigned number
that specifies how often the option occurs. If the @code{list} flag
is not set, then the only valid number is @code{1}. Options that do
not take an argument never have the @code{default} or @code{optional
arg} flag set.
@item number
If the option takes a number argument (@var{alt-type} is @code{2} or
@code{3}), and it can only occur once (@code{list} flag is not set),
then the option argument is either empty (only allowed if the argument
is optional), or it is a number. A number is a string that begins
with an optional minus character, followed by one or more digits. The
number must fit into an integer variable (unsigned or signed,
depending on @var{alt-type}).
@item number list
If the option takes a number argument and it can occur more than once,
then the option argument is either empty, or it is a comma-separated
list of numbers as described above.
@item string
If the option takes a string argument (@var{alt-type} is 1), and it
can only occur once (@code{list} flag is not set) then the option
argument is either empty (only allowed if the argument is optional),
or it starts with a double quote character (@code{"}) followed by a
percent-escaped string that is the argument value. Note that there is
only a leading double quote character, no trailing one. The double
quote character is only needed to be able to differentiate between no
value and the empty string as value.
@item string list
If the option takes a number argument and it can occur more than once,
then the option argument is either empty, or it is a comma-separated
list of string arguments as described above.
@end table
@end table
The active language and character set are currently determined from
the locale environment of the @command{gpgconf} program.
@c FIXME: Document the active language and active character set. Allow
@c to change it via the command line?
@mansect usage
@node Listing components
@subsection Listing components
The command @code{--list-components} will list all components that can
be configured with @command{gpgconf}. Usually, one component will
correspond to one GnuPG-related program and contain the options of
that programs configuration file that can be modified using
@command{gpgconf}. However, this is not necessarily the case. A
component might also be a group of selected options from several
programs, or contain entirely virtual options that have a special
effect rather than changing exactly one option in one configuration
file.
A component is a set of configuration options that semantically belong
together. Furthermore, several changes to a component can be made in
an atomic way with a single operation. The GUI could for example
provide a menu with one entry for each component, or a window with one
tabulator sheet per component.
The command argument @code{--list-components} lists all available
components, one per line. The format of each line is:
@code{@var{name}:@var{description}:@var{pgmname}:}
@table @var
@item name
This field contains a name tag of the component. The name tag is used
to specify the component in all communication with @command{gpgconf}.
The name tag is to be used @emph{verbatim}. It is thus not in any
escaped format.
@item description
The @emph{string} in this field contains a human-readable description
of the component. It can be displayed to the user of the GUI for
informational purposes. It is @emph{percent-escaped} and
@emph{localized}.
@item pgmname
The @emph{string} in this field contains the absolute name of the
program's file. It can be used to unambiguously invoke that program.
It is @emph{percent-escaped}.
@end table
Example:
@example
$ gpgconf --list-components
gpg:GPG for OpenPGP:/usr/local/bin/gpg2:
gpg-agent:GPG Agent:/usr/local/bin/gpg-agent:
scdaemon:Smartcard Daemon:/usr/local/bin/scdaemon:
gpgsm:GPG for S/MIME:/usr/local/bin/gpgsm:
dirmngr:Directory Manager:/usr/local/bin/dirmngr:
@end example
@node Checking programs
@subsection Checking programs
The command @code{--check-programs} is similar to
@code{--list-components} but works on backend programs and not on
components. It runs each program to test whether it is installed and
runnable. This also includes a syntax check of all config file options
of the program.
The command argument @code{--check-programs} lists all available
programs, one per line. The format of each line is:
@code{@var{name}:@var{description}:@var{pgmname}:@var{avail}:@var{okay}:@var{cfgfile}:@var{line}:@var{error}:}
@table @var
@item name
This field contains a name tag of the program which is identical to the
name of the component. The name tag is to be used @emph{verbatim}. It
is thus not in any escaped format. This field may be empty to indicate
a continuation of error descriptions for the last name. The description
and pgmname fields are then also empty.
@item description
The @emph{string} in this field contains a human-readable description
of the component. It can be displayed to the user of the GUI for
informational purposes. It is @emph{percent-escaped} and
@emph{localized}.
@item pgmname
The @emph{string} in this field contains the absolute name of the
program's file. It can be used to unambiguously invoke that program.
It is @emph{percent-escaped}.
@item avail
The @emph{boolean value} in this field indicates whether the program is
installed and runnable.
@item okay
The @emph{boolean value} in this field indicates whether the program's
config file is syntactically okay.
@item cfgfile
If an error occurred in the configuration file (as indicated by a false
value in the field @code{okay}), this field has the name of the failing
configuration file. It is @emph{percent-escaped}.
@item line
If an error occurred in the configuration file, this field has the line
number of the failing statement in the configuration file.
It is an @emph{unsigned number}.
@item error
If an error occurred in the configuration file, this field has the error
text of the failing statement in the configuration file. It is
@emph{percent-escaped} and @emph{localized}.
@end table
@noindent
In the following example the @command{dirmngr} is not runnable and the
configuration file of @command{scdaemon} is not okay.
@example
$ gpgconf --check-programs
gpg:GPG for OpenPGP:/usr/local/bin/gpg2:1:1:
gpg-agent:GPG Agent:/usr/local/bin/gpg-agent:1:1:
scdaemon:Smartcard Daemon:/usr/local/bin/scdaemon:1:0:
gpgsm:GPG for S/MIME:/usr/local/bin/gpgsm:1:1:
dirmngr:Directory Manager:/usr/local/bin/dirmngr:0:0:
@end example
@noindent
The command @w{@code{--check-options @var{component}}} will verify the
configuration file in the same manner as @code{--check-programs}, but
only for the component @var{component}.
@node Listing options
@subsection Listing options
Every component contains one or more options. Options may be gathered
into option groups to allow the GUI to give visual hints to the user
about which options are related.
The command argument @code{@w{--list-options @var{component}}} lists
all options (and the groups they belong to) in the component
@var{component}, one per line. @var{component} must be the string in
the field @var{name} in the output of the @code{--list-components}
command.
There is one line for each option and each group. First come all
options that are not in any group. Then comes a line describing a
group. Then come all options that belong into each group. Then comes
the next group and so on. There does not need to be any group (and in
this case the output will stop after the last non-grouped option).
The format of each line is:
@code{@var{name}:@var{flags}:@var{level}:@var{description}:@var{type}:@var{alt-type}:@var{argname}:@var{default}:@var{argdef}:@var{value}}
@table @var
@item name
This field contains a name tag for the group or option. The name tag
is used to specify the group or option in all communication with
@command{gpgconf}. The name tag is to be used @emph{verbatim}. It is
thus not in any escaped format.
@item flags
The flags field contains an @emph{unsigned number}. Its value is the
OR-wise combination of the following flag values:
@table @code
@item group (1)
If this flag is set, this is a line describing a group and not an
option.
@end table
The following flag values are only defined for options (that is, if
the @code{group} flag is not used).
@table @code
@item optional arg (2)
If this flag is set, the argument is optional. This is never set for
@var{type} @code{0} (none) options.
@item list (4)
If this flag is set, the option can be given multiple times.
@item runtime (8)
If this flag is set, the option can be changed at runtime.
@item default (16)
If this flag is set, a default value is available.
@item default desc (32)
If this flag is set, a (runtime) default is available. This and the
@code{default} flag are mutually exclusive.
@item no arg desc (64)
If this flag is set, and the @code{optional arg} flag is set, then the
option has a special meaning if no argument is given.
@item no change (128)
If this flag is set, gpgconf ignores requests to change the value. GUI
frontends should grey out this option. Note, that manual changes of the
configuration files are still possible.
@end table
@item level
This field is defined for options and for groups. It contains an
@emph{unsigned number} that specifies the expert level under which
this group or option should be displayed. The following expert levels
are defined for options (they have analogous meaning for groups):
@table @code
@item basic (0)
This option should always be offered to the user.
@item advanced (1)
This option may be offered to advanced users.
@item expert (2)
This option should only be offered to expert users.
@item invisible (3)
This option should normally never be displayed, not even to expert
users.
@item internal (4)
This option is for internal use only. Ignore it.
@end table
The level of a group will always be the lowest level of all options it
contains.
@item description
This field is defined for options and groups. The @emph{string} in
this field contains a human-readable description of the option or
group. It can be displayed to the user of the GUI for informational
purposes. It is @emph{percent-escaped} and @emph{localized}.
@item type
This field is only defined for options. It contains an @emph{unsigned
number} that specifies the type of the option's argument, if any. The
following types are defined:
Basic types:
@table @code
@item none (0)
No argument allowed.
@item string (1)
An @emph{unformatted string}.
@item int32 (2)
A @emph{signed number}.
@item uint32 (3)
An @emph{unsigned number}.
@end table
Complex types:
@table @code
@item pathname (32)
A @emph{string} that describes the pathname of a file. The file does
not necessarily need to exist.
@item ldap server (33)
A @emph{string} that describes an LDAP server in the format:
@code{@var{hostname}:@var{port}:@var{username}:@var{password}:@var{base_dn}}
@item key fingerprint (34)
A @emph{string} with a 40 digit fingerprint specifying a certificate.
@item pub key (35)
A @emph{string} that describes a certificate by user ID, key ID or
fingerprint.
@item sec key (36)
A @emph{string} that describes a certificate with a key by user ID,
key ID or fingerprint.
@item alias list (37)
A @emph{string} that describes an alias list, like the one used with
gpg's group option. The list consists of a key, an equal sign and space
separated values.
@end table
More types will be added in the future. Please see the @var{alt-type}
field for information on how to cope with unknown types.
@item alt-type
This field is identical to @var{type}, except that only the types
@code{0} to @code{31} are allowed. The GUI is expected to present the
user the option in the format specified by @var{type}. But if the
argument type @var{type} is not supported by the GUI, it can still
display the option in the more generic basic type @var{alt-type}. The
GUI must support all the defined basic types to be able to display all
options. More basic types may be added in future versions. If the
GUI encounters a basic type it doesn't support, it should report an
error and abort the operation.
@item argname
This field is only defined for options with an argument type
@var{type} that is not @code{0}. In this case it may contain a
@emph{percent-escaped} and @emph{localised string} that gives a short
name for the argument. The field may also be empty, though, in which
case a short name is not known.
@item default
This field is defined only for options for which the @code{default} or
@code{default desc} flag is set. If the @code{default} flag is set,
its format is that of an @emph{option argument} (@xref{Format
conventions}, for details). If the default value is empty, then no
default is known. Otherwise, the value specifies the default value
for this option. If the @code{default desc} flag is set, the field is
either empty or contains a description of the effect if the option is
not given.
@item argdef
This field is defined only for options for which the @code{optional
arg} flag is set. If the @code{no arg desc} flag is not set, its
format is that of an @emph{option argument} (@xref{Format
conventions}, for details). If the default value is empty, then no
default is known. Otherwise, the value specifies the default argument
for this option. If the @code{no arg desc} flag is set, the field is
either empty or contains a description of the effect of this option if
no argument is given.
@item value
This field is defined only for options. Its format is that of an
@emph{option argument}. If it is empty, then the option is not
explicitly set in the current configuration, and the default applies
(if any). Otherwise, it contains the current value of the option.
Note that this field is also meaningful if the option itself does not
take a real argument (in this case, it contains the number of times
the option appears).
@end table
@node Changing options
@subsection Changing options
The command @w{@code{--change-options @var{component}}} will attempt
to change the options of the component @var{component} to the
specified values. @var{component} must be the string in the field
@var{name} in the output of the @code{--list-components} command. You
have to provide the options that shall be changed in the following
format on standard input:
@code{@var{name}:@var{flags}:@var{new-value}}
@table @var
@item name
This is the name of the option to change. @var{name} must be the
string in the field @var{name} in the output of the
@code{--list-options} command.
@item flags
The flags field contains an @emph{unsigned number}. Its value is the
OR-wise combination of the following flag values:
@table @code
@item default (16)
If this flag is set, the option is deleted and the default value is
used instead (if applicable).
@end table
@item new-value
The new value for the option. This field is only defined if the
@code{default} flag is not set. The format is that of an @emph{option
argument}. If it is empty (or the field is omitted), the default
argument is used (only allowed if the argument is optional for this
option). Otherwise, the option will be set to the specified value.
@end table
@noindent
The output of the command is the same as that of
@code{--check-options} for the modified configuration file.
Examples:
To set the force option, which is of basic type @code{none (0)}:
@example
$ echo 'force:0:1' | gpgconf --change-options dirmngr
@end example
To delete the force option:
@example
$ echo 'force:16:' | gpgconf --change-options dirmngr
@end example
The @code{--runtime} option can influence when the changes take
effect.
@node Listing global options
@subsection Listing global options
Sometimes it is useful for applications to look at the global options
file @file{gpgconf.conf}.
The colon separated listing format is record oriented and uses the first
field to identify the record type:
@table @code
@item k
This describes a key record to start the definition of a new ruleset for
a user/group. The format of a key record is:
@code{k:@var{user}:@var{group}:}
@table @var
@item user
This is the user field of the key. It is percent escaped. See the
definition of the gpgconf.conf format for details.
@item group
This is the group field of the key. It is percent escaped.
@end table
@item r
This describes a rule record. All rule records up to the next key record
make up a rule set for that key. The format of a rule record is:
@code{r:::@var{component}:@var{option}:@var{flags}:@var{value}:}
@table @var
@item component
This is the component part of a rule. It is a plain string.
@item option
This is the option part of a rule. It is a plain string.
@item flag
This is the flags part of a rule. There may be only one flag per rule
but by using the same component and option, several flags may be
assigned to an option. It is a plain string.
@item value
This is the optional value for the option. It is a percent escaped
string with a single quotation mark to indicate a string. The quotation
mark is only required to distinguish between no value specified and an
empty string.
@end table
@end table
@noindent
Unknown record types should be ignored. Note that there is intentionally
no feature to change the global option file through @command{gpgconf}.
@mansect files
@node Files used by gpgconf
@subsection Files used by gpgconf
@table @file
@item /etc/gnupg/gpgconf.conf
@cindex gpgconf.conf
If this file exists, it is processed as a global configuration file.
A commented example can be found in the @file{examples} directory of
the distribution.
@end table
@mansect see also
@ifset isman
@command{gpg}(1),
@command{gpgsm}(1),
@command{gpg-agent}(1),
@command{scdaemon}(1),
@command{dirmngr}(1)
@end ifset
@include see-also-note.texi
@c
@c APPLYGNUPGDEFAULTS
@c
@manpage applygnupgdefaults.8
@node applygnupgdefaults
@section Run gpgconf for all users.
@ifset manverb
.B applygnupgdefaults
\- Run gpgconf --apply-defaults for all users.
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B applygnupgdefaults
@end ifset
@mansect description
This script is a wrapper around @command{gpgconf} to run it with the
command @code{--apply-defaults} for all real users with an existing
GnuPG home directory. Admins might want to use this script to update he
GnuPG configuration files for all users after
@file{/etc/gnupg/gpgconf.conf} has been changed. This allows to enforce
certain policies for all users. Note, that this is not a bulletproof of
forcing a user to use certain options. A user may always directly edit
the configuration files and bypass gpgconf.
@noindent
@command{applygnupgdefaults} is invoked by root as:
@example
applygnupgdefaults
@end example
@c
@c GPGSM-GENCERT.SH
@c
@node gpgsm-gencert.sh
@section Generate an X.509 certificate request
@manpage gpgsm-gencert.sh.1
@ifset manverb
.B gpgsm-gencert.sh
\- Generate an X.509 certificate request
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B gpgsm-gencert.sh
@end ifset
@mansect description
This is a simple tool to interactively generate a certificate request
which will be printed to stdout.
@manpause
@noindent
@command{gpgsm-gencert.sh} is invoked as:
@samp{gpgsm-cencert.sh}
@mansect see also
@ifset isman
@command{gpgsm}(1),
@command{gpg-agent}(1),
@command{scdaemon}(1)
@end ifset
@include see-also-note.texi
@c
@c GPG-PRESET-PASSPHRASE
@c
@node gpg-preset-passphrase
@section Put a passphrase into the cache.
@manpage gpg-preset-passphrase.1
@ifset manverb
.B gpg-preset-passphrase
\- Put a passphrase into gpg-agent's cache
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B gpg-preset-passphrase
.RI [ options ]
.RI [ command ]
.I cache-id
@end ifset
@mansect description
The @command{gpg-preset-passphrase} is a utility to seed the internal
cache of a running @command{gpg-agent} with passphrases. It is mainly
useful for unattended machines, where the usual @command{pinentry} tool
may not be used and the passphrases for the to be used keys are given at
machine startup.
Passphrases set with this utility don't expire unless the
@option{--forget} option is used to explicitly clear them from the
cache --- or @command{gpg-agent} is either restarted or reloaded (by
sending a SIGHUP to it). Note that the maximum cache time as set with
@option{--max-cache-ttl} is still honored. It is necessary to allow
this passphrase presetting by starting @command{gpg-agent} with the
@option{--allow-preset-passphrase}.
@menu
* Invoking gpg-preset-passphrase:: List of all commands and options.
@end menu
@manpause
@node Invoking gpg-preset-passphrase
@subsection List of all commands and options.
@mancont
@noindent
@command{gpg-preset-passphrase} is invoked this way:
@example
gpg-preset-passphrase [options] [command] @var{cacheid}
@end example
@var{cacheid} is either a 40 character keygrip of hexadecimal
characters identifying the key for which the passphrase should be set
or cleared. The keygrip is listed along with the key when running the
command: @code{gpgsm --dump-secret-keys}. Alternatively an arbitrary
string may be used to identify a passphrase; it is suggested that such
a string is prefixed with the name of the application (e.g
@code{foo:12346}).
@noindent
One of the following command options must be given:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --preset
@opindex preset
Preset a passphrase. This is what you usually will
use. @command{gpg-preset-passphrase} will then read the passphrase from
@code{stdin}.
@item --forget
@opindex forget
Flush the passphrase for the given cache ID from the cache.
@end table
@noindent
The following additional options may be used:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item -v
@itemx --verbose
@opindex verbose
Output additional information while running.
@item -P @var{string}
@itemx --passphrase @var{string}
@opindex passphrase
Instead of reading the passphrase from @code{stdin}, use the supplied
@var{string} as passphrase. Note that this makes the passphrase visible
for other users.
@end table
@mansect see also
@ifset isman
@command{gpg}(1),
@command{gpgsm}(1),
@command{gpg-agent}(1),
@command{scdaemon}(1)
@end ifset
@include see-also-note.texi
@c
@c GPG-CONNECT-AGENT
@c
@node gpg-connect-agent
@section Communicate with a running agent.
@manpage gpg-connect-agent.1
@ifset manverb
.B gpg-connect-agent
\- Communicate with a running agent
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B gpg-connect-agent
.RI [ options ] [commands]
@end ifset
@mansect description
The @command{gpg-connect-agent} is a utility to communicate with a
running @command{gpg-agent}. It is useful to check out the commands
gpg-agent provides using the Assuan interface. It might also be useful
for scripting simple applications. Input is expected at stdin and out
put gets printed to stdout.
It is very similar to running @command{gpg-agent} in server mode; but
here we connect to a running instance.
@menu
* Invoking gpg-connect-agent:: List of all options.
* Controlling gpg-connect-agent:: Control commands.
@end menu
@manpause
@node Invoking gpg-connect-agent
@subsection List of all options.
@noindent
@command{gpg-connect-agent} is invoked this way:
@example
gpg-connect-agent [options] [commands]
@end example
@mancont
@noindent
The following options may be used:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item -v
@itemx --verbose
@opindex verbose
Output additional information while running.
@item -q
@item --quiet
@opindex q
@opindex quiet
Try to be as quiet as possible.
@include opt-homedir.texi
@item --agent-program @var{file}
@opindex agent-program
Specify the agent program to be started if none is running. The
default value is determined by running @command{gpgconf} with the
option @option{--list-dirs}. Note that the pipe symbol (@code{|}) is
used for a regression test suite hack and may thus not be used in the
file name.
@item --dirmngr-program @var{file}
@opindex dirmngr-program
Specify the directory manager (keyserver client) program to be started
if none is running. This has only an effect if used together with the
option @option{--dirmngr}.
@item --dirmngr
@opindex dirmngr
Connect to a running directory manager (keyserver client) instead of
to the gpg-agent. If a dirmngr is not running, start it.
@item -S
@itemx --raw-socket @var{name}
@opindex raw-socket
Connect to socket @var{name} assuming this is an Assuan style server.
Do not run any special initializations or environment checks. This may
be used to directly connect to any Assuan style socket server.
@item -E
@itemx --exec
@opindex exec
Take the rest of the command line as a program and it's arguments and
execute it as an assuan server. Here is how you would run @command{gpgsm}:
@smallexample
gpg-connect-agent --exec gpgsm --server
@end smallexample
Note that you may not use options on the command line in this case.
@item --no-ext-connect
@opindex no-ext-connect
When using @option{-S} or @option{--exec}, @command{gpg-connect-agent}
connects to the assuan server in extended mode to allow descriptor
passing. This option makes it use the old mode.
@item --no-autostart
@opindex no-autostart
Do not start the gpg-agent or the dirmngr if it has not yet been
started.
@item -r @var{file}
@itemx --run @var{file}
@opindex run
Run the commands from @var{file} at startup and then continue with the
regular input method. Note, that commands given on the command line are
executed after this file.
@item -s
@itemx --subst
@opindex subst
Run the command @code{/subst} at startup.
@item --hex
@opindex hex
Print data lines in a hex format and the ASCII representation of
non-control characters.
@item --decode
@opindex decode
Decode data lines. That is to remove percent escapes but make sure that
a new line always starts with a D and a space.
@end table
@mansect control commands
@node Controlling gpg-connect-agent
@subsection Control commands.
While reading Assuan commands, gpg-agent also allows a few special
commands to control its operation. These control commands all start
with a slash (@code{/}).
@table @code
@item /echo @var{args}
Just print @var{args}.
@item /let @var{name} @var{value}
Set the variable @var{name} to @var{value}. Variables are only
substituted on the input if the @command{/subst} has been used.
Variables are referenced by prefixing the name with a dollar sign and
optionally include the name in curly braces. The rules for a valid name
are identically to those of the standard bourne shell. This is not yet
enforced but may be in the future. When used with curly braces no
leading or trailing white space is allowed.
If a variable is not found, it is searched in the environment and if
found copied to the table of variables.
Variable functions are available: The name of the function must be
followed by at least one space and the at least one argument. The
following functions are available:
@table @code
@item get
Return a value described by the argument. Available arguments are:
@table @code
@item cwd
The current working directory.
@item homedir
The gnupg homedir.
@item sysconfdir
GnuPG's system configuration directory.
@item bindir
GnuPG's binary directory.
@item libdir
GnuPG's library directory.
@item libexecdir
GnuPG's library directory for executable files.
@item datadir
GnuPG's data directory.
@item serverpid
The PID of the current server. Command @command{/serverpid} must
have been given to return a useful value.
@end table
@item unescape @var{args}
Remove C-style escapes from @var{args}. Note that @code{\0} and
@code{\x00} terminate the returned string implicitly. The string to be
converted are the entire arguments right behind the delimiting space of
the function name.
@item unpercent @var{args}
@itemx unpercent+ @var{args}
Remove percent style escaping from @var{args}. Note that @code{%00}
terminates the string implicitly. The string to be converted are the
entire arguments right behind the delimiting space of the function
name. @code{unpercent+} also maps plus signs to a spaces.
@item percent @var{args}
@itemx percent+ @var{args}
Escape the @var{args} using percent style escaping. Tabs, formfeeds,
linefeeds, carriage returns and colons are escaped. @code{percent+} also
maps spaces to plus signs.
@item errcode @var{arg}
@itemx errsource @var{arg}
@itemx errstring @var{arg}
Assume @var{arg} is an integer and evaluate it using @code{strtol}. Return
the gpg-error error code, error source or a formatted string with the
error code and error source.
@item +
@itemx -
@itemx *
@itemx /
@itemx %
Evaluate all arguments as long integers using @code{strtol} and apply
this operator. A division by zero yields an empty string.
@item !
@itemx |
@itemx &
Evaluate all arguments as long integers using @code{strtol} and apply
the logical operators NOT, OR or AND. The NOT operator works on the
last argument only.
@end table
@item /definq @var{name} @var{var}
Use content of the variable @var{var} for inquiries with @var{name}.
@var{name} may be an asterisk (@code{*}) to match any inquiry.
@item /definqfile @var{name} @var{file}
Use content of @var{file} for inquiries with @var{name}.
@var{name} may be an asterisk (@code{*}) to match any inquiry.
@item /definqprog @var{name} @var{prog}
Run @var{prog} for inquiries matching @var{name} and pass the
entire line to it as command line arguments.
@item /datafile @var{name}
Write all data lines from the server to the file @var{name}. The file
is opened for writing and created if it does not exists. An existing
file is first truncated to 0. The data written to the file fully
decoded. Using a single dash for @var{name} writes to stdout. The
file is kept open until a new file is set using this command or this
command is used without an argument.
@item /showdef
Print all definitions
@item /cleardef
Delete all definitions
@item /sendfd @var{file} @var{mode}
Open @var{file} in @var{mode} (which needs to be a valid @code{fopen}
mode string) and send the file descriptor to the server. This is
usually followed by a command like @code{INPUT FD} to set the
input source for other commands.
@item /recvfd
Not yet implemented.
@item /open @var{var} @var{file} [@var{mode}]
Open @var{file} and assign the file descriptor to @var{var}. Warning:
This command is experimental and might change in future versions.
@item /close @var{fd}
Close the file descriptor @var{fd}. Warning: This command is
experimental and might change in future versions.
@item /showopen
Show a list of open files.
@item /serverpid
Send the Assuan command @command{GETINFO pid} to the server and store
the returned PID for internal purposes.
@item /sleep
Sleep for a second.
@item /hex
@itemx /nohex
Same as the command line option @option{--hex}.
@item /decode
@itemx /nodecode
Same as the command line option @option{--decode}.
@item /subst
@itemx /nosubst
Enable and disable variable substitution. It defaults to disabled
unless the command line option @option{--subst} has been used.
If /subst as been enabled once, leading whitespace is removed from
input lines which makes scripts easier to read.
@item /while @var{condition}
@itemx /end
These commands provide a way for executing loops. All lines between
the @code{while} and the corresponding @code{end} are executed as long
as the evaluation of @var{condition} yields a non-zero value or is the
string @code{true} or @code{yes}. The evaluation is done by passing
@var{condition} to the @code{strtol} function. Example:
@smallexample
/subst
/let i 3
/while $i
/echo loop couter is $i
/let i $@{- $i 1@}
/end
@end smallexample
@item /if @var{condition}
@itemx /end
These commands provide a way for conditional execution. All lines between
the @code{if} and the corresponding @code{end} are executed only if
the evaluation of @var{condition} yields a non-zero value or is the
string @code{true} or @code{yes}. The evaluation is done by passing
@var{condition} to the @code{strtol} function.
@item /run @var{file}
Run commands from @var{file}.
@item /bye
Terminate the connection and the program
@item /help
Print a list of available control commands.
@end table
@ifset isman
@mansect see also
@command{gpg-agent}(1),
@command{scdaemon}(1)
@include see-also-note.texi
@end ifset
@c
@c DIRMNGR-CLIENT
@c
@node dirmngr-client
@section The Dirmngr Client Tool
@manpage dirmngr-client.1
@ifset manverb
.B dirmngr-client
\- Tool to access the Dirmngr services
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B dirmngr-client
.RI [ options ]
.RI [ certfile | pattern ]
@end ifset
@mansect description
The @command{dirmngr-client} is a simple tool to contact a running
dirmngr and test whether a certificate has been revoked --- either by
being listed in the corresponding CRL or by running the OCSP protocol.
If no dirmngr is running, a new instances will be started but this is
in general not a good idea due to the huge performance overhead.
@noindent
The usual way to run this tool is either:
@example
dirmngr-client @var{acert}
@end example
@noindent
or
@example
dirmngr-client <@var{acert}
@end example
Where @var{acert} is one DER encoded (binary) X.509 certificates to be
tested.
@ifclear isman
The return value of this command is
@end ifclear
@mansect return value
@ifset isman
@command{dirmngr-client} returns these values:
@end ifset
@table @code
@item 0
The certificate under question is valid; i.e. there is a valid CRL
available and it is not listed tehre or teh OCSP request returned that
that certificate is valid.
@item 1
The certificate has been revoked
@item 2 (and other values)
There was a problem checking the revocation state of the certificate.
A message to stderr has given more detailed information. Most likely
this is due to a missing or expired CRL or due to a network problem.
@end table
@mansect options
@noindent
@command{dirmngr-client} may be called with the following options:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --version
@opindex version
Print the program version and licensing information. Note that you cannot
abbreviate this command.
@item --help, -h
@opindex help
Print a usage message summarizing the most useful command-line options.
Note that you cannot abbreviate this command.
@item --quiet, -q
@opindex quiet
Make the output extra brief by suppressing any informational messages.
@item -v
@item --verbose
@opindex v
@opindex verbose
Outputs additional information while running.
You can increase the verbosity by giving several
verbose commands to @sc{dirmngr}, such as @samp{-vv}.
@item --pem
@opindex pem
Assume that the given certificate is in PEM (armored) format.
@item --ocsp
@opindex ocsp
Do the check using the OCSP protocol and ignore any CRLs.
@item --force-default-responder
@opindex force-default-responder
When checking using the OCSP protocl, force the use of the default OCSP
responder. That is not to use the Reponder as given by the certificate.
@item --ping
@opindex ping
Check whether the dirmngr daemon is up and running.
@item --cache-cert
@opindex cache-cert
Put the given certificate into the cache of a running dirmngr. This is
mainly useful for debugging.
@item --validate
@opindex validate
Validate the given certificate using dirmngr's internal validation code.
This is mainly useful for debugging.
@item --load-crl
@opindex load-crl
This command expects a list of filenames with DER encoded CRL files.
With the option @option{--url} URLs are expected in place of filenames
and they are loaded directly from the given location. All CRLs will be
validated and then loaded into dirmngr's cache.
@item --lookup
@opindex lookup
Take the remaining arguments and run a lookup command on each of them.
The results are Base-64 encoded outputs (without header lines). This
may be used to retrieve certificates from a server. However the output
format is not very well suited if more than one certificate is returned.
@item --url
@itemx -u
@opindex url
Modify the @command{lookup} and @command{load-crl} commands to take an URL.
@item --local
@itemx -l
@opindex url
Let the @command{lookup} command only search the local cache.
@item --squid-mode
@opindex squid-mode
Run @sc{dirmngr-client} in a mode suitable as a helper program for
Squid's @option{external_acl_type} option.
@end table
@ifset isman
@mansect see also
@command{dirmngr}(8),
@command{gpgsm}(1)
@include see-also-note.texi
@end ifset
@c
@c GPGPARSEMAIL
@c
@node gpgparsemail
@section Parse a mail message into an annotated format
@manpage gpgparsemail.1
@ifset manverb
.B gpgparsemail
\- Parse a mail message into an annotated format
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B gpgparsemail
.RI [ options ]
.RI [ file ]
@end ifset
@mansect description
The @command{gpgparsemail} is a utility currently only useful for
debugging. Run it with @code{--help} for usage information.
@c
@c SYMCRYPTRUN
@c
@node symcryptrun
@section Call a simple symmetric encryption tool.
@manpage symcryptrun.1
@ifset manverb
.B symcryptrun
\- Call a simple symmetric encryption tool
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B symcryptrun
.B \-\-class
.I class
.B \-\-program
.I program
.B \-\-keyfile
.I keyfile
.RB [ --decrypt | --encrypt ]
.RI [ inputfile ]
@end ifset
@mansect description
Sometimes simple encryption tools are already in use for a long time and
there might be a desire to integrate them into the GnuPG framework. The
protocols and encryption methods might be non-standard or not even
properly documented, so that a full-fledged encryption tool with an
interface like gpg is not doable. @command{symcryptrun} provides a
solution: It operates by calling the external encryption/decryption
module and provides a passphrase for a key using the standard
@command{pinentry} based mechanism through @command{gpg-agent}.
Note, that @command{symcryptrun} is only available if GnuPG has been
configured with @samp{--enable-symcryptrun} at build time.
@menu
* Invoking symcryptrun:: List of all commands and options.
@end menu
@manpause
@node Invoking symcryptrun
@subsection List of all commands and options.
@noindent
@command{symcryptrun} is invoked this way:
@example
symcryptrun --class CLASS --program PROGRAM --keyfile KEYFILE
[--decrypt | --encrypt] [inputfile]
@end example
@mancont
For encryption, the plain text must be provided on STDIN or as the
argument @var{inputfile}, and the ciphertext will be output to STDOUT.
For decryption vice versa.
@var{CLASS} describes the calling conventions of the external tool.
Currently it must be given as @samp{confucius}. @var{PROGRAM} is
the full filename of that external tool.
For the class @samp{confucius} the option @option{--keyfile} is
required; @var{keyfile} is the name of a file containing the secret key,
which may be protected by a passphrase. For detailed calling
conventions, see the source code.
@noindent
Note, that @command{gpg-agent} must be running before starting
@command{symcryptrun}.
@noindent
The following additional options may be used:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item -v
@itemx --verbose
@opindex verbose
Output additional information while running.
@item -q
@item --quiet
@opindex q
@opindex quiet
Try to be as quiet as possible.
@include opt-homedir.texi
@item --log-file @var{file}
@opindex log-file
Append all logging output to @var{file}. Default is to write logging
information to STDERR.
@end table
@noindent
The possible exit status codes of @command{symcryptrun} are:
@table @code
@item 0
Success.
@item 1
Some error occured.
@item 2
No valid passphrase was provided.
@item 3
The operation was canceled by the user.
@end table
@mansect see also
@ifset isman
@command{gpg}(1),
@command{gpgsm}(1),
@command{gpg-agent}(1),
@end ifset
@include see-also-note.texi
@c
@c GPG-ZIP
@c
@c The original manpage on which this section is based was written
@c by Colin Tuckley and Daniel Leidert
@c for the Debian distribution (but may be used by
@c others).
@manpage gpg-zip.1
@node gpg-zip
@section Encrypt or sign files into an archive
@ifset manverb
.B gpg-zip \- Encrypt or sign files into an archive
@end ifset
@mansect synopsis
@ifset manverb
.B gpg-zip
.RI [ options ]
.I filename1
.I [ filename2, ... ]
.I directory1
.I [ directory2, ... ]
@end ifset
@mansect description
@command{gpg-zip} encrypts or signs files into an archive. It is an
gpg-ized tar using the same format as used by PGP's PGP Zip.
@manpause
@noindent
@command{gpg-zip} is invoked this way:
@example
gpg-zip [options] @var{filename1} [@var{filename2}, ...] @var{directory} [@var{directory2}, ...]
@end example
@mansect options
@noindent
@command{gpg-zip} understands these options:
@table @gnupgtabopt
@item --encrypt
@itemx -e
@opindex encrypt
Encrypt data. This option may be combined with @option{--symmetric} (for output that may be decrypted via a secret key or a passphrase).
@item --decrypt
@itemx -d
@opindex decrypt
Decrypt data.
@item --symmetric
@itemx -c
Encrypt with a symmetric cipher using a passphrase. The default
symmetric cipher used is CAST5, but may be chosen with the
@option{--cipher-algo} option to @command{gpg}.
@item --sign
@itemx -s
Make a signature. See @command{gpg}.
@item --recipient @var{user}
@itemx -r @var{user}
@opindex recipient
Encrypt for user id @var{user}. See @command{gpg}.
@item --local-user @var{user}
@itemx -u @var{user}
@opindex local-user
Use @var{user} as the key to sign with. See @command{gpg}.
@item --list-archive
@opindex list-archive
List the contents of the specified archive.
@item --output @var{file}
@itemx -o @var{file}
@opindex output
Write output to specified file @var{file}.
@item --gpg @var{gpgcmd}
@opindex gpg
Use the specified command @var{gpgcmd} instead of @command{gpg}.
@item --gpg-args @var{args}
@opindex gpg-args
Pass the specified options to @command{gpg}.
@item --tar @var{tarcmd}
@opindex tar
Use the specified command @var{tarcmd} instead of @command{tar}.
@item --tar-args @var{args}
@opindex tar-args
Pass the specified options to @command{tar}.
@item --version
@opindex version
Print version of the program and exit.
@item --help
@opindex help
Display a brief help page and exit.
@end table
@mansect diagnostics
@noindent
The program returns 0 if everything was fine, 1 otherwise.
@mansect examples
@ifclear isman
@noindent
Some examples:
@end ifclear
@noindent
Encrypt the contents of directory @file{mydocs} for user Bob to file
@file{test1}:
@example
gpg-zip --encrypt --output test1 --gpg-args -r Bob mydocs
@end example
@noindent
List the contents of archive @file{test1}:
@example
gpg-zip --list-archive test1
@end example
@mansect see also
@ifset isman
@command{gpg}(1),
@command{tar}(1),
@end ifset
@include see-also-note.texi
diff --git a/doc/yat2m.c b/doc/yat2m.c
index 86c3c7081..e2ab86ea1 100644
--- a/doc/yat2m.c
+++ b/doc/yat2m.c
@@ -1,1583 +1,1583 @@
/* yat2m.c - Yet Another Texi 2 Man converter
* Copyright (C) 2005, 2013 g10 Code GmbH
* Copyright (C) 2006, 2008, 2011 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
* the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
* (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
* along with this program; if not, see .
*/
/*
This is a simple texinfo to man page converter. It needs some
special markup in th e texinfo and tries best to get a create man
page. It has been designed for the GnuPG man pages and thus only
a few texinfo commands are supported.
To use this you need to add the following macros into your texinfo
source:
@macro manpage {a}
@end macro
@macro mansect {a}
@end macro
@macro manpause
@end macro
@macro mancont
@end macro
They are used by yat2m to select parts of the Texinfo which should
go into the man page. These macros need to be used without leading
left space. Processing starts after a "manpage" macro has been
seen. "mansect" identifies the section and yat2m make sure to
emit the sections in the proper order. Note that @mansect skips
the next input line if that line begins with @section, @subsection or
@chapheading.
To insert verbatim troff markup, the following texinfo code may be
used:
@ifset manverb
.B whateever you want
@end ifset
alternativly a special comment may be used:
@c man:.B whatever you want
This is useful in case you need just one line. If you want to
include parts only in the man page but keep the texinfo
translation you may use:
@ifset isman
stuff to be rendered only on man pages
@end ifset
or to exclude stuff from man pages:
@ifclear isman
stuff not to be rendered on man pages
@end ifclear
the keyword @section is ignored, however @subsection gets rendered
as ".SS". @menu is completely skipped. Several man pages may be
extracted from one file, either using the --store or the --select
option.
If you want to indent tables in the source use this style:
@table foo
@item
@item
@table
@item
@end
@end
Don't change the indentation within a table and keep the same
number of white space at the start of the line. yat2m simply
detects the number of white spaces in front of an @item and remove
this number of spaces from all following lines until a new @item
is found or there are less spaces than for the last @item.
Note that @* does only work correctly if used at the end of an
input line.
*/
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#define PGM "yat2m"
#define VERSION "1.0"
/* The maximum length of a line including the linefeed and one extra
character. */
#define LINESIZE 1024
/* Number of allowed condition nestings. */
#define MAX_CONDITION_NESTING 10
/* Option flags. */
static int verbose;
static int quiet;
static int debug;
static const char *opt_source;
static const char *opt_release;
static const char *opt_select;
static const char *opt_include;
static int opt_store;
/* Flag to keep track whether any error occurred. */
static int any_error;
/* Object to keep macro definitions. */
struct macro_s
{
struct macro_s *next;
char *value; /* Malloced value. */
char name[1];
};
typedef struct macro_s *macro_t;
/* List of all defined macros. */
static macro_t macrolist;
/* List of variables set by @set. */
static macro_t variablelist;
/* List of global macro names. The value part is not used. */
static macro_t predefinedmacrolist;
/* Object to keep track of @isset and @ifclear. */
struct condition_s
{
int manverb; /* "manverb" needs special treatment. */
int isset; /* This is an @isset condition. */
char name[1]; /* Name of the condition macro. */
};
typedef struct condition_s *condition_t;
/* The stack used to evaluate conditions. And the current states. */
static condition_t condition_stack[MAX_CONDITION_NESTING];
static int condition_stack_idx;
static int cond_is_active; /* State of ifset/ifclear */
static int cond_in_verbatim; /* State of "manverb". */
/* Object to store one line of content. */
struct line_buffer_s
{
struct line_buffer_s *next;
int verbatim; /* True if LINE contains verbatim data. The default
is Texinfo source. */
char *line;
};
typedef struct line_buffer_s *line_buffer_t;
/* Object to collect the data of a section. */
struct section_buffer_s
{
char *name; /* Malloced name of the section. This may be
NULL to indicate this slot is not used. */
line_buffer_t lines; /* Linked list with the lines of the section. */
line_buffer_t *lines_tail; /* Helper for faster appending to the
linked list. */
line_buffer_t last_line; /* Points to the last line appended. */
};
typedef struct section_buffer_s *section_buffer_t;
/* Variable to keep info about the current page together. */
static struct
{
/* Filename of the current page or NULL if no page is active. Malloced. */
char *name;
/* Number of allocated elements in SECTIONS below. */
size_t n_sections;
/* Array with the data of the sections. */
section_buffer_t sections;
} thepage;
/* The list of standard section names. COMMANDS and ASSUAN are GnuPG
specific. */
static const char * const standard_sections[] =
{ "NAME", "SYNOPSIS", "DESCRIPTION",
"RETURN VALUE", "EXIT STATUS", "ERROR HANDLING", "ERRORS",
"COMMANDS", "OPTIONS", "USAGE", "EXAMPLES", "FILES",
"ENVIRONMENT", "DIAGNOSTICS", "SECURITY", "CONFORMING TO",
"ASSUAN", "NOTES", "BUGS", "AUTHOR", "SEE ALSO", NULL };
/*-- Local prototypes. --*/
static void proc_texi_buffer (FILE *fp, const char *line, size_t len,
int *table_level, int *eol_action);
/* Print diagnostic message and exit with failure. */
static void
die (const char *format, ...)
{
va_list arg_ptr;
fflush (stdout);
fprintf (stderr, "%s: ", PGM);
va_start (arg_ptr, format);
vfprintf (stderr, format, arg_ptr);
va_end (arg_ptr);
putc ('\n', stderr);
exit (1);
}
/* Print diagnostic message. */
static void
err (const char *format, ...)
{
va_list arg_ptr;
fflush (stdout);
if (strncmp (format, "%s:%d:", 6))
fprintf (stderr, "%s: ", PGM);
va_start (arg_ptr, format);
vfprintf (stderr, format, arg_ptr);
va_end (arg_ptr);
putc ('\n', stderr);
any_error = 1;
}
/* Print diagnostic message. */
static void
inf (const char *format, ...)
{
va_list arg_ptr;
fflush (stdout);
fprintf (stderr, "%s: ", PGM);
va_start (arg_ptr, format);
vfprintf (stderr, format, arg_ptr);
va_end (arg_ptr);
putc ('\n', stderr);
}
static void *
xmalloc (size_t n)
{
void *p = malloc (n);
if (!p)
die ("out of core: %s", strerror (errno));
return p;
}
static void *
xcalloc (size_t n, size_t m)
{
void *p = calloc (n, m);
if (!p)
die ("out of core: %s", strerror (errno));
return p;
}
static void *
xrealloc (void *old, size_t n)
{
void *p = realloc (old, n);
if (!p)
die ("out of core: %s", strerror (errno));
return p;
}
static char *
xstrdup (const char *string)
{
void *p = malloc (strlen (string)+1);
if (!p)
die ("out of core: %s", strerror (errno));
strcpy (p, string);
return p;
}
/* Uppercase the ascii characters in STRING. */
static char *
ascii_strupr (char *string)
{
char *p;
for (p = string; *p; p++)
if (!(*p & 0x80))
*p = toupper (*p);
return string;
}
/* Return the current date as an ISO string. */
const char *
isodatestring (void)
{
static char buffer[11+5];
struct tm *tp;
time_t atime = time (NULL);
if (atime < 0)
strcpy (buffer, "????" "-??" "-??");
else
{
tp = gmtime (&atime);
sprintf (buffer,"%04d-%02d-%02d",
1900+tp->tm_year, tp->tm_mon+1, tp->tm_mday );
}
return buffer;
}
/* Add NAME to the list of predefined macros which are global for all
files. */
static void
add_predefined_macro (const char *name)
{
macro_t m;
for (m=predefinedmacrolist; m; m = m->next)
if (!strcmp (m->name, name))
break;
if (!m)
{
m = xcalloc (1, sizeof *m + strlen (name));
strcpy (m->name, name);
m->next = predefinedmacrolist;
predefinedmacrolist = m;
}
}
/* Create or update a macro with name MACRONAME and set its values TO
MACROVALUE. Note that ownership of the macro value is transferred
to this function. */
static void
set_macro (const char *macroname, char *macrovalue)
{
macro_t m;
for (m=macrolist; m; m = m->next)
if (!strcmp (m->name, macroname))
break;
if (m)
free (m->value);
else
{
m = xcalloc (1, sizeof *m + strlen (macroname));
strcpy (m->name, macroname);
m->next = macrolist;
macrolist = m;
}
m->value = macrovalue;
macrovalue = NULL;
}
/* Create or update a variable with name and value given in NAMEANDVALUE. */
static void
set_variable (char *nameandvalue)
{
macro_t m;
const char *value;
char *p;
for (p = nameandvalue; *p && *p != ' ' && *p != '\t'; p++)
;
if (!*p)
value = "";
else
{
*p++ = 0;
while (*p == ' ' || *p == '\t')
p++;
value = p;
}
for (m=variablelist; m; m = m->next)
if (!strcmp (m->name, nameandvalue))
break;
if (m)
free (m->value);
else
{
m = xcalloc (1, sizeof *m + strlen (nameandvalue));
strcpy (m->name, nameandvalue);
m->next = variablelist;
variablelist = m;
}
m->value = xstrdup (value);
}
/* Return true if the macro or variable NAME is set, i.e. not the
empty string and not evaluating to 0. */
static int
macro_set_p (const char *name)
{
macro_t m;
for (m = macrolist; m ; m = m->next)
if (!strcmp (m->name, name))
break;
if (!m)
for (m = variablelist; m ; m = m->next)
if (!strcmp (m->name, name))
break;
if (!m || !m->value || !*m->value)
return 0;
if ((*m->value & 0x80) || !isdigit (*m->value))
return 1; /* Not a digit but some other string. */
return !!atoi (m->value);
}
/* Evaluate the current conditions. */
static void
evaluate_conditions (const char *fname, int lnr)
{
int i;
/* for (i=0; i < condition_stack_idx; i++) */
/* inf ("%s:%d: stack[%d] %s %s %c", */
/* fname, lnr, i, condition_stack[i]->isset? "set":"clr", */
/* condition_stack[i]->name, */
/* (macro_set_p (condition_stack[i]->name) */
/* ^ !condition_stack[i]->isset)? 't':'f'); */
cond_is_active = 1;
cond_in_verbatim = 0;
if (condition_stack_idx)
{
for (i=0; i < condition_stack_idx; i++)
{
if (condition_stack[i]->manverb)
cond_in_verbatim = (macro_set_p (condition_stack[i]->name)
^ !condition_stack[i]->isset);
else if (!(macro_set_p (condition_stack[i]->name)
^ !condition_stack[i]->isset))
{
cond_is_active = 0;
break;
}
}
}
/* inf ("%s:%d: active=%d verbatim=%d", */
/* fname, lnr, cond_is_active, cond_in_verbatim); */
}
/* Push a condition with condition macro NAME onto the stack. If
ISSET is true, a @isset condition is pushed. */
static void
push_condition (const char *name, int isset, const char *fname, int lnr)
{
condition_t cond;
int manverb = 0;
if (condition_stack_idx >= MAX_CONDITION_NESTING)
{
err ("%s:%d: condition nested too deep", fname, lnr);
return;
}
if (!strcmp (name, "manverb"))
{
if (!isset)
{
err ("%s:%d: using \"@ifclear manverb\" is not allowed", fname, lnr);
return;
}
manverb = 1;
}
cond = xcalloc (1, sizeof *cond + strlen (name));
cond->manverb = manverb;
cond->isset = isset;
strcpy (cond->name, name);
condition_stack[condition_stack_idx++] = cond;
evaluate_conditions (fname, lnr);
}
/* Remove the last condition from the stack. ISSET is used for error
reporting. */
static void
pop_condition (int isset, const char *fname, int lnr)
{
if (!condition_stack_idx)
{
err ("%s:%d: unbalanced \"@end %s\"",
fname, lnr, isset?"isset":"isclear");
return;
}
condition_stack_idx--;
free (condition_stack[condition_stack_idx]);
condition_stack[condition_stack_idx] = NULL;
evaluate_conditions (fname, lnr);
}
/* Return a section buffer for the section NAME. Allocate a new buffer
if this is a new section. Keep track of the sections in THEPAGE.
This function may reallocate the section array in THEPAGE. */
static section_buffer_t
get_section_buffer (const char *name)
{
int i;
section_buffer_t sect;
/* If there is no section we put everything into the required NAME
section. Given that this is the first one listed it is likely
that error are easily visible. */
if (!name)
name = "NAME";
for (i=0; i < thepage.n_sections; i++)
{
sect = thepage.sections + i;
if (sect->name && !strcmp (name, sect->name))
return sect;
}
for (i=0; i < thepage.n_sections; i++)
if (!thepage.sections[i].name)
break;
if (i < thepage.n_sections)
sect = thepage.sections + i;
else
{
/* We need to allocate or reallocate the section array. */
size_t old_n = thepage.n_sections;
size_t new_n = 20;
if (!old_n)
thepage.sections = xcalloc (new_n, sizeof *thepage.sections);
else
{
thepage.sections = xrealloc (thepage.sections,
((old_n + new_n)
* sizeof *thepage.sections));
memset (thepage.sections + old_n, 0,
new_n * sizeof *thepage.sections);
}
thepage.n_sections += new_n;
/* Setup the tail pointers. */
for (i=old_n; i < thepage.n_sections; i++)
{
sect = thepage.sections + i;
sect->lines_tail = §->lines;
}
sect = thepage.sections + old_n;
}
/* Store the name. */
assert (!sect->name);
sect->name = xstrdup (name);
return sect;
}
/* Add the content of LINE to the section named SECTNAME. */
static void
add_content (const char *sectname, char *line, int verbatim)
{
section_buffer_t sect;
line_buffer_t lb;
sect = get_section_buffer (sectname);
if (sect->last_line && !sect->last_line->verbatim == !verbatim)
{
/* Lets append that line to the last one. We do this to keep
all lines of the same kind (i.e.verbatim or not) together in
one large buffer. */
size_t n1, n;
lb = sect->last_line;
n1 = strlen (lb->line);
n = n1 + 1 + strlen (line) + 1;
lb->line = xrealloc (lb->line, n);
strcpy (lb->line+n1, "\n");
strcpy (lb->line+n1+1, line);
}
else
{
lb = xcalloc (1, sizeof *lb);
lb->verbatim = verbatim;
lb->line = xstrdup (line);
sect->last_line = lb;
*sect->lines_tail = lb;
sect->lines_tail = &lb->next;
}
}
/* Prepare for a new man page using the filename NAME. */
static void
start_page (char *name)
{
if (verbose)
inf ("starting page '%s'", name);
assert (!thepage.name);
thepage.name = xstrdup (name);
thepage.n_sections = 0;
}
/* Write the .TH entry of the current page. Return -1 if there is a
problem with the page. */
static int
write_th (FILE *fp)
{
char *name, *p;
fputs (".\\\" Created from Texinfo source by yat2m " VERSION "\n", fp);
name = ascii_strupr (xstrdup (thepage.name));
p = strrchr (name, '.');
if (!p || !p[1])
{
err ("no section name in man page '%s'", thepage.name);
free (name);
return -1;
}
*p++ = 0;
fprintf (fp, ".TH %s %s %s \"%s\" \"%s\"\n",
name, p, isodatestring (), opt_release, opt_source);
free (name);
return 0;
}
/* Process the texinfo command COMMAND (without the leading @) and
write output if needed to FP. REST is the remainer of the line
which should either point to an opening brace or to a white space.
The function returns the number of characters already processed
from REST. LEN is the usable length of REST. TABLE_LEVEL is used to
control the indentation of tables. */
static size_t
proc_texi_cmd (FILE *fp, const char *command, const char *rest, size_t len,
int *table_level, int *eol_action)
{
static struct {
const char *name; /* Name of the command. */
int what; /* What to do with this command. */
const char *lead_in; /* String to print with a opening brace. */
const char *lead_out;/* String to print with the closing brace. */
} cmdtbl[] = {
{ "command", 0, "\\fB", "\\fR" },
{ "code", 0, "\\fB", "\\fR" },
{ "sc", 0, "\\fB", "\\fR" },
{ "var", 0, "\\fI", "\\fR" },
{ "samp", 0, "\\(aq", "\\(aq" },
{ "file", 0, "\\(oq\\fI","\\fR\\(cq" },
{ "env", 0, "\\(oq\\fI","\\fR\\(cq" },
{ "acronym", 0 },
{ "dfn", 0 },
{ "option", 0, "\\fB", "\\fR" },
{ "example", 1, ".RS 2\n.nf\n" },
{ "smallexample", 1, ".RS 2\n.nf\n" },
{ "asis", 7 },
{ "anchor", 7 },
{ "cartouche", 1 },
{ "xref", 0, "see: [", "]" },
{ "pxref", 0, "see: [", "]" },
{ "uref", 0, "(\\fB", "\\fR)" },
{ "footnote",0, " ([", "])" },
{ "emph", 0, "\\fI", "\\fR" },
{ "w", 1 },
{ "c", 5 },
{ "opindex", 1 },
{ "cpindex", 1 },
{ "cindex", 1 },
{ "noindent", 0 },
{ "section", 1 },
{ "chapter", 1 },
{ "subsection", 6, "\n.SS " },
{ "chapheading", 0},
{ "item", 2, ".TP\n.B " },
{ "itemx", 2, ".TP\n.B " },
{ "table", 3 },
{ "itemize", 3 },
{ "bullet", 0, "* " },
{ "*", 0, "\n.br"},
{ "/", 0 },
{ "end", 4 },
{ "quotation",1, ".RS\n\\fB" },
{ "value", 8 },
{ NULL }
};
size_t n;
int i;
const char *s;
const char *lead_out = NULL;
int ignore_args = 0;
for (i=0; cmdtbl[i].name && strcmp (cmdtbl[i].name, command); i++)
;
if (cmdtbl[i].name)
{
s = cmdtbl[i].lead_in;
if (s)
fputs (s, fp);
lead_out = cmdtbl[i].lead_out;
switch (cmdtbl[i].what)
{
case 1: /* Throw away the entire line. */
s = memchr (rest, '\n', len);
return s? (s-rest)+1 : len;
case 2: /* Handle @item. */
break;
case 3: /* Handle table. */
if (++(*table_level) > 1)
fputs (".RS\n", fp);
/* Now throw away the entire line. */
s = memchr (rest, '\n', len);
return s? (s-rest)+1 : len;
break;
case 4: /* Handle end. */
for (s=rest, n=len; n && (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t'); s++, n--)
;
if (n >= 5 && !memcmp (s, "table", 5)
&& (!n || s[5] == ' ' || s[5] == '\t' || s[5] == '\n'))
{
if ((*table_level)-- > 1)
fputs (".RE\n", fp);
}
else if (n >= 7 && !memcmp (s, "example", 7)
&& (!n || s[7] == ' ' || s[7] == '\t' || s[7] == '\n'))
{
fputs (".fi\n.RE\n", fp);
}
else if (n >= 12 && !memcmp (s, "smallexample", 12)
&& (!n || s[12] == ' ' || s[12] == '\t' || s[12] == '\n'))
{
fputs (".fi\n.RE\n", fp);
}
else if (n >= 9 && !memcmp (s, "quotation", 9)
&& (!n || s[9] == ' ' || s[9] == '\t' || s[9] == '\n'))
{
fputs ("\\fR\n.RE\n", fp);
}
/* Now throw away the entire line. */
s = memchr (rest, '\n', len);
return s? (s-rest)+1 : len;
case 5: /* Handle special comments. */
for (s=rest, n=len; n && (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t'); s++, n--)
;
if (n >= 4 && !memcmp (s, "man:", 4))
{
for (s+=4, n-=4; n && *s != '\n'; n--, s++)
putc (*s, fp);
putc ('\n', fp);
}
/* Now throw away the entire line. */
s = memchr (rest, '\n', len);
return s? (s-rest)+1 : len;
case 6:
*eol_action = 1;
break;
case 7:
ignore_args = 1;
break;
case 8:
ignore_args = 1;
if (*rest != '{')
{
err ("opening brace for command '%s' missing", command);
return len;
}
else
{
/* Find closing brace. */
for (s=rest+1, n=1; *s && n < len; s++, n++)
if (*s == '}')
break;
if (*s != '}')
{
err ("closing brace for command '%s' not found", command);
return len;
}
else
{
size_t len = s - (rest + 1);
macro_t m;
for (m = variablelist; m; m = m->next)
if (strlen (m->name) == len
&&!strncmp (m->name, rest+1, len))
break;
if (m)
fputs (m->value, fp);
else
inf ("texinfo variable '%.*s' is not set",
(int)len, rest+1);
}
}
break;
default:
break;
}
}
else /* macro */
{
macro_t m;
for (m = macrolist; m ; m = m->next)
if (!strcmp (m->name, command))
break;
if (m)
{
proc_texi_buffer (fp, m->value, strlen (m->value),
table_level, eol_action);
ignore_args = 1; /* Parameterized macros are not yet supported. */
}
else
inf ("texinfo command '%s' not supported (%.*s)", command,
((s = memchr (rest, '\n', len)), (s? (s-rest) : len)), rest);
}
if (*rest == '{')
{
/* Find matching closing brace. */
for (s=rest+1, n=1, i=1; i && *s && n < len; s++, n++)
if (*s == '{')
i++;
else if (*s == '}')
i--;
if (i)
{
err ("closing brace for command '%s' not found", command);
return len;
}
if (n > 2 && !ignore_args)
proc_texi_buffer (fp, rest+1, n-2, table_level, eol_action);
}
else
n = 0;
if (lead_out)
fputs (lead_out, fp);
return n;
}
/* Process the string LINE with LEN bytes of Texinfo content. */
static void
proc_texi_buffer (FILE *fp, const char *line, size_t len,
int *table_level, int *eol_action)
{
const char *s;
char cmdbuf[256];
int cmdidx = 0;
int in_cmd = 0;
size_t n;
for (s=line; *s && len; s++, len--)
{
if (in_cmd)
{
if (in_cmd == 1)
{
switch (*s)
{
case '@': case '{': case '}':
putc (*s, fp); in_cmd = 0;
break;
case ':': /* Not ending a sentence flag. */
in_cmd = 0;
break;
case '.': case '!': case '?': /* Ending a sentence. */
putc (*s, fp); in_cmd = 0;
break;
case ' ': case '\t': case '\n': /* Non collapsing spaces. */
putc (*s, fp); in_cmd = 0;
break;
default:
cmdidx = 0;
cmdbuf[cmdidx++] = *s;
in_cmd++;
break;
}
}
else if (*s == '{' || *s == ' ' || *s == '\t' || *s == '\n')
{
cmdbuf[cmdidx] = 0;
n = proc_texi_cmd (fp, cmdbuf, s, len, table_level, eol_action);
assert (n <= len);
s += n; len -= n;
s--; len++;
in_cmd = 0;
}
else if (cmdidx < sizeof cmdbuf -1)
cmdbuf[cmdidx++] = *s;
else
{
err ("texinfo command too long - ignored");
in_cmd = 0;
}
}
else if (*s == '@')
in_cmd = 1;
else if (*s == '\n')
{
switch (*eol_action)
{
case 1: /* Create a dummy paragraph. */
fputs ("\n\\ \n", fp);
break;
default:
putc (*s, fp);
}
*eol_action = 0;
}
else if (*s == '\\')
fputs ("\\\\", fp);
else
putc (*s, fp);
}
if (in_cmd > 1)
{
cmdbuf[cmdidx] = 0;
n = proc_texi_cmd (fp, cmdbuf, s, len, table_level, eol_action);
assert (n <= len);
s += n; len -= n;
s--; len++;
in_cmd = 0;
}
}
/* Do something with the Texinfo line LINE. */
static void
parse_texi_line (FILE *fp, const char *line, int *table_level)
{
int eol_action = 0;
/* A quick test whether there are any texinfo commands. */
if (!strchr (line, '@'))
{
fputs (line, fp);
putc ('\n', fp);
return;
}
proc_texi_buffer (fp, line, strlen (line), table_level, &eol_action);
putc ('\n', fp);
}
/* Write all the lines LINES to FP. */
static void
write_content (FILE *fp, line_buffer_t lines)
{
line_buffer_t line;
int table_level = 0;
for (line = lines; line; line = line->next)
{
if (line->verbatim)
{
fputs (line->line, fp);
putc ('\n', fp);
}
else
{
/* fputs ("TEXI---", fp); */
/* fputs (line->line, fp); */
/* fputs ("---\n", fp); */
parse_texi_line (fp, line->line, &table_level);
}
}
}
static int
is_standard_section (const char *name)
{
int i;
const char *s;
for (i=0; (s=standard_sections[i]); i++)
if (!strcmp (s, name))
return 1;
return 0;
}
/* Finish a page; that is sort the data and write it out to the file. */
static void
finish_page (void)
{
FILE *fp;
section_buffer_t sect = NULL;
int idx;
const char *s;
int i;
if (!thepage.name)
return; /* No page active. */
if (verbose)
inf ("finishing page '%s'", thepage.name);
if (opt_select)
{
if (!strcmp (opt_select, thepage.name))
{
inf ("selected '%s'", thepage.name );
fp = stdout;
}
else
{
fp = fopen ( "/dev/null", "w" );
if (!fp)
die ("failed to open /dev/null: %s\n", strerror (errno));
}
}
else if (opt_store)
{
inf ("writing '%s'", thepage.name );
fp = fopen ( thepage.name, "w" );
if (!fp)
die ("failed to create '%s': %s\n", thepage.name, strerror (errno));
}
else
fp = stdout;
if (write_th (fp))
goto leave;
for (idx=0; (s=standard_sections[idx]); idx++)
{
for (i=0; i < thepage.n_sections; i++)
{
sect = thepage.sections + i;
if (sect->name && !strcmp (s, sect->name))
break;
}
if (i == thepage.n_sections)
sect = NULL;
if (sect)
{
fprintf (fp, ".SH %s\n", sect->name);
write_content (fp, sect->lines);
/* Now continue with all non standard sections directly
following this one. */
for (i++; i < thepage.n_sections; i++)
{
sect = thepage.sections + i;
if (sect->name && is_standard_section (sect->name))
break;
if (sect->name)
{
fprintf (fp, ".SH %s\n", sect->name);
write_content (fp, sect->lines);
}
}
}
}
leave:
if (fp != stdout)
fclose (fp);
free (thepage.name);
thepage.name = NULL;
/* FIXME: Cleanup the content. */
}
/* Parse one Texinfo file and create manpages according to the
embedded instructions. */
static void
parse_file (const char *fname, FILE *fp, char **section_name, int in_pause)
{
char *line;
int lnr = 0;
/* Fixme: The following state variables don't carry over to include
files. */
int skip_to_end = 0; /* Used to skip over menu entries. */
int skip_sect_line = 0; /* Skip after @mansect. */
int item_indent = 0; /* How far is the current @item indented. */
/* Helper to define a macro. */
char *macroname = NULL;
char *macrovalue = NULL;
size_t macrovaluesize = 0;
size_t macrovalueused = 0;
line = xmalloc (LINESIZE);
while (fgets (line, LINESIZE, fp))
{
size_t n = strlen (line);
int got_line = 0;
char *p, *pend;
lnr++;
if (!n || line[n-1] != '\n')
{
err ("%s:%d: trailing linefeed missing, line too long or "
"embedded Nul character", fname, lnr);
break;
}
line[--n] = 0;
/* Kludge to allow indentation of tables. */
for (p=line; *p == ' ' || *p == '\t'; p++)
;
if (*p)
{
if (*p == '@' && !strncmp (p+1, "item", 4))
item_indent = p - line; /* Set a new indent level. */
else if (p - line < item_indent)
item_indent = 0; /* Switch off indention. */
if (item_indent)
{
memmove (line, line+item_indent, n - item_indent + 1);
n -= item_indent;
}
}
if (*line == '@')
{
for (p=line+1, n=1; *p && *p != ' ' && *p != '\t'; p++)
n++;
while (*p == ' ' || *p == '\t')
p++;
}
else
p = line;
/* Take action on macro. */
if (macroname)
{
if (n == 4 && !memcmp (line, "@end", 4)
&& (line[4]==' '||line[4]=='\t'||!line[4])
&& !strncmp (p, "macro", 5)
&& (p[5]==' '||p[5]=='\t'||!p[5]))
{
if (macrovalueused)
macrovalue[--macrovalueused] = 0; /* Kill the last LF. */
macrovalue[macrovalueused] = 0; /* Terminate macro. */
macrovalue = xrealloc (macrovalue, macrovalueused+1);
set_macro (macroname, macrovalue);
macrovalue = NULL;
free (macroname);
macroname = NULL;
}
else
{
if (macrovalueused + strlen (line) + 2 >= macrovaluesize)
{
macrovaluesize += strlen (line) + 256;
macrovalue = xrealloc (macrovalue, macrovaluesize);
}
strcpy (macrovalue+macrovalueused, line);
macrovalueused += strlen (line);
macrovalue[macrovalueused++] = '\n';
}
continue;
}
if (n >= 5 && !memcmp (line, "@node", 5)
&& (line[5]==' '||line[5]=='\t'||!line[5]))
{
/* Completey ignore @node lines. */
continue;
}
if (skip_sect_line)
{
skip_sect_line = 0;
if (!strncmp (line, "@section", 8)
|| !strncmp (line, "@subsection", 11)
|| !strncmp (line, "@chapheading", 12))
continue;
}
/* We only parse lines we need and ignore the rest. There are a
few macros used to control this as well as one @ifset
command. Parts we know about are saved away into containers
separate for each section. */
/* First process ifset/ifclear commands. */
if (*line == '@')
{
if (n == 6 && !memcmp (line, "@ifset", 6)
&& (line[6]==' '||line[6]=='\t'))
{
for (p=line+7; *p == ' ' || *p == '\t'; p++)
;
if (!*p)
{
err ("%s:%d: name missing after \"@ifset\"", fname, lnr);
continue;
}
for (pend=p; *pend && *pend != ' ' && *pend != '\t'; pend++)
;
*pend = 0; /* Ignore rest of the line. */
push_condition (p, 1, fname, lnr);
continue;
}
else if (n == 8 && !memcmp (line, "@ifclear", 8)
&& (line[8]==' '||line[8]=='\t'))
{
for (p=line+9; *p == ' ' || *p == '\t'; p++)
;
if (!*p)
{
err ("%s:%d: name missing after \"@ifsclear\"", fname, lnr);
continue;
}
for (pend=p; *pend && *pend != ' ' && *pend != '\t'; pend++)
;
*pend = 0; /* Ignore rest of the line. */
push_condition (p, 0, fname, lnr);
continue;
}
else if (n == 4 && !memcmp (line, "@end", 4)
&& (line[4]==' '||line[4]=='\t')
&& !strncmp (p, "ifset", 5)
&& (p[5]==' '||p[5]=='\t'||!p[5]))
{
pop_condition (1, fname, lnr);
continue;
}
else if (n == 4 && !memcmp (line, "@end", 4)
&& (line[4]==' '||line[4]=='\t')
&& !strncmp (p, "ifclear", 7)
&& (p[7]==' '||p[7]=='\t'||!p[7]))
{
pop_condition (0, fname, lnr);
continue;
}
}
/* Take action on ifset/ifclear. */
if (!cond_is_active)
continue;
/* Process commands. */
if (*line == '@')
{
if (skip_to_end
&& n == 4 && !memcmp (line, "@end", 4)
&& (line[4]==' '||line[4]=='\t'||!line[4]))
{
skip_to_end = 0;
}
else if (cond_in_verbatim)
{
got_line = 1;
}
else if (n == 6 && !memcmp (line, "@macro", 6))
{
macroname = xstrdup (p);
macrovalue = xmalloc ((macrovaluesize = 1024));
macrovalueused = 0;
}
else if (n == 4 && !memcmp (line, "@set", 4))
{
set_variable (p);
}
else if (n == 8 && !memcmp (line, "@manpage", 8))
{
free (*section_name);
*section_name = NULL;
finish_page ();
start_page (p);
in_pause = 0;
}
else if (n == 8 && !memcmp (line, "@mansect", 8))
{
if (!thepage.name)
err ("%s:%d: section outside of a man page", fname, lnr);
else
{
free (*section_name);
*section_name = ascii_strupr (xstrdup (p));
in_pause = 0;
skip_sect_line = 1;
}
}
else if (n == 9 && !memcmp (line, "@manpause", 9))
{
if (!*section_name)
err ("%s:%d: pausing outside of a man section", fname, lnr);
else if (in_pause)
err ("%s:%d: already pausing", fname, lnr);
else
in_pause = 1;
}
else if (n == 8 && !memcmp (line, "@mancont", 8))
{
if (!*section_name)
err ("%s:%d: continue outside of a man section", fname, lnr);
else if (!in_pause)
err ("%s:%d: continue while not pausing", fname, lnr);
else
in_pause = 0;
}
else if (n == 5 && !memcmp (line, "@menu", 5)
&& (line[5]==' '||line[5]=='\t'||!line[5]))
{
skip_to_end = 1;
}
else if (n == 8 && !memcmp (line, "@include", 8)
&& (line[8]==' '||line[8]=='\t'||!line[8]))
{
char *incname = xstrdup (p);
FILE *incfp = fopen (incname, "r");
if (!incfp && opt_include && *opt_include && *p != '/')
{
free (incname);
incname = xmalloc (strlen (opt_include) + 1
+ strlen (p) + 1);
strcpy (incname, opt_include);
if ( incname[strlen (incname)-1] != '/' )
strcat (incname, "/");
strcat (incname, p);
incfp = fopen (incname, "r");
}
if (!incfp)
- err ("can't open include file '%s':%s",
+ err ("can't open include file '%s': %s",
incname, strerror (errno));
else
{
parse_file (incname, incfp, section_name, in_pause);
fclose (incfp);
}
free (incname);
}
else if (n == 4 && !memcmp (line, "@bye", 4)
&& (line[4]==' '||line[4]=='\t'||!line[4]))
{
break;
}
else if (!skip_to_end)
got_line = 1;
}
else if (!skip_to_end)
got_line = 1;
if (got_line && cond_in_verbatim)
add_content (*section_name, line, 1);
else if (got_line && thepage.name && *section_name && !in_pause)
add_content (*section_name, line, 0);
}
if (ferror (fp))
err ("%s:%d: read error: %s", fname, lnr, strerror (errno));
free (macroname);
free (macrovalue);
free (line);
}
static void
top_parse_file (const char *fname, FILE *fp)
{
char *section_name = NULL; /* Name of the current section or NULL
if not in a section. */
macro_t m;
while (macrolist)
{
macro_t next = macrolist->next;
free (macrolist->value);
free (macrolist);
macrolist = next;
}
while (variablelist)
{
macro_t next = variablelist->next;
free (variablelist->value);
free (variablelist);
variablelist = next;
}
for (m=predefinedmacrolist; m; m = m->next)
set_macro (m->name, xstrdup ("1"));
cond_is_active = 1;
cond_in_verbatim = 0;
parse_file (fname, fp, §ion_name, 0);
free (section_name);
finish_page ();
}
int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
int last_argc = -1;
opt_source = "GNU";
opt_release = "";
/* Define default macros. The trick is that these macros are not
defined when using the actual texinfo renderer. */
add_predefined_macro ("isman");
add_predefined_macro ("manverb");
/* Option parsing. */
if (argc)
{
argc--; argv++;
}
while (argc && last_argc != argc )
{
last_argc = argc;
if (!strcmp (*argv, "--"))
{
argc--; argv++;
break;
}
else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--help"))
{
puts (
"Usage: " PGM " [OPTION] [FILE]\n"
"Extract man pages from a Texinfo source.\n\n"
" --source NAME use NAME as source field\n"
" --release STRING use STRING as the release field\n"
" --store write output using @manpage name\n"
" --select NAME only output pages with @manpage NAME\n"
" --verbose enable extra informational output\n"
" --debug enable additional debug output\n"
" --help display this help and exit\n"
" -I DIR also search in include DIR\n"
" -D gpgone the only useable define\n\n"
"With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.\n\n"
"Report bugs to .");
exit (0);
}
else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--version"))
{
puts (PGM " " VERSION "\n"
"Copyright (C) 2005 g10 Code GmbH\n"
"This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY.\n"
"This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it\n"
"under certain conditions. See the file COPYING for details.");
exit (0);
}
else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--verbose"))
{
verbose = 1;
argc--; argv++;
}
else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--quiet"))
{
quiet = 1;
argc--; argv++;
}
else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--debug"))
{
verbose = debug = 1;
argc--; argv++;
}
else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--source"))
{
argc--; argv++;
if (argc)
{
opt_source = *argv;
argc--; argv++;
}
}
else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--release"))
{
argc--; argv++;
if (argc)
{
opt_release = *argv;
argc--; argv++;
}
}
else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--store"))
{
opt_store = 1;
argc--; argv++;
}
else if (!strcmp (*argv, "--select"))
{
argc--; argv++;
if (argc)
{
opt_select = strrchr (*argv, '/');
if (opt_select)
opt_select++;
else
opt_select = *argv;
argc--; argv++;
}
}
else if (!strcmp (*argv, "-I"))
{
argc--; argv++;
if (argc)
{
opt_include = *argv;
argc--; argv++;
}
}
else if (!strcmp (*argv, "-D"))
{
argc--; argv++;
if (argc)
{
add_predefined_macro (*argv);
argc--; argv++;
}
}
}
if (argc > 1)
die ("usage: " PGM " [OPTION] [FILE] (try --help for more information)\n");
/* Start processing. */
if (argc && strcmp (*argv, "-"))
{
FILE *fp = fopen (*argv, "rb");
if (!fp)
die ("%s:0: can't open file: %s", *argv, strerror (errno));
top_parse_file (*argv, fp);
fclose (fp);
}
else
top_parse_file ("-", stdin);
return !!any_error;
}
/*
Local Variables:
compile-command: "gcc -Wall -g -Wall -o yat2m yat2m.c"
End:
*/